FAR-FIELD EXTENSION FOR DIGITAL ASSISTANT SERVICES

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

[0001] This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/507,151 entitled "FAR-FIELD EXTENSION FOR DIGITAL ASSISTANT SERVICES," filed on May 16, 2017; Denmark Patent Application No. PA 2017 70434, entitled "FAR- FIELD EXTENSION FOR DIGITAL ASSISTANT SERVICES", filed on June 2, 2017 ; Denmark Patent Application No. PA 2017 70435, entitled "FAR-FIELD EXTENSION FOR DIGITAL ASSISTANT SERVICES", filed on June 2, 2017 ; and U.S. non-provisional Patent Application Serial No. 15/679,108, entitled "FAR-FIELD EXTENSION FOR DIGITAL ASSISTANT SERVICES," filed on August 16, 2017, the contents of each of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

Field

[0002] This relates generally to intelligent automated assistants and, more specifically, to far field extension for digital assistant services.

Background

[0003] Intelligent automated assistants (or digital assistants) can provide a beneficial interface between human users and electronic devices. Such assistants can allow users to interact with devices or systems using natural language in spoken and/or text forms. For example, a user can provide a speech input containing a user request to a digital assistant operating on an electronic device. The digital assistant can interpret the user's intent from the speech input and operationalize the user's intent into tasks. The tasks can then be performed by executing one or more services of the electronic device, and a relevant output responsive to the user request can be returned to the user.

[0004] Using a digital assistant typically require direct interaction between the user and the digital assistant. For example, the user may be required to be in close proximity (e.g., in the same room) with the electronic device on which the digital assistant operates. The digital assistant may thus directly receive the user's speech input via its microphone and provide response to the user via its speaker. Under certain circumstances, requiring the user to be in close proximity with the electronic device may cause difficulty and inconvenience for the user to interact with the digital assistant. For example, if the user and the electronic device on which the digital assistant operates are separated beyond a distance (e.g., in different rooms) such that the digital assistant is incapable of, or has difficult of, receiving the user's speech input, the digital assistant may be incapable of providing digital assistant services to the user. Thus, techniques for far-field extension of digital assistant services are desired.

[0005] Furthermore, different types of electronic devices may have different capabilities. As a result, digital assistant services provided at different devices may be different. Certain digital assistant services may not be provided at certain devices due to device capability limitations. For example, while a digital assistant operating on a smartphone device may output voice reading of text messages, a digital assistant operating on a TV set-top box may be incapable of doing the same due to device limitations. Thus, it is desired to provide digital assistant services using multiple devices to mitigate the device capability limitation.

Summary

[0006] Systems and processes for providing digital assistant services are provided.

[0007] Example methods are disclosed herein. An example method includes, at an electronic device having one or more processors, receiving, from a first user, a first speech input representing a user request. The method further includes obtaining an identity of the first user; and in accordance with the user identity, providing a representation of the user request to at least one of a second electronic device or a third electronic device. The method further includes receiving, based on a determination of whether the second electronic device or the third electronic device, or both, is to provide the response to the first electronic device, the response to the user request from the second electronic device or the third electronic device. The method further includes providing a representation the response to the first user.

[0008] Example non-transitory computer-readable media are disclosed herein. An example non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs. The one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to receive, from a first user, a first speech input representing a user request. The one or more programs further comprise instructions that cause the electronic device to obtain an identity of the first user; and in accordance with the user identity, provide a representation of the user request to at least one of a second electronic device or a third electronic device. The one or more programs further comprise instructions that cause the electronic device to receive, based on a determination of whether the second electronic device or the third electronic device, or both, is to provide the response to the first electronic device, the response to the user request from the second electronic device or the third electronic device. The one or more programs further comprise instructions that cause the electronic device to provide a representation of the response to the first user.

[0009] Example electronic devices are disclosed herein. An example electronic device comprises one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, where the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for receiving, from a first user, a first speech input representing a user request. The one or more programs further include instructions for obtaining an identity of the first user; and in accordance with the user identity, providing a representation of the user request to at least one of a second electronic device or a third electronic device. The one or more programs further include instructions for receiving, based on a determination of whether the second electronic device or the third electronic device, or both, is to provide the response to the first electronic device, the response to the user request from the second electronic device or the third electronic device. The one or more programs further include instructions for providing a representation of the response to the first user.

[0010] An example electronic device comprises means for receiving, from a first user, a first speech input representing a user request. The electronic device further includes means obtaining an identity of the first user; and in accordance with the user identity, providing a representation of the user request to at least one of a second electronic device or a third electronic device. The electronic device further includes means for receiving, based on a determination of whether the second electronic device or the third electronic device, or both, is to provide the response to the first electronic device, the response to the user request from the second electronic device or the third electronic device. The electronic device further includes means for providing a representation of the response to the first user.

[0011] Example methods are disclosed herein. An example method includes, at an electronic device having one or more processors, receiving a notification of an event associated with a first user. The method further includes, in response to receiving the notification, outputting an indication of the notification. The method further includes receiving one or more speech inputs; and in accordance with the one or more speech inputs, determining whether the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device. The method further includes, in accordance with a determination that the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device, providing the notification at the first electronic device.

[0012] Example non-transitory computer-readable media are disclosed herein. An example non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs. The one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to receive a notification of an event associated with a first user. The one or more programs further include instructions that cause the electronic device to output an indication of the notification in response to receiving the notification. The one or more programs further include instructions that cause the electronic device to receive one or more speech inputs; and in accordance with the one or more speech inputs, determine whether the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device. The one or more programs further include instructions that cause the electronic device to, in accordance with a determination that the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device, provide the notification at the first electronic device.

[0013] Example electronic devices are disclosed herein. An example electronic device comprises one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, where the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for receiving a notification of an event associated with a first user. The one or more programs including instructions for, in response to receiving the notification, outputting an indication of the notification. The one or more programs including instructions for receiving one or more speech inputs; and in accordance with the one or more speech inputs, determining whether the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device. The one or more programs including instructions for, in accordance with a determination that the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device, providing the notification at the first electronic device.

[0014] An example electronic device comprises means for receiving a notification of an event associated with a first user. The electronic device further includes means for, in response to receiving the notification, outputting an indication of the notification. The electronic device further includes means for receiving one or more speech inputs; and in accordance with the one or more speech inputs, determining whether the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device. The electronic device further includes means for, in accordance with a determination that the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device, providing the notification at the first electronic device.

[0015] Example methods are disclosed herein. An example method includes, at an electronic device having one or more processors, receiving, from a first user, a first speech input representing a user request. The method further includes obtaining capability data associated with one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. The method further includes, in accordance with the capability data, identifying, from the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device, a second electronic device for providing at least a portion of a response to the user request. The method further includes causing the second electronic device to provide at least a portion of the response to the first user.

[0016] Example non-transitory computer-readable media are disclosed herein. An example non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs. The one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to receive, from a first user, a first speech input representing a user request. The one or more programs further include instructions that cause the electronic device to obtain capability data associated with one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. The one or more programs further include instructions that cause the electronic device to, in accordance with the capability data, identify, from the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device, a second electronic device for providing at least a portion of a response to the user request. The one or more programs further include instructions that cause the electronic device to provide at least a portion of the response to the first user.

[0017] Example electronic devices are disclosed herein. An example electronic device comprises one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, where the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for receiving, from a first user, a first speech input representing a user request. The one or more programs further include instructions for obtaining capability data associated with one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. The one or more programs further include instructions for, in accordance with the capability data, identifying, from the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device, a second electronic device for providing at least a portion of a response to the user request. The one or more programs further include instructions for causing the second electronic device to provide at least a portion of the response to the first user.

[0018] An example electronic device comprises means for receiving, from a first user, a first speech input representing a user request. The electronic device further includes means for obtaining capability data associated with one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. The electronic device further includes means for, in accordance with the capability data, identifying, from the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device, a second electronic device for providing at least a portion of a response to the user request. The electronic device further includes means for causing the second electronic device to provide at least a portion of the response to the first user.

[0019] Techniques for far-field extension of digital assistant services by one or more service-extension devices can improve the user-interaction interface. For example, using one or more service-extension devices, a user is no longer required to be in close proximity (e.g., in the same room) with an electronic device for receiving digital assistant services provided by the digital assistant operating on the electronic device. Further, the service-extension devices can flexibly obtain responses to user requests from a device disposed in the vicinity of the user and/or a device disposed remotely, depending on the content of the user request. For example, if the user requests personal information (e.g., calendar events), a service- extension device may obtain a response from a device disposed in the vicinity of the user (e.g., the user's smartphone), rather than a remote device, thereby reducing the time required for providing services to the user. Under some circumstances, obtaining a response from a local device may also alleviate privacy concerns because sensitive or confidential information may be contained in a communicated between local devices. Further, the ability to obtain responses from different devices enhances the capability of a service-extension device to provide responses to a user. For example, if user-requested information cannot be obtained from one device (e.g., the user's smartphone), the service-extension device may obtain the response from another device (e.g., a server). As a result, a service-extension device can dynamically obtain responses from one or more devices, and efficiently extend digital assistant services from multiple devices.

[0020] One or more service-extension devices can further extend digital assistant services to enhance the continuity in providing digital assistant services. For example, one or more service-extension devices can determine whether a response to the user request (e.g., playing music) is to be provided at any particular service-extension device or at another electronic device, depending on the user's location, movement, preferences, etc. This capability of selecting a best device to provide service extension enhances the continuity for providing digital assistant services among multiple devices and further improves the user-interaction interface. Moreover, one or more service-extension devices can be shared by multiple users (e.g., family members) and the operation of the devices can be based on authentication of the multiple users. As a result, the same service-extension devices can extend digital assistant services from multiple electronic devices associated with multiple users. This capability of sharing service-extension devices enhances the efficiency in providing the digital assistant extension services.

[0021] Furthermore, techniques for providing a notification to the user using one or more service-extension devices can provide prompt notifications to the user in an extended distance. For example, a user may be separated from a user device for a distance and may thus be incapable of directly receiving notifications provided by the user device. One or more service-extension devices can receive notifications from the user device (e.g., the user's smartphone), and provide an audio and/or visual output associated with the notification to the user. Thus, the service-extension devices effectively extended the distance that a user device can provide notifications to the user.

[0022] Furthermore, techniques for providing digital assistant services using multiple devices can mitigate the device capability limitation. For example, a user device may not be able to provide services in response to user requests due to the limitation of its capability (e.g., small screen size, lack of requested information, etc.). The user device can identify another device that is capable of providing the services and cause the other device to provide the requested services to the user. The ability to identify another device that is capable of providing the requested services leverages the capabilities of a collection of devices to provide digital assistant services to the user, and enhances the user-interaction efficiency by reducing the user's burden to seek for a suitable device.

[0023] Furthermore, these techniques enhance the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

Brief Description of the Drawings

[0024] FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating a system and environment for implementing a digital assistant, according to various examples.

[0025] FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant, according to various examples.

[0026] FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling, according to various examples.

[0027] FIG. 3 illustrates a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant, according to various examples.

[0028] FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, according to various examples.

[0029] FIG. 5A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device, according to various examples.

[0030] FIG. 5B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, according to various examples.

[0031] FIG. 6A illustrates a personal electronic device, according to various examples.

[0032] FIG. 6B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device, according to various examples.

[0033] FIG. 7A is a block diagram illustrating a digital assistant system or a server portion thereof, according to various examples.

[0034] FIG. 7B illustrates the functions of the digital assistant shown in FIG. 7A, according to various examples.

[0035] FIG. 7C illustrates a portion of an ontology, according to various examples.

[0036] FIGs. 8A-8B illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services at a first electronic device based on a user input, according to various examples.

[0037] FIGs. 9A-9C illustrate functionalities of obtaining an identity of a user at a first electronic device, according to various examples.

[0038] FIGs. lOA-lOC illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services based on a user request for information, according to various examples.

[0039] FIGs. 1 lA-1 ID illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services based on a user request for performing a task, according to various examples.

[0040] FIGs. 12A-12C illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services based on a user request for information, according to various examples.

[0041] FIGs. 13A-13B illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services at a first electronic device or additional electronic devices, according to various examples.

[0042] FIG. 14 illustrates functionalities of providing continuity of digital assistant services between different electronic devices, according to various examples.

[0043] FIGs. 15A-15G illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services based on a notification of an event, according to various examples.

[0044] FIGs. 16A-16I illustrate a process for providing a digital assistant service at a first electronic device based on a user input, according to various examples.

[0045] FIGs. 17A-17D illustrate a process for providing digital assistant services based on a notification of an event, according to various examples.

[0046] FIGs. 18A-18E illustrate functionalities for providing digital assistant services based on capabilities of multiple electronic devices, according to various examples.

[0047] FIGs. 19A-19D illustrate a process for providing digital assistant services based on capabilities of multiple electronic devices, according to various examples. Detailed Description

[0048] In the following description of examples, reference is made to the accompanying drawings in which are shown by way of illustration specific examples that can be practiced. It is to be understood that other examples can be used and structural changes can be made without departing from the scope of the various examples.

[0049] The present disclosure provides techniques for far-field extension of digital assistant services by one or more service-extension devices. As described, using service- extension devices can improve the user-interaction interface. In some examples, a first electronic device can be a service-extension device. The first electronic device can receive a speech input representing a user request. The first electronic device can obtain an identity of the user based on, for example, authentication of the user by a second electronic device and/or a third electronic device. In some examples, the second electronic device can be a device disposed remotely from the first electronic device (e.g., a remote server); and the third electronic device can be a device disposed in the vicinity of the first electronic device (e.g., the user's smartphone). After the identified is obtained, the first electronic device can provide a representation of the user request to at least one of the second electronic device and the third electronic device. One or both of the second electronic device and the third electronic device can determine whether to provide a response to the first electronic device. The first electronic device (e.g., a service-extension device) can receive the response and provide a representation of the response to the user. As such, the first electronic device effectively extends the digital assistant services provided by one or both of the second electronic device and the third electronic device.

[0050] The present disclosure further provides techniques for providing notifications using one or more service-extension devices. As described above, using one or more service- extension devices, notifications can be provided to the user promptly in an extended distance. In some examples, a first electronic device can receive a notification from another device (e.g., a user's smartphone) and output an indication (e.g., a beep) of the notification. The first electronic device may receive one or more speech inputs inquiring about the indication and instructing the first electronic device to perform an operation of the notification (e.g., outputting the notification). The first electronic device can determine whether the notification should be provided; and provide the notification according to the determination. [0051] The present disclosure further provides techniques for providing digital assistant services using multiple devices. As described above, providing digital assistant services using multiple devices can mitigate the device capability limitation. In some examples, a first electronic device receives a speech input representing a user request and obtains capability data associated with one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. The capability data can include device capabilities and informational capabilities. In accordance with the capability data, the first electronic device can identify a second electronic device for providing at least a portion of a response to the user request; and cause the second electronic device to provide at least a portion of the response.

[0052] Although the following description uses terms "first," "second," etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first input could be termed a second input, and, similarly, a second input could be termed a first input, without departing from the scope of the various described examples. The first input and the second input are both inputs and, in some cases, are separate and different inputs.

[0053] The terminology used in the description of the various described examples herein is for the purpose of describing particular examples only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described examples and the appended claims, the singular forms "a," "an," and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term "and/or" as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms "includes," "including," "comprises," and/or "comprising," when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof.

[0054] The term "if may be construed to mean "when" or "upon" or "in response to determining" or "in response to detecting," depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase "if it is determined" or "if [a stated condition or event] is detected" may be construed to mean "upon determining" or "in response to determining" or "upon detecting [the stated condition or event]" or "in response to detecting [the stated condition or event]," depending on the context.

1. System and Environment

[0055] FIG. 1 illustrates a block diagram of system 100 according to various examples. In some examples, system 100 implements a digital assistant. The terms "digital assistant," "virtual assistant," "intelligent automated assistant," or "automatic digital assistant" refer to any information processing system that interprets natural language input in spoken and/or textual form to infer user intent, and performs actions based on the inferred user intent. For example, to act on an inferred user intent, the system performs one or more of the following: identifying a task flow with steps and parameters designed to accomplish the inferred user intent, inputting specific requirements from the inferred user intent into the task flow;

executing the task flow by invoking programs, methods, services, APIs, or the like; and generating output responses to the user in an audible (e.g., speech) and/or visual form.

[0056] Specifically, a digital assistant is capable of accepting a user request at least partially in the form of a natural language command, request, statement, narrative, and/or inquiry. Typically, the user request seeks either an informational answer or performance of a task by the digital assistant. A satisfactory response to the user request includes a provision of the requested informational answer, a performance of the requested task, or a combination of the two. For example, a user asks the digital assistant a question, such as "Where am I right now?" Based on the user's current location, the digital assistant answers, "You are in Central Park near the west gate." The user also requests the performance of a task, for example, "Please invite my friends to my girlfriend's birthday party next week." In response, the digital assistant can acknowledge the request by saying "Yes, right away," and then send a suitable calendar invite on behalf of the user to each of the user's friends listed in the user's electronic address book. During performance of a requested task, the digital assistant sometimes interacts with the user in a continuous dialogue involving multiple exchanges of information over an extended period of time. There are numerous other ways of interacting with a digital assistant to request information or performance of various tasks. In addition to providing verbal responses and taking programmed actions, the digital assistant also provides responses in other visual or audio forms, e.g., as text, alerts, music, videos, animations, etc.

[0057] As shown in FIG. 1, in some examples, a digital assistant is implemented according to a client-server model. The digital assistant includes client-side portion 102 (hereafter "DA client 102") executed on user device 104 and server-side portion 106 (hereafter "DA server 106") executed on server system 108. DA client 102 communicates with DA server 106 through one or more networks 110. DA client 102 provides client-side functionalities such as user-facing input and output processing and communication with DA server 106. DA server 106 provides server-side functionalities for any number of DA clients 102 each residing on a respective user device 104.

[0058] In some examples, DA server 106 includes client-facing I/O interface 112, one or more processing modules 114, data and models 116, and I/O interface to external services 118. The client-facing I/O interface 112 facilitates the client-facing input and output processing for DA server 106. One or more processing modules 114 utilize data and models 116 to process speech input and determine the user's intent based on natural language input. Further, one or more processing modules 114 perform task execution based on inferred user intent. In some examples, DA server 106 communicates with external services 120 through network(s) 110 for task completion or information acquisition. I/O interface to external services 118 facilitates such communications.

[0059] User device 104 can be any suitable electronic device. In some examples, user device is a portable multifunctional device (e.g., device 200, described below with reference to FIG. 2A), a multifunctional device (e.g., device 400, described below with reference to FIG. 4), or a personal electronic device (e.g., device 600, described below with reference to FIG. 6A-B.) A portable multifunctional device is, for example, a mobile telephone that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Specific examples of portable multifunction devices include the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other examples of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, laptop or tablet computers. Further, in some examples, user device 104 is a non-portable multifunctional device. In particular, user device 104 is a desktop computer, a game console, a television, or a television set-top box. In some examples, user device 104 includes a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads). Further, user device 104 optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick. Various examples of electronic devices, such as multifunctional devices, are described below in greater detail. [0060] Examples of communication network(s) 110 include local area networks (LAN) and wide area networks (WAN), e.g., the Internet. Communication network(s) 110 is implemented using any known network protocol, including various wired or wireless protocols, such as, for example, Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol.

[0061] Server system 108 is implemented on one or more standalone data processing apparatus or a distributed network of computers. In some examples, server system 108 also employs various virtual devices and/or services of third-party service providers (e.g., third- party cloud service providers) to provide the underlying computing resources and/or infrastructure resources of server system 108.

[0062] In some examples, user device 104 communicates with DA server 106 via second user device 122. Second user device 122 is similar or identical to user device 104. For example, second user device 122 is similar to devices 200, 400, or 600 described below with reference to FIGs. 2A, 4, and 6A-B. User device 104 is configured to communicatively couple to second user device 122 via a direct communication connection, such as Bluetooth, NFC, BTLE, or the like, or via a wired or wireless network, such as a local Wi-Fi network. In some examples, second user device 122 is configured to act as a proxy between user device 104 and DA server 106. For example, DA client 102 of user device 104 is configured to transmit information (e.g., a user request received at user device 104) to DA server 106 via second user device 122. DA server 106 processes the information and return relevant data (e.g., data content responsive to the user request) to user device 104 via second user device 122.

[0063] In some examples, user device 104 is configured to communicate abbreviated requests for data to second user device 122 to reduce the amount of information transmitted from user device 104. Second user device 122 is configured to determine supplemental information to add to the abbreviated request to generate a complete request to transmit to DA server 106. This system architecture can advantageously allow user device 104 having limited communication capabilities and/or limited battery power (e.g., a watch or a similar compact electronic device) to access services provided by DA server 106 by using second user device 122, having greater communication capabilities and/or battery power (e.g., a mobile phone, laptop computer, tablet computer, or the like), as a proxy to DA server 106. While only two user devices 104 and 122 are shown in FIG. 1, it should be appreciated that system 100, in some examples, includes any number and type of user devices configured in this proxy configuration to communicate with DA server system 106.

[0064] Although the digital assistant shown in FIG. 1 includes both a client-side portion (e.g., DA client 102) and a server-side portion (e.g., DA server 106), in some examples, the functions of a digital assistant are implemented as a standalone application installed on a user device. In addition, the divisions of functionalities between the client and server portions of the digital assistant can vary in different implementations. For instance, in some examples, the DA client is a thin-client that provides only user-facing input and output processing functions, and delegates all other functionalities of the digital assistant to a backend server.

2. Electronic Devices

[0065] Attention is now directed toward embodiments of electronic devices for implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 200 with touch-sensitive display system 212 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display 212 is sometimes called a "touch screen" for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a "touch-sensitive display system." Device 200 includes memory 202 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory controller 222, one or more processing units (CPUs) 220, peripherals interface 218, RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 21 1, microphone 213, input/output (I/O) subsystem 206, other input control devices 216, and external port 224. Device 200 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 264. Device 200 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 200 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200). Device 200 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs on device 200 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch- sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200 or touchpad 455 of device 400). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 203. [0066] As used in the specification and claims, the term "intensity" of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure- sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch- sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch- sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch- sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button).

[0067] As used in the specification and claims, the term "tactile output" refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user's sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user's hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch- sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a "down click" or "up click" of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an "down click" or "up click" even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as "roughness" of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an "up click," a "down click," "roughness"), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.

[0068] It should be appreciated that device 200 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 200 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG. 2A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application-specific integrated circuits.

[0069] Memory 202 includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums. The computer-readable storage mediums are, for example, tangible and non-transitory. Memory 202 includes high-speed random access memory and also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Memory controller 222 controls access to memory 202 by other components of device 200. [0070] In some examples, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of memory 202 is used to store instructions (e.g., for performing aspects of processes described below) for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processor-containing system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions. In other examples, the instructions (e.g., for performing aspects of the processes described below) are stored on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium (not shown) of the server system 108 or are divided between the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of memory 202 and the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of server system 108.

[0071] Peripherals interface 218 is used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 220 and memory 202. The one or more processors 220 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 202 to perform various functions for device 200 and to process data. In some embodiments, peripherals interface 218, CPU 220, and memory controller 222 are implemented on a single chip, such as chip 204. In some other embodiments, they are implemented on separate chips.

[0072] RF (radio frequency) circuitry 208 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 208 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry 208 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11 g, IEEE 802.11η, and/or IEEE 802.1 lac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document.

[0073] Audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, and microphone 213 provide an audio interface between a user and device 200. Audio circuitry 210 receives audio data from peripherals interface 218, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 211. Speaker 211 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 210 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 213 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 210 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 218 for processing. Audio data are retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 202 and/or RF circuitry 208 by peripherals interface 218. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 210 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 312, FIG. 3). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 210 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).

[0074] I/O subsystem 206 couples input/output peripherals on device 200, such as touch screen 212 and other input control devices 216, to peripherals interface 218. I/O subsystem 206 optionally includes display controller 256, optical sensor controller 258, intensity sensor controller 259, haptic feedback controller 261, and one or more input controllers 260 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 260 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices 216. The other input control devices 216 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s) 260 are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 308, FIG. 3) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 211 and/or microphone 213. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 306, FIG. 3).

[0075] A quick press of the push button disengages a lock of touch screen 212 or begin a process that uses gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. Patent Application 11/322,549, "Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image," filed December 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No. 7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. A longer press of the push button (e.g., 306) turns power to device 200 on or off. The user is able to customize a functionality of one or more of the buttons. Touch screen 212 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.

[0076] Touch-sensitive display 212 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller 256 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen 212. Touch screen 212 displays visual output to the user. The visual output includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed "graphics"). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output correspond to user- interface objects.

[0077] Touch screen 212 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 202) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen 212 and convert the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen 212. In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch screen 212 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user.

[0078] Touch screen 212 uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies may be used in other embodiments. Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 212. In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.

[0079] A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 is analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S. Patents: 6,323,846 (Westerman et al), 6,570,557 (Westerman et al), and/or 6,677,932 (Westerman), and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. However, touch screen 212 displays visual output from device 200, whereas touch- sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.

[0080] A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 is as described in the following applications: (1) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/381,313, "Multipoint Touch Surface Controller," filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/840,862, "Multipoint Touchscreen," filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/903,964, "Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices," filed July 30, 2004; (4) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/048,264, "Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices," filed January 31, 2005; (5) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/038,590, "Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive Input Devices," filed January 18, 2005; (6) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,758, "Virtual Input Device Placement On A Touch Screen User Interface," filed September 16, 2005; (7) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,700, "Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface," filed September 16, 2005; (8) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,737, "Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen Virtual

Keyboard," filed September 16, 2005; and (9) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/367,749, "Multi-Functional Hand-Held Device," filed March 3, 2006. All of these applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.

[0081] Touch screen 212 has, for example, a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user makes contact with touch screen 212 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.

[0082] In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 200 includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some

embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch screen 212 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.

[0083] Device 200 also includes power system 262 for powering the various components. Power system 262 includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.

[0084] Device 200 also includes one or more optical sensors 264. FIG. 2A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 258 in I/O subsystem 206. Optical sensor 264 includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor 264 receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 243 (also called a camera module), optical sensor 264 captures still images or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212 on the front of the device so that the touch screen display is used as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user's image is obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display. In some embodiments, the position of optical sensor 264 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a single optical sensor 264 is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition. [0085] Device 200 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265. FIG. 2A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 259 in I/O subsystem 206. Contact intensity sensor 265 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor 265 receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200.

[0086] Device 200 also includes one or more proximity sensors 266. FIG. 2A shows proximity sensor 266 coupled to peripherals interface 218. Alternately, proximity sensor 266 is coupled to input controller 260 in I/O subsystem 206. Proximity sensor 266 is performed as described in U.S. Patent Application Nos. 11/241,839, "Proximity Detector In Handheld Device"; 11/240,788, "Proximity Detector In Handheld Device"; 11/620,702, "Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output"; 11/586,862, "Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In Portable Devices"; and 11/638,251, "Methods And Systems For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals," which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 212 when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).

[0087] Device 200 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 267. FIG. 2A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 261 in I/O subsystem 206. Tactile output generator 267 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Contact intensity sensor 265 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 233 and generates tactile outputs on device 200 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 200. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 200) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 200). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200.

[0088] Device 200 also includes one or more accelerometers 268. FIG. 2A shows accelerometer 268 coupled to peripherals interface 218. Alternately, accelerometer 268 is coupled to an input controller 260 in I/O subsystem 206. Accelerometer 268 performs, for example, as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, "Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices," and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20060017692, "Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer," both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device 200 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 268, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 200.

[0089] In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 202 include operating system 226, communication module (or set of instructions) 228, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 230, graphics module (or set of instructions) 232, text input module (or set of instructions) 234, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 235, Digital Assistant Client Module 229, and applications (or sets of instructions) 236. Further, memory 202 stores data and models, such as user data and models 231. Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 202 (FIG. 2A) or 470 (FIG. 4) stores device/global internal state 257, as shown in FIGS. 2A and 4. Device/global internal state 257 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display 212; sensor state, including information obtained from the device's various sensors and input control devices 216; and location information concerning the device's location and/or attitude.

[0090] Operating system 226 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as Vx Works) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.

[0091] Communication module 228 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 224 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 208 and/or external port 224. External port 224 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with, the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.

[0092] Contact/motion module 230 optionally detects contact with touch screen 212 (in conjunction with display controller 256) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module 230 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module 230 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface.

Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., "multitouch'Vmultiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 230 and display controller 256 detect contact on a touchpad. [0093] In some embodiments, contact/motion module 230 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has "clicked" on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 200). For example, a mouse "click" threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click "intensity" parameter).

[0094] Contact/motion module 230 optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event.

[0095] Graphics module 232 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 212 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term "graphics" includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including ,without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.

[0096] In some embodiments, graphics module 232 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 232 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 256.

[0097] Haptic feedback module 233 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 267 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 200 in response to user interactions with device 200.

[0098] Text input module 234, which is, in some examples, a component of graphics module 232, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 237, email 240, IM 241 , browser 247, and any other application that needs text input).

[0099] GPS module 235 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 238 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 243 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location- based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).

[0100] Digital assistant client module 229 includes various client-side digital assistant instructions to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant. For example, digital assistant client module 229 is capable of accepting voice input (e.g., speech input), text input, touch input, and/or gestural input through various user interfaces (e.g., microphone 213, accelerometer(s) 268, touch-sensitive display system 212, optical sensor(s) 229, other input control devices 216, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200. Digital assistant client module 229 is also capable of providing output in audio (e.g., speech output), visual, and/or tactile forms through various output interfaces (e.g., speaker 21 1, touch-sensitive display system 212, tactile output generator(s) 267, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200. For example, output is provided as voice, sound, alerts, text messages, menus, graphics, videos, animations, vibrations, and/or combinations of two or more of the above. During operation, digital assistant client module 229 communicates with DA server 106 using RF circuitry 208.

[0101] User data and models 231 include various data associated with the user (e.g., user- specific vocabulary data, user preference data, user-specified name pronunciations, data from the user's electronic address book, to-do lists, shopping lists, etc.) to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant. Further, user data and models 231 include various models (e.g., speech recognition models, statistical language models, natural language processing models, ontology, task flow models, service models, etc.) for processing user input and determining user intent.

[0102] In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 utilizes the various sensors, subsystems, and peripheral devices of portable multifunction device 200 to gather additional information from the surrounding environment of the portable multifunction device 200 to establish a context associated with a user, the current user interaction, and/or the current user input. In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 provides the contextual information or a subset thereof with the user input to DA server 106 to help infer the user's intent. In some examples, the digital assistant also uses the contextual information to determine how to prepare and deliver outputs to the user. Contextual information is referred to as context data.

[0103] In some examples, the contextual information that accompanies the user input includes sensor information, e.g., lighting, ambient noise, ambient temperature, images or videos of the surrounding environment, etc. In some examples, the contextual information can also include the physical state of the device, e.g., device orientation, device location, device temperature, power level, speed, acceleration, motion patterns, cellular signals strength, etc. In some examples, information related to the software state of DA server 106, e.g., running processes, installed programs, past and present network activities, background services, error logs, resources usage, etc., and of portable multifunction device 200 is provided to DA server 106 as contextual information associated with a user input.

[0104] In some examples, the digital assistant client module 229 selectively provides information (e.g., user data 231) stored on the portable multifunction device 200 in response to requests from DA server 106. In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 also elicits additional input from the user via a natural language dialogue or other user interfaces upon request by DA server 106. Digital assistant client module 229 passes the additional input to DA server 106 to help DA server 106 in intent deduction and/or fulfillment of the user's intent expressed in the user request.

[0105] A more detailed description of a digital assistant is described below with reference to FIGs. 7A-C. It should be recognized that digital assistant client module 229 can include any number of the sub-modules of digital assistant module 726 described below. [0106] Applications 236 include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:

• Contacts module 237 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);

• Telephone module 238;

• Video conference module 239;

• E-mail client module 240;

• Instant messaging (IM) module 241;

• Workout support module 242;

• Camera module 243 for still and/or video images;

• Image management module 244;

• Video player module;

• Music player module;

• Browser module 247;

• Calendar module 248;

• Widget modules 249, which includes, in some examples, one or more of: weather widget 249-1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249- 4, dictionary widget 249-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user- created widgets 249-6;

• Widget creator module 250 for making user-created widgets 249-6;

• S earch module 251 ;

• Video and music player module 252, which merges video player module and music player module;

• Notes module 253; • Map module 254; and/or

• Online video module 255.

[0107] Examples of other applications 236 that are stored in memory 202 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.

[0108] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, contacts module 237 are used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 292 of contacts module 237 in memory 202 or memory 470), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e- mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 238, video conference module 239, e-mail 240, or IM 241 ; and so forth.

[0109] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, telephone module 238 are used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module 237, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies.

[0110] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, touch screen 212, display controller 256, optical sensor 264, optical sensor controller 258, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, contacts module 237, and telephone module 238, video conference module 239 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions. [0111] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, e-mail client module 240 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module 244, e-mail client module 240 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 243.

[0112] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, the instant messaging module 241 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or

Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, "instant messaging" refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).

[0113] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, GPS module 235, map module 254, and music player module, workout support module 242 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals);

communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data.

[0114] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, optical sensor(s) 264, optical sensor controller 258, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and image management module 244, camera module 243 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 202, modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory 202. [0115] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and camera module 243, image management module 244 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.

[0116] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, browser module 247 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.

[0117] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, e-mail client module 240, and browser module 247, calendar module 248 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.

[0118] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and browser module 247, widget modules 249 are mini-applications that can be downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 249-1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249-4, and dictionary widget 249-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 249-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).

[0119] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and browser module 247, the widget creator module 250 are used by a user to create widgets (e.g., tuming a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).

[0120] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, search module 251 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 202 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.

[0121] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, RF circuitry 208, and browser module 247, video and music player module 252 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen 212 or on an external, connected display via external port 224). In some embodiments, device 200 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).

[0122] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, notes module 253 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.

[0123] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, GPS module 235, and browser module 247, map module 254 are used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.

[0124] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, RF circuitry 208, text input module 234, e-mail client module 240, and browser module 247, online video module 255 includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port 224), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 241, rather than e-mail client module 240, is used to send a link to a particular online video. Additional description of the online video application can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/936,562, "Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos," filed June 20, 2007, and U.S. Patent Application No. 11/968,067, "Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos," filed December 31, 2007, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

[0125] Each of the above-identified modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules can be combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. For example, video player module can be combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 252, FIG. 2A). In some embodiments, memory 202 stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 202 stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[0126] In some embodiments, device 200 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 200, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 200 is reduced.

[0127] The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device 200 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 200. In such embodiments, a "menu button" is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.

[0128] FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 202 (FIG. 2A) or 470 (FIG. 4) includes event sorter 270 (e.g., in operating system 226) and a respective application 236-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 237-251, 255, 480-490).

[0129] Event sorter 270 receives event information and determines the application 236-1 and application view 291 of application 236-1 to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter 270 includes event monitor 271 and event dispatcher module 274. In some embodiments, application 236-1 includes application internal state 292, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 212 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 257 is used by event sorter 270 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 292 is used by event sorter 270 to determine application views 291 to which to deliver event information.

[0130] In some embodiments, application internal state 292 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 236-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 236-1 , a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 236-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.

[0131] Event monitor 271 receives event information from peripherals interface 218. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch- sensitive display 212, as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 218 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 206 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 266, accelerometer(s) 268, and/or microphone 213 (through audio circuitry 210). Information that peripherals interface 218 receives from I/O subsystem 206 includes information from touch- sensitive display 212 or a touch-sensitive surface.

[0132] In some embodiments, event monitor 271 sends requests to the peripherals interface 218 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).

[0133] In some embodiments, event sorter 270 also includes a hit view determination module 272 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 273.

[0134] Hit view determination module 272 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive display 212 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display. [0135] Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs is determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.

[0136] Hit view determination module 272 receives information related to sub events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 272 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub- events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module 272, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.

[0137] Active event recognizer determination module 273 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.

[0138] Event dispatcher module 274 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 280). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 273, event dispatcher module 274 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 273. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 274 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 282. [0139] In some embodiments, operating system 226 includes event sorter 270.

Alternatively, application 236-1 includes event sorter 270. In yet other embodiments, event sorter 270 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 202, such as contact/motion module 230.

[0140] In some embodiments, application 236-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 290 and one or more application views 291 , each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application's user interface. Each application view 291 of the application 236-1 includes one or more event recognizers 280. Typically, a respective application view 291 includes a plurality of event recognizers 280. In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 280 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 236-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler 290 includes one or more of: data updater 276, object updater 277, GUI updater 278, and/or event data 279 received from event sorter 270. Event handler 290 utilizes or calls data updater 276, object updater 277, or GUI updater 278 to update the application internal state 292.

Alternatively, one or more of the application views 291 include one or more respective event handlers 290. Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a respective application view 291.

[0141] A respective event recognizer 280 receives event information (e.g., event data 279) from event sorter 270 and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer 280 includes event receiver 282 and event comparator 284. In some

embodiments, event recognizer 280 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 283, and event delivery instructions 288 (which include sub-event delivery instructions).

[0142] Event receiver 282 receives event information from event sorter 270. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device. [0143] Event comparator 284 compares the event information to predefined event or sub- event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 284 includes event definitions 286. Event definitions 286 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (287-1), event 2 (287- 2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event (287) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event 1 (287-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (287-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch- sensitive display 212, and liftoff of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 290.

[0144] In some embodiments, event definition 287 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 212, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 212, event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 290, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 290 should be activated. For example, event comparator 284 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.

[0145] In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event (287) also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer's event type.

[0146] When a respective event recognizer 280 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 286, the respective event recognizer 280 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.

[0147] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 includes metadata 283 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.

[0148] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 activates event handler 290 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 290. Activating an event handler 290 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 280 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 290 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process

[0149] In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 288 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.

[0150] In some embodiments, data updater 276 creates and updates data used in application 236-1. For example, data updater 276 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 237, or stores a video file used in video player module. In some embodiments, object updater 277 creates and updates objects used in application 236-1. For example, object updater 277 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater 278 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 278 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 232 for display on a touch- sensitive display.

[0151] In some embodiments, event handler(s) 290 includes or has access to data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278. In some embodiments, data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a single module of a respective application 236-1 or application view 291. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.

[0152] It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 200 with input devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc. on touchpads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.

[0153] FIG. 3 illustrates a portable multifunction device 200 having a touch screen 212 in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 300. In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 302 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 303 (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward), and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 200. In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.

[0154] Device 200 also includes one or more physical buttons, such as "home" or menu button 304. As described previously, menu button 304 is used to navigate to any application 236 in a set of applications that is executed on device 200. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 212.

[0155] In one embodiment, device 200 includes touch screen 212, menu button 304, push button 306 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 308, subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 310, headset jack 312, and docking/charging external port 224. Push button 306 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In an alternative embodiment, device 200 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 213. Device 200 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen 212 and/or one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 200.

[0156] FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device 400 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 400 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child's learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 400 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 410, one or more network or other communications interfaces 460, memory 470, and one or more communication buses 420 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 420 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device 400 includes input/output (I/O) interface 430 comprising display 440, which is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface 430 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 450 and touchpad 455, tactile output generator 457 for generating tactile outputs on device 400 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 267 described above with reference to FIG. 2A), sensors 459 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 265 described above with reference to FIG. 2A).

Memory 470 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes nonvolatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 470 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 410. In some embodiments, memory 470 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 470 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200. For example, memory 470 of device 400 optionally stores drawing module 480, presentation module 482, word processing module 484, website creation module 486, disk authoring module 488, and/or spreadsheet module 490, while memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2A) optionally does not store these modules.

[0157] Each of the above-identified elements in FIG. 4 is, in some examples, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above-identified modules or programs (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 470 stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 470 stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[0158] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces that can be implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 200.

[0159] FIG. 5A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 200 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are implemented on device 400. In some embodiments, user interface 500 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:

[0160] Signal strength indicator(s) 502 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;

• Time 504; Bluetooth indicator 505; Battery status indicator 506;

Tray 508 with icons for frequently used applications, such as: o Icon 516 for telephone module 238, labeled "Phone," which optionally includes an indicator 514 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; o Icon 518 for e-mail client module 240, labeled "Mail," which optionally includes an indicator 510 of the number of unread e-mails; o Icon 520 for browser module 247, labeled "Browser;" and o Icon 522 for video and music player module 252, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 252, labeled "iPod;" and

Icons for other applications, such as: o Icon 524 for IM module 241, labeled "Messages;" o Icon 526 for calendar module 248, labeled "Calendar;" o Icon 528 for image management module 244, labeled "Photos;" o Icon 530 for camera module 243, labeled "Camera;" o Icon 532 for online video module 255, labeled "Online Video;" o Icon 534 for stocks widget 249-2, labeled "Stocks;" o Icon 536 for map module 254, labeled "Maps;" o Icon 538 for weather widget 249-1, labeled "Weather;" o Icon 540 for alarm clock widget 249-4, labeled "Clock;" o Icon 542 for workout support module 242, labeled "Workout Support;" o Icon 544 for notes module 253, labeled "Notes;" and o Icon 546 for a settings application or module, labeled "Settings," which provides access to settings for device 200 and its various applications 236.

[0161] It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG. 5A are merely exemplary. For example, icon 522 for video and music player module 252 is optionally labeled "Music" or "Music Player." Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.

[0162] FIG. 5B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 400, FIG. 4) with a touch-sensitive surface 551 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 455, FIG. 4) that is separate from the display 550 (e.g., touch screen display 212). Device 400 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 457) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 551 and/or one or more tactile output generators 459 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 400.

[0163] Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 212 (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 5B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 551 in FIG. 5B) has a primary axis (e.g., 552 in FIG. 5B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 553 in FIG. 5B) on the display (e.g., 550). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 560 and 562 in FIG. 5B) with the touch- sensitive surface 551 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in FIG. 5B, 560 corresponds to 568 and 562 corresponds to 570). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 560 and 562, and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch- sensitive surface (e.g., 551 in FIG. 5B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g., 550 in FIG. 5B) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein.

[0164] Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.

[0165] FIG. 6A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 600. Device 600 includes body 602. In some embodiments, device 600 includes some or all of the features described with respect to devices 200 and 400 (e.g., FIGS. 2A-4B). In some embodiments, device 600 has touch-sensitive display screen 604, hereafter touch screen 604. Alternatively, or in addition to touch screen 604, device 600 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As with devices 200 and 400, in some embodiments, touch screen 604 (or the touch-sensitive surface) has one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied. The one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 604 (or the touch-sensitive surface) provide output data that represents the intensity of touches. The user interface of device 600 responds to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 600.

[0166] Techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are found, for example, in related applications: International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/040061, titled "Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application," filed May 8, 2013, and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/069483, titled "Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships," filed November 11, 2013, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

[0167] In some embodiments, device 600 has one or more input mechanisms 606 and 608. Input mechanisms 606 and 608, if included, are physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms. In some embodiments, device 600 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device 600 with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms permit device 600 to be worn by a user.

[0168] FIG. 6B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 600. In some embodiments, device 600 includes some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS. 2A, 2B, and 4. Device 600 has bus 612 that operatively couples I/O section 614 with one or more computer processors 616 and memory 618. I/O section 614 is connected to display 604, which can have touch-sensitive component 622 and, optionally, touch-intensity sensitive component 624. In addition, I/O section 614 is connected with communication unit 630 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques. Device 600 includes input mechanisms 606 and/or 608. Input mechanism 606 is a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example. Input mechanism 608 is a button, in some examples.

[0169] Input mechanism 608 is a microphone, in some examples. Personal electronic device 600 includes, for example, various sensors, such as GPS sensor 632, accelerometer 634, directional sensor 640 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 636, motion sensor 638, and/or a combination thereof, all of which are operatively connected to I/O section 614.

[0170] Memory 618 of personal electronic device 600 is a non-transitory computer- readable storage medium, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 616, for example, cause the computer processors to perform the techniques and processes described below. The computer- executable instructions, for example, are also stored and/or transported within any non- transitory computer-readable storage medium for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processor- containing system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions. Personal electronic device 600 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 6B, but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations.

[0171] As used here, the term "affordance" refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, for example, displayed on the display screen of devices 200, 400, 600, 810A-C, 820, 830, 840, 1182, 1186, 1880, and/or 1882 (FIGS. 2, 4, 6, 8A-8B, 9A-9C, 10A- IOC, 11A-11D, 12A-12C, 13A-13B, 14, 15A-15G, and 18A-18E). For example, an image (e.g., icon), a button, and text (e.g., hyperlink) each constitutes an affordance.

[0172] As used herein, the term "focus selector" refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a "focus selector" so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 455 in FIG. 4 or touch-sensitive surface 551 in FIG. 5B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212 in FIG. 2A or touch screen 212 in FIG. 5A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a "focus selector" so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these

implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).

[0173] As used in the specification and claims, the term "characteristic intensity" of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A

characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.

[0174] In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface receives a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location, at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm is applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.

[0175] The intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface is characterized relative to one or more intensity thresholds, such as a contact-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more other intensity thresholds. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.

[0176] An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a "light press" input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a "deep press" input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is greater than zero.

[0177] In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., a "down stroke" of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., an "up stroke" of the respective press input).

[0178] In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed "jitter," where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an "up stroke" of the respective press input).

Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances).

[0179] For ease of explanation, the descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting either: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and/or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold.

3. Digital Assistant System

[0180] FIG. 7A illustrates a block diagram of digital assistant system 700 in accordance with various examples. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 is implemented on a standalone computer system. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 is distributed across multiple computers. In some examples, some of the modules and functions of the digital assistant are divided into a server portion and a client portion, where the client portion resides on one or more user devices (e.g., devices 104, 122, 200, 400, 600, 810A-C, 830, 840, 1182, 1186, 1880, and/or 1882) and communicates with the server portion (e.g., server system 108) through one or more networks, e.g., as shown in FIG. 1. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 is an implementation of server system 108 (and/or DA server 106) shown in FIG. 1. It should be noted that digital assistant system 700 is only one example of a digital assistant system, and that digital assistant system 700 can have more or fewer components than shown, can combine two or more components, or can have a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG. 7A are implemented in hardware, software instructions for execution by one or more processors, firmware, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits, or a combination thereof. [0181] Digital assistant system 700 includes memory 702, one or more processors 704, input/output (I/O) interface 706, and network communications interface 708. These components can communicate with one another over one or more communication buses or signal lines 710.

[0182] In some examples, memory 702 includes a non-transitory computer-readable medium, such as high-speed random access memory and/or a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium (e.g., one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices).

[0183] In some examples, I/O interface 706 couples input/output devices 716 of digital assistant system 700, such as displays, keyboards, touch screens, and microphones, to user interface module 722. I/O interface 706, in conjunction with user interface module 722, receives user inputs (e.g., voice input, keyboard inputs, touch inputs, etc.) and processes them accordingly. In some examples, e.g., when the digital assistant is implemented on a standalone user device, digital assistant system 700 includes any of the components and I/O communication interfaces described with respect to devices 200, 400, 600, 810A-C, 820, 830, 840, 1182, 1186, 1880, and/or 1882 in FIGS. 2, 4, 6A-6B, 8A-8B, 9A-9C, lOA-lOC, 11 A- 11D, 12A-12C, 13A-13B, 14, 15A-15G, and 18A-18E, respectively. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 represents the server portion of a digital assistant implementation, and can interact with the user through a client-side portion residing on a user device (e.g., devices 104, 200, 400, 600, 810A-C, 830, 840, 1182, 1186, 1880, and/or 1882).

[0184] In some examples, the network communications interface 708 includes wired communication port(s) 712 and/or wireless transmission and reception circuitry 714. The wired communication port(s) receives and send communication signals via one or more wired interfaces, e.g., Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc. The wireless circuitry 714 receives and sends RF signals and/or optical signals from/to communications networks and other communications devices. The wireless communications use any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, such as GSM, EDGE, CDMA, TDMA, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, VoIP, Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol. Network communications interface 708 enables communication between digital assistant system 700 with networks, such as the Internet, an intranet, and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN), and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices. [0185] In some examples, memory 702, or the computer-readable storage media of memory 702, stores programs, modules, instructions, and data structures including all or a subset of: operating system 718, communications module 720, user interface module 722, one or more applications 724, and digital assistant module 726. In particular, memory 702, or the computer-readable storage media of memory 702, stores instructions for performing the processes described below. One or more processors 704 execute these programs, modules, and instructions, and reads/writes from/to the data structures.

[0186] Operating system 718 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, iOS, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as Vx Works) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates

communications between various hardware, firmware, and software components.

[0187] Communications module 720 facilitates communications between digital assistant system 700 with other devices over network communications interface 708. For example, communications module 720 communicates with RF circuitry 208 of electronic devices such as devices 200, 400, and 600 shown in FIG. 2A, 4, 6A-B, respectively. Communications module 720 also includes various components for handling data received by wireless circuitry 714 and/or wired communications port 712.

[0188] User interface module 722 receives commands and/or inputs from a user via I/O interface 706 (e.g., from a keyboard, touch screen, pointing device, controller, and/or microphone), and generate user interface objects on a display. User interface module 722 also prepares and delivers outputs (e.g., speech, sound, animation, text, icons, vibrations, haptic feedback, light, etc.) to the user via the I/O interface 706 (e.g., through displays, audio channels, speakers, touch-pads, etc.).

[0189] Applications 724 include programs and/or modules that are configured to be executed by one or more processors 704. For example, if the digital assistant system is implemented on a standalone user device, applications 724 include user applications, such as games, a calendar application, a navigation application, or an email application. If digital assistant system 700 is implemented on a server, applications 724 include resource management applications, diagnostic applications, or scheduling applications, for example. [0190] Memory 702 also stores digital assistant module 726 (or the server portion of a digital assistant). In some examples, digital assistant module 726 includes the following sub- modules, or a subset or superset thereof: input/output processing module 728, speech-to-text (STT) processing module 730, natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738, and speech synthesis module 740. Each of these modules has access to one or more of the following systems or data and models of the digital assistant module 726, or a subset or superset thereof: ontology 760, vocabulary index 744, user data 748, task flow models 754, service models 756, and ASR systems.

[0191] In some examples, using the processing modules, data, and models implemented in digital assistant module 726, the digital assistant can perform at least some of the following: converting speech input into text; identifying a user's intent expressed in a natural language input received from the user; actively eliciting and obtaining information needed to fully infer the user's intent (e.g., by disambiguating words, games, intentions, etc.);

determining the task flow for fulfilling the inferred intent; and executing the task flow to fulfill the inferred intent.

[0192] In some examples, as shown in FIG. 7B, I/O processing module 728 interacts with the user through I/O devices 716 in FIG. 7A or with a user device (e.g., devices 104, 200, 400, or 600) through network communications interface 708 in FIG. 7A to obtain user input (e.g., a speech input) and to provide responses (e.g., as speech outputs) to the user input. I/O processing module 728 optionally obtains contextual information associated with the user input from the user device, along with or shortly after the receipt of the user input. The contextual information includes user-specific data, vocabulary, and/or preferences relevant to the user input. In some examples, the contextual information also includes software and hardware states of the user device at the time the user request is received, and/or information related to the surrounding environment of the user at the time that the user request was received. In some examples, I/O processing module 728 also sends follow-up questions to, and receives answers from, the user regarding the user request. When a user request is received by I/O processing module 728 and the user request includes speech input, I/O processing module 728 forwards the speech input to STT processing module 730 (or speech recognizer) for speech-to-text conversions. [0193] STT processing module 730 includes one or more ASR systems. The one or more ASR systems can process the speech input that is received through I/O processing module 728 to produce a recognition result. Each ASR system includes a front-end speech preprocessor. The front-end speech pre-processor extracts representative features from the speech input. For example, the front-end speech pre-processor performs a Fourier transform on the speech input to extract spectral features that characterize the speech input as a sequence of representative multi-dimensional vectors. Further, each ASR system includes one or more speech recognition models (e.g., acoustic models and/or language models) and implements one or more speech recognition engines. Examples of speech recognition models include Hidden Markov Models, Gaussian-Mixture Models, Deep Neural Network Models, n-gram language models, and other statistical models. Examples of speech recognition engines include the dynamic time warping based engines and weighted finite-state transducers (WFST) based engines. The one or more speech recognition models and the one or more speech recognition engines are used to process the extracted representative features of the front-end speech pre-processor to produce intermediate recognitions results (e.g., phonemes, phonemic strings, and sub-words), and ultimately, text recognition results (e.g., words, word strings, or sequence of tokens). In some examples, the speech input is processed at least partially by a third-party service or on the user's device (e.g., device 104, 200, 400, or 600) to produce the recognition result. Once STT processing module 730 produces recognition results containing a text string (e.g., words, or sequence of words, or sequence of tokens), the recognition result is passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction. In some examples, STT processing module 730 produces multiple candidate text representations of the speech input. Each candidate text representation is a sequence of words or tokens corresponding to the speech input. In some examples, each candidate text representation is associated with a speech recognition confidence score. Based on the speech recognition confidence scores, STT processing module 730 ranks the candidate text representations and provides the n-best (e.g., n highest ranked) candidate text

representation(s) to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction, where n is a predetermined integer greater than zero. For example, in one example, only the highest ranked (n=l) candidate text representation is passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction. In another example, the five highest ranked (n=5) candidate text representations are passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction. [0194] More details on the speech-to-text processing are described in U.S. Utility Application Serial No. 13/236,942 for "Consolidating Speech Recognition Results," filed on September 20, 2011, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

[0195] In some examples, STT processing module 730 includes and/or accesses a vocabulary of recognizable words via phonetic alphabet conversion module 731. Each vocabulary word is associated with one or more candidate pronunciations of the word represented in a speech recognition phonetic alphabet. In particular, the vocabulary of recognizable words includes a word that is associated with a plurality of candidate pronunciations. For example, the vocabulary includes the word "tomato" that is associated with the candidate pronunciations of /ts'meirou/ and /ts'matou/. Further, vocabulary words are associated with custom candidate pronunciations that are based on previous speech inputs from the user. Such custom candidate pronunciations are stored in STT processing module 730 and are associated with a particular user via the user's profile on the device. In some examples, the candidate pronunciations for words are determined based on the spelling of the word and one or more linguistic and/or phonetic rules. In some examples, the candidate pronunciations are manually generated, e.g., based on known canonical pronunciations.

[0196] In some examples, the candidate pronunciations are ranked based on the commonness of the candidate pronunciation. For example, the candidate pronunciation /ts'meirou/ is ranked higher than /ts'matou/, because the former is a more commonly used pronunciation (e.g., among all users, for users in a particular geographical region, or for any other appropriate subset of users). In some examples, candidate pronunciations are ranked based on whether the candidate pronunciation is a custom candidate pronunciation associated with the user. For example, custom candidate pronunciations are ranked higher than canonical candidate pronunciations. This can be useful for recognizing proper nouns having a unique pronunciation that deviates from canonical pronunciation. In some examples, candidate pronunciations are associated with one or more speech characteristics, such as geographic origin, nationality, or ethnicity. For example, the candidate pronunciation /ts'meirou/ is associated with the United States, whereas the candidate pronunciation /ts'matou/ is associated with Great Britain. Further, the rank of the candidate pronunciation is based on one or more characteristics (e.g., geographic origin, nationality, ethnicity, etc.) of the user stored in the user's profile on the device. For example, it can be determined from the user's profile that the user is associated with the United States. Based on the user being associated with the United States, the candidate pronunciation /ts'meirou/ (associated with the United States) is ranked higher than the candidate pronunciation /ts'matou/ (associated with Great Britain). In some examples, one of the ranked candidate pronunciations is selected as a predicted pronunciation (e.g., the most likely pronunciation).

[0197] When a speech input is received, STT processing module 730 is used to determine the phonemes corresponding to the speech input (e.g., using an acoustic model), and then attempt to determine words that match the phonemes (e.g., using a language model). For example, if STT processing module 730 first identifies the sequence of phonemes /ts'meirou/ corresponding to a portion of the speech input, it can then determine, based on vocabulary index 744, that this sequence corresponds to the word "tomato."

[0198] In some examples, STT processing module 730 uses approximate matching techniques to determine words in an utterance. Thus, for example, the STT processing module 730 determines that the sequence of phonemes /ts'meirou/ corresponds to the word "tomato," even if that particular sequence of phonemes is not one of the candidate sequence of phonemes for that word.

[0199] Natural language processing module 732 ("natural language processor") of the digital assistant takes the n-best candidate text representation(s) ("word sequence(s)" or "token sequence(s)") generated by STT processing module 730, and attempts to associate each of the candidate text representations with one or more "actionable intents" recognized by the digital assistant. An "actionable intent" (or "user intent") represents a task that can be performed by the digital assistant, and can have an associated task flow implemented in task flow models 754. The associated task flow is a series of programmed actions and steps that the digital assistant takes in order to perform the task. The scope of a digital assistant's capabilities is dependent on the number and variety of task flows that have been implemented and stored in task flow models 754, or in other words, on the number and variety of

"actionable intents" that the digital assistant recognizes. The effectiveness of the digital assistant, however, also dependents on the assistant's ability to infer the correct "actionable intent(s)" from the user request expressed in natural language.

[0200] In some examples, in addition to the sequence of words or tokens obtained from STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732 also receives contextual information associated with the user request, e.g., from I/O processing module 728. The natural language processing module 732 optionally uses the contextual information to clarify, supplement, and/or further define the information contained in the candidate text representations received from STT processing module 730. The contextual information includes, for example, user preferences, hardware, and/or software states of the user device, sensor information collected before, during, or shortly after the user request, prior interactions (e.g., dialogue) between the digital assistant and the user, and the like. As described herein, contextual information is, in some examples, dynamic, and changes with time, location, content of the dialogue, and other factors.

[0201] In some examples, the natural language processing is based on, e.g., ontology 760. Ontology 760 is a hierarchical structure containing many nodes, each node representing either an "actionable intent" or a "property" relevant to one or more of the "actionable intents" or other "properties." As noted above, an "actionable intent" represents a task that the digital assistant is capable of performing, i.e., it is "actionable" or can be acted on. A "property" represents a parameter associated with an actionable intent or a sub-aspect of another property. A linkage between an actionable intent node and a property node in ontology 760 defines how a parameter represented by the property node pertains to the task represented by the actionable intent node.

[0202] In some examples, ontology 760 is made up of actionable intent nodes and property nodes. Within ontology 760, each actionable intent node is linked to one or more property nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes. Similarly, each property node is linked to one or more actionable intent nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes. For example, as shown in FIG. 7C, ontology 760 includes a "restaurant reservation" node (i.e., an actionable intent node). Property nodes "restaurant," "date/time" (for the reservation), and "party size" are each directly linked to the actionable intent node (i.e., the "restaurant reservation" node).

[0203] In addition, property nodes "cuisine," "price range," "phone number," and "location" are sub-nodes of the property node "restaurant," and are each linked to the "restaurant reservation" node (i.e., the actionable intent node) through the intermediate property node "restaurant." For another example, as shown in FIG. 7C, ontology 760 also includes a "set reminder" node (i.e., another actionable intent node). Property nodes

"date/time" (for setting the reminder) and "subject" (for the reminder) are each linked to the "set reminder" node. Since the property "date/time" is relevant to both the task of making a restaurant reservation and the task of setting a reminder, the property node "date/time" is linked to both the "restaurant reservation" node and the "set reminder" node in ontology 760.

[0204] An actionable intent node, along with its linked concept nodes, is described as a "domain." In the present discussion, each domain is associated with a respective actionable intent, and refers to the group of nodes (and the relationships there between) associated with the particular actionable intent. For example, ontology 760 shown in FIG. 7C includes an example of restaurant reservation domain 762 and an example of reminder domain 764 within ontology 760. The restaurant reservation domain includes the actionable intent node "restaurant reservation," property nodes "restaurant," "date/time," and "party size," and sub- property nodes "cuisine," "price range," "phone number," and "location." Reminder domain 764 includes the actionable intent node "set reminder," and property nodes "subject" and "date/time." In some examples, ontology 760 is made up of many domains. Each domain shares one or more property nodes with one or more other domains. For example, the "date/time" property node is associated with many different domains (e.g., a scheduling domain, a travel reservation domain, a movie ticket domain, etc.), in addition to restaurant reservation domain 762 and reminder domain 764.

[0205] While FIG. 7C illustrates two example domains within ontology 760, other domains include, for example, "find a movie," "initiate a phone call," "find directions," "schedule a meeting," "send a message," and "provide an answer to a question," "read a list," "providing navigation instructions," "provide instructions for a task" and so on. A "send a message" domain is associated with a "send a message" actionable intent node, and further includes property nodes such as "recipient(s)," "message type," and "message body." The property node "recipient" is further defined, for example, by the sub-property nodes such as "recipient name" and "message address."

[0206] In some examples, ontology 760 includes all the domains (and hence actionable intents) that the digital assistant is capable of understanding and acting upon. In some examples, ontology 760 is modified, such as by adding or removing entire domains or nodes, or by modifying relationships between the nodes within the ontology 760.

[0207] In some examples, nodes associated with multiple related actionable intents are clustered under a "super domain" in ontology 760. For example, a "travel" super-domain includes a cluster of property nodes and actionable intent nodes related to travel. The actionable intent nodes related to travel includes "airline reservation," "hotel reservation," "car rental," "get directions," "find points of interest," and so on. The actionable intent nodes under the same super domain (e.g., the "travel" super domain) have many property nodes in common. For example, the actionable intent nodes for "airline reservation," "hotel reservation," "car rental," "get directions," and "find points of interest" share one or more of the property nodes "start location," "destination," "departure date/time," "arrival date/time," and "party size."

[0208] In some examples, each node in ontology 760 is associated with a set of words and/or phrases that are relevant to the property or actionable intent represented by the node. The respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node are the so-called "vocabulary" associated with the node. The respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node are stored in vocabulary index 744 in association with the property or actionable intent represented by the node. For example, returning to FIG. 7B, the vocabulary associated with the node for the property of "restaurant" includes words such as "food," "drinks," "cuisine," "hungry," "eat," "pizza," "fast food," "meal," and so on. For another example, the vocabulary associated with the node for the actionable intent of "initiate a phone call" includes words and phrases such as "call," "phone," "dial," "ring," "call this number," "make a call to," and so on. The vocabulary index 744 optionally includes words and phrases in different languages.

[0209] Natural language processing module 732 receives the candidate text

representations (e.g., text string(s) or token sequence(s)) from STT processing module 730, and for each candidate representation, determines what nodes are implicated by the words in the candidate text representation. In some examples, if a word or phrase in the candidate text representation is found to be associated with one or more nodes in ontology 760 (via vocabulary index 744), the word or phrase "triggers" or "activates" those nodes. Based on the quantity and/or relative importance of the activated nodes, natural language processing module 732 selects one of the actionable intents as the task that the user intended the digital assistant to perform. In some examples, the domain that has the most "triggered" nodes is selected. In some examples, the domain having the highest confidence value (e.g., based on the relative importance of its various triggered nodes) is selected. In some examples, the domain is selected based on a combination of the number and the importance of the triggered nodes. In some examples, additional factors are considered in selecting the node as well, such as whether the digital assistant has previously correctly interpreted a similar request from a user.

[0210] User data 748 includes user-specific information, such as user-specific vocabulary, user preferences, user address, user's default and secondary languages, user's contact list, and other short-term or long-term information for each user. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 uses the user-specific information to supplement the information contained in the user input to further define the user intent. For example, for a user request "invite my friends to my birthday party," natural language processing module 732 is able to access user data 748 to determine who the "friends" are and when and where the "birthday party" would be held, rather than requiring the user to provide such information explicitly in his/her request.

[0211] It should be recognized that in some examples, natural language processing module 732 is implemented using one or more machine learning mechanisms (e.g., neural networks). In particular, the one or more machine learning mechanisms are configured to receive a candidate text representation and contextual information associated with the candidate text representation. Based on the candidate text representation and the associated contextual information, the one or more machine learning mechanism are configured to determine intent confidence scores over a set of candidate actionable intents. Natural language processing module 732 can select one or more candidate actionable intents from the set of candidate actionable intents based on the determined intent confidence scores. In some examples, an ontology (e.g., ontology 760) is also used to select the one or more candidate actionable intents from the set of candidate actionable intents.

[0212] Other details of searching an ontology based on a token string is described in U.S. Utility Application Serial No. 12/341,743 for "Method and Apparatus for Searching Using An Active Ontology," filed December 22, 2008, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

[0213] In some examples, once natural language processing module 732 identifies an actionable intent (or domain) based on the user request, natural language processing module 732 generates a structured query to represent the identified actionable intent. In some examples, the structured query includes parameters for one or more nodes within the domain for the actionable intent, and at least some of the parameters are populated with the specific information and requirements specified in the user request. For example, the user says "Make me a dinner reservation at a sushi place at 7." In this case, natural language processing module 732 is able to correctly identify the actionable intent to be "restaurant reservation" based on the user input. According to the ontology, a structured query for a "restaurant reservation" domain includes parameters such as {Cuisine}, {Time}, {Date}, {Party Size}, and the like. In some examples, based on the speech input and the text derived from the speech input using STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732 generates a partial structured query for the restaurant reservation domain, where the partial structured query includes the parameters {Cuisine = "Sushi"} and {Time = "7pm"}. However, in this example, the user's utterance contains insufficient information to complete the structured query associated with the domain. Therefore, other necessary parameters such as {Party Size} and {Date} is not specified in the structured query based on the information currently available. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 populates some parameters of the structured query with received contextual information. For example, in some examples, if the user requested a sushi restaurant "near me," natural language processing module 732 populates a {location} parameter in the structured query with GPS coordinates from the user device.

[0214] In some examples, natural language processing module 732 identifies multiple candidate actionable intents for each candidate text representation received from STT processing module 730. Further, in some examples, a respective structured query (partial or complete) is generated for each identified candidate actionable intent. Natural language processing module 732 determines an intent confidence score for each candidate actionable intent and ranks the candidate actionable intents based on the intent confidence scores. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 passes the generated structured query (or queries), including any completed parameters, to task flow processing module 736 ("task flow processor"). In some examples, the structured query (or queries) for the m-best (e.g., m highest ranked) candidate actionable intents are provided to task flow processing module 736, where m is a predetermined integer greater than zero. In some examples, the structured query (or queries) for the m-best candidate actionable intents are provided to task flow processing module 736 with the corresponding candidate text representation(s).

[0215] Other details of inferring a user intent based on multiple candidate actionable intents determined from multiple candidate text representations of a speech input are described in U. S. Utility Application Serial No. 14/298,725 for "System and Method for Inferring User Intent From Speech Inputs," filed June 6, 2014, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

[0216] Task flow processing module 736 is configured to receive the structured query (or queries) from natural language processing module 732, complete the structured query, if necessary, and perform the actions required to "complete" the user's ultimate request. In some examples, the various procedures necessary to complete these tasks are provided in task flow models 754. In some examples, task flow models 754 include procedures for obtaining additional information from the user and task flows for performing actions associated with the actionable intent.

[0217] As described above, in order to complete a structured query, task flow processing module 736 needs to initiate additional dialogue with the user in order to obtain additional information, and/or disambiguate potentially ambiguous utterances. When such interactions are necessary, task flow processing module 736 invokes dialogue flow processing module 734 to engage in a dialogue with the user. In some examples, dialogue flow processing module 734 determines how (and/or when) to ask the user for the additional information and receives and processes the user responses. The questions are provided to and answers are received from the users through I/O processing module 728. In some examples, dialogue flow processing module 734 presents dialogue output to the user via audio and/or visual output, and receives input from the user via spoken or physical (e.g., clicking) responses. Continuing with the example above, when task flow processing module 736 invokes dialogue flow processing module 734 to determine the "party size" and "date" information for the structured query associated with the domain "restaurant reservation," dialogue flow processing module 734 generates questions such as "For how many people?" and "On which day?" to pass to the user. Once answers are received from the user, dialogue flow processing module 734 then populates the structured query with the missing information, or pass the information to task flow processing module 736 to complete the missing information from the structured query.

[0218] Once task flow processing module 736 has completed the structured query for an actionable intent, task flow processing module 736 proceeds to perform the ultimate task associated with the actionable intent. Accordingly, task flow processing module 736 executes the steps and instructions in the task flow model according to the specific parameters contained in the structured query. For example, the task flow model for the actionable intent of "restaurant reservation" includes steps and instructions for contacting a restaurant and actually requesting a reservation for a particular party size at a particular time. For example, using a structured query such as: {restaurant reservation, restaurant = ABC Cafe, date = 3/12/2012, time = 7pm, party size = 5 }, task flow processing module 736 performs the steps of: (1) logging onto a server of the ABC Cafe or a restaurant reservation system such as OPENTABLE®, (2) entering the date, time, and party size information in a form on the website, (3) submitting the form, and (4) making a calendar entry for the reservation in the user's calendar.

[0219] In some examples, task flow processing module 736 employs the assistance of service processing module 738 ("service processing module") to complete a task requested in the user input or to provide an informational answer requested in the user input. For example, service processing module 738 acts on behalf of task flow processing module 736 to make a phone call, set a calendar entry, invoke a map search, invoke or interact with other user applications installed on the user device, and invoke or interact with third-party services (e.g., a restaurant reservation portal, a social networking website, a banking portal, etc.). In some examples, the protocols and application programming interfaces (API) required by each service are specified by a respective service model among service models 756. Service processing module 738 accesses the appropriate service model for a service and generate requests for the service in accordance with the protocols and APIs required by the service according to the service model.

[0220] For example, if a restaurant has enabled an online reservation service, the restaurant submits a service model specifying the necessary parameters for making a reservation and the APIs for communicating the values of the necessary parameter to the online reservation service. When requested by task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738 establishes a network connection with the online reservation service using the web address stored in the service model, and send the necessary parameters of the reservation (e.g., time, date, party size) to the online reservation interface in a format according to the API of the online reservation service.

[0221] In some examples, natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, and task flow processing module 736 are used collectively and iteratively to infer and define the user's intent, obtain information to further clarify and refine the user intent, and finally generate a response (i.e., an output to the user, or the completion of a task) to fulfill the user's intent. The generated response is a dialogue response to the speech input that at least partially fulfills the user's intent. Further, in some examples, the generated response is output as a speech output. In these examples, the generated response is sent to speech synthesis module 740 (e.g., speech synthesizer) where it can be processed to synthesize the dialogue response in speech form. In yet other examples, the generated response is data content relevant to satisfying a user request in the speech input.

[0222] In examples where task flow processing module 736 receives multiple structured queries from natural language processing module 732, task flow processing module 736 initially processes the first structured query of the received structured queries to attempt to complete the first structured query and/or execute one or more tasks or actions represented by the first structured query. In some examples, the first structured query corresponds to the highest ranked actionable intent. In other examples, the first structured query is selected from the received structured queries based on a combination of the corresponding speech recognition confidence scores and the corresponding intent confidence scores. In some examples, if task flow processing module 736 encounters an error during processing of the first structured query (e.g., due to an inability to determine a necessary parameter), the task flow processing module 736 can proceed to select and process a second structured query of the received structured queries that corresponds to a lower ranked actionable intent. The second structured query is selected, for example, based on the speech recognition confidence score of the corresponding candidate text representation, the intent confidence score of the corresponding candidate actionable intent, a missing necessary parameter in the first structured query, or any combination thereof.

[0223] Speech synthesis module 740 is configured to synthesize speech outputs for presentation to the user. Speech synthesis module 740 synthesizes speech outputs based on text provided by the digital assistant. For example, the generated dialogue response is in the form of a text string. Speech synthesis module 740 converts the text string to an audible speech output. Speech synthesis module 740 uses any appropriate speech synthesis technique in order to generate speech outputs from text, including, but not limited, to concatenative synthesis, unit selection synthesis, diphone synthesis, domain-specific synthesis, formant synthesis, articulatory synthesis, hidden Markov model (HMM) based synthesis, and sinewave synthesis. In some examples, speech synthesis module 740 is configured to synthesize individual words based on phonemic strings corresponding to the words. For example, a phonemic string is associated with a word in the generated dialogue response. The phonemic string is stored in metadata associated with the word. Speech synthesis model 740 is configured to directly process the phonemic string in the metadata to synthesize the word in speech form.

[0224] In some examples, instead of (or in addition to) using speech synthesis module 740, speech synthesis is performed on a remote device (e.g., the server system 108), and the synthesized speech is sent to the user device for output to the user. For example, this can occur in some implementations where outputs for a digital assistant are generated at a server system. And because server systems generally have more processing power or resources than a user device, it is possible to obtain higher quality speech outputs than would be practical with client-side synthesis.

[0225] Additional details on digital assistants can be found in the U.S. Utility Application No. 12/987,982, entitled "Intelligent Automated Assistant," filed January 10, 2011, and U.S. Utility Application No. 13/251,088, entitled "Generating and Processing Task Items That Represent Tasks to Perform," filed September 30, 2011, the entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.

4. Exemplary functions of a digital assistant providing digital assistant services based on user inputs.

[0226] FIGs. 2, 4, 6, 8A-8B, 9A-9C, lOA-lOC, 11A-11D, 12A-12C, 13A-13B, and 14 illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services by a digital assistant operating on an electronic device. In some examples, the digital assistant (e.g., digital assistant system 700) is implemented by a user device according to various examples. In some examples, the user device, a server (e.g., server 108, device 820), or a combination thereof, may implement a digital assistant system (e.g., digital assistant system 700). The user device can be implemented using, for example, device 200, 400, 600, 810A-C, 820, 830, 840, 1182, and/or 1186. In some examples, the user device is a device having audio outputting capabilities and network connectivity, a smartphone, a laptop computer, a desktop computer, or a tablet computer.

[0227] FIGs. 8A-8B illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services at one or more electronic devices 810A-C based on a user input, according to various examples. In some examples, electronic device 81 OA (and similarly other electronic devices 810B-C) can include one or more audio input and output devices (e.g., a microphone and one or more speakers) and one or more network communication interfaces. Device 81 OA and devices 810B-C are collectively referred to as electronic devices 810 or devices 810. Device 81 OA, and similarly devices 810B-C, can include multiple speakers to provide surround sound. In some example, an electronic device 810 can further include one or more indicators (e.g., lights) for providing device operational indications. For example, one or more indicators of device 81 OA may emit light to indicate that device 81 OA is powered on, connected to a network, outputting audios, etc. Devices 810A-C can be service-extension devices to extend digital assistant services from other devices.

[0228] As illustrated in FIG. 8A, in some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can be configured to communicatively couple to other electronic devices (e.g., devices 810B-C, 820, 830, and/or 840) via a direct communication connection, such as Bluetooth, near-field communication (NFC), BTLE (Bluetooth Low Energy), or the like, or via a wired or wireless network, such as a local Wi-Fi network. For example, a digital assistant operating on device 810A can detect devices 810B-C via Bluetooth discovery, and communicatively couple to devices 810B-C via a Bluetooth connection. As another example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can detect a Wi-Fi network and

communicatively couple to devices 830 and 840 via a Wi-Fi network. As another example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can detect a near field communication when the device 830 (e.g., a client device such as the user's smartphone) is in close proximity with, or physically in touch with, device 81 OA. For instance, to pair up device 81 OA and device 830, user 804 may tap device 81 OA with device 830, thereby establishing near-field communication between the two devices. As another example, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can detect that device 830 (e.g., a client device such as the user's

smartphone) is within a predetermined distance (e.g., within a range of Bluetooth

communication) and establish a connection with device 830. For instance, as user 804 approaches or enters area 800 with device 830, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may detect that device 830 is within communication range, and thus connect with device 830. As another example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can establish a connection with device 830 based on one or more previous established connections between the two devices. For instance, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can store a log file indicating the devices that it connected in the past, and optionally connection parameters. Thus, based on the log file, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine, for example, that it has connected to device 830 before. Based on such determination, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can establish the connection with device 830.

[0229] In some examples, electronic device 820 can be a server; and devices 830 and 840 can be client devices disposed in the vicinity of electronic devices 810. For example, device 820 can be a remotely disposed cloud server; and devices 830 and 840 can be the user's smartphone and a TV set-top box, respectively. In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA establishes one or more connections with at least one of devices 820, 830, and 840, before it can receive user inputs comprising user requests and/or provide representations of user requests to one or more of devices 820, 830, and 840. Receiving user inputs and providing representations of user requests to devices 820, 830, and/or 840 are described in more detail below. Establishing connections before receiving user inputs and providing representations of user requests to other devices can improve the operation efficiency and speed of providing responses to user requests. For example, by establishing connections beforehand, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may not waste time to establish a connection after a user input is received.

[0230] In some examples, after establishing a connection between device 81 OA and device 830 (e.g., a client device such as the user's smartphone), the digital assistant operating on device 810A and/or device 830 can notify device 820 (e.g., a server) of the established connection. As described in more detail below, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may provide representations of a user request to one or both of device 820 and device 830 for obtaining responses. Device 820 may be a remote device such as a server and device 830 may be a device disposed in the vicinity of device 810A. Thus, notifying device 820 (e.g., a remote server) of a connection between device 81 OA and device 830 can facilitate an efficient operation. For example, as described below, in some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may provide the representations of the user request to both device 820 and device 830. Device 820 and/or device 830 may determine that device 830 (e.g., a client device disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA) is capable of providing the response. Thus, because device 820 is notified that device 830 and device 810A are connected, device 820 may not provide a response to device 81 OA. Instead, device 820 may coordinate with device 830 to provide the response. In some examples, because device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone) is disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA, the response may be provided in a faster and more efficient manner. [0231] In some examples, the digital assistant operating on devices 81 OA can establish connections with one or more devices having the same type. For example, as shown in FIG. 8 A, a plurality of devices 810A-C can be service-extension devices and can be disposed in area 800. The digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can thus establish a connection with each of device 81 OB and device 8 IOC. As described in more detail below, establishing connections between devices 81 OA, 81 OB, and 8 IOC enables responses to be provided to user 804 by any device 810A-C disposed in area 800. This provides flexibility and improves the user-interaction efficiency. For example, user 804 may provide a speech input (e.g., "Play music") to device 810A, and receive a response by device 810C (e.g., music playing at device 810C).

[0232] In some embodiments, devices 810A-C can be service-extension devices for extending digital assistant services from one device to another. For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, devices 810A-C can be disposed in the vicinity of an electronic device 830 (e.g., a smartphone device) and/or electronic device 840 (e.g., a TV set-top box) to extend digital assistant services provided by electronic devices 830 and/or 840. In some examples, disposing devices 810A-C in the vicinity of devices 830 and/or 840 may include disposing devices 810A-C within a predetermined boundary surrounding, or a predetermined distance from, devices 830 and/or 840. For example, devices 810A-C may be disposed in the same house or building as devices 830 or 840. As shown in FIG. 8A, user 804 may be physically within or nearby an area 800, which may include one or more rooms 871, 873, and 875. User 804 may by physically located in room 871, while electronic device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone) may be disposed in another room 873. In some examples, user 804 may want to access digital assistant services provided by device 830, despite that device 830 is incapable of directly communicating with user 804 (e.g., device 830 may not be able to directly receive the user 804's speech input via its microphone). In some examples, devices 810A-C can serve as service-extension devices for extending digital assistant services provided by device 830, as described in more detail below.

[0233] In some embodiments, one or more devices 810A-C may or may not be associated with a single device or user. Devices 810A-C (e.g., service-extension devices) can be shared by multiple users and can extend digital assistant services for multiple devices. In some examples, one or more devices 810A-C can extend digital assistant services to a plurality of users. As illustrated in FIG. 8B, user 804 and user 806 can share one or more devices 810A- C. For example, user 804 may have an associated device 830 (e.g., user 804's smartphone or smart watch); and user 806 may have an associated device 832 (e.g., user 806's smartphone or tablet). In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can establish a connection between itself and device 830; and a connection between itself and device 832. As such, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can extend digital assistant services for one or both devices 830 and 832. The capability of extending digital assistant services for multiple devices enables devices 810A-C to be shared by, for example, multiple users (e.g., family members).

[0234] With reference back to FIG. 8A, in some embodiments, a digital assistant operating on electronic device 81 OA can receive, from user 804, a speech input representing a user request. For example, user 804 may provide one or more speech inputs such as "What is on my calendar tomorrow?", "When is my first meeting?", "How is the weather?" or "Play Star Wars from my movie application." In some examples, the user request can be a request for information specific to user 804. For example, the speech inputs such as "What is on my calendar tomorrow?" or "When is my first meeting tomorrow?" represent requests for information specific to user 804. In some examples, the user request can be a request for non-user specific information. For examples, the speech inputs such as "How is the weather tomorrow?" or "What is the today's stock price of AAPL?" represent requests for information that is not specific to any particular user.

[0235] In some embodiments, prior to receiving the user's speech input, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can receive an additional speech input that includes a predetermined content. In response to receiving the additional speech input, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can activate device 81 OA. For example, device 81 OA may be placed in a standby mode or a lower power mode. Placing device 81 OA in standby mode or a lower power mode can reduce power consumption and in some examples, enhances the protection of the user's privacy. For example, during a standby mode or lower power mode, only limited voice detection and/or speech processing functions are enabled for the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA. Other functions of device 81 OA (e.g., camera, indication light, speaker, etc.) may be disabled. In some examples, during the standby mode or lower power mode, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can still detect a speech input and determine whether the speech input includes predetermined content such as "Wake up, speaker" or "Hey, Speaker." Based on the determination, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can activate the device 81 OA. In some examples, after device 81 OA is activated, device 81 OA exits the standby mode and switches to a normal operation mode. In the normal operation mode, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can perform additional functions.

[0236] As illustrated in FIG. 8A, in an area 800 (e.g., a house), a plurality of devices 810A-C can be disposed. In some examples, a speech input activating one of device 810A-C may or may not activate other devices being disposed in the vicinity. For example, as described above, user 804 may provide a speech input including predetermined content (e.g., "Wake up, speaker") to device 81 OA. In some examples, device 810B may be disposed in another portion of area 800 (e.g., another room) and thus may not receive the speech input. As a result, device 810B may not be activated. In some examples, device 810B may be disposed in the vicinity of device 810A (e.g., in the same room) and may also receive the speech input including the predetermined content. In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can coordinate with device 810B to determine which device should be activated. For example, the digital assistants operating on device 81 OA and device 810B can both detect and record the volume or sound pressure associated with the speech input. Based on the comparison of the sound pressure detected at device 81 OA and the sound pressure detected at device 810B, the user's position relative to the two devices can be determined. For example, it may be determined that the user is physically closer to device 81 OA than to device 810B. As a result, device 81 OA may be activated while device 810B may not be activated. It is appreciated that the determination of which device is to be activated can be based on the user's speech input (e.g., user 804 provides "wake up, speaker in living room") and/or any context information such as the user's preferences, the user's relative position, the capabilities and attributes of the devices (e.g., one device is better for performing certain tasks than another device), etc.

[0237] In some embodiments, after receiving the user's speech input, the digital assistant operating on electronic device 81 OA can output one or more speech inquiries regarding the user request. For example, a user intent may not be determined or clear based on the user's speech input; or the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may not have properly received the speech input. As such, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may output a speech inquiry such as "What's that?" or "I did not quite get that," thereby seeking to clarify the user request. In response to the one or more speech inquiries, user 804 can thus provide one or more additional speech inputs clarifying his or her requests (e.g., repeat or rephrase the previous speech input). And device 81 OA can receive the one or more additional speech inputs. [0238] In some embodiments, after receiving the user's speech input, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can obtain an identity of user 804. As described, electronic device 81 OA can extend digital assistant services for multiple devices (e.g., devices 830 and 832) associated with one or more users (e.g., users 804 and 806 as shown in FIG. 8B). Thus, for providing extension of digital assistant services from a proper device associated with a particular user (e.g., user 804 or user 806), the digital assistant operating on electronic device 810A can obtain the identity of the user. FIGs. 9A-9C illustrate functionalities of obtaining an identity of user 804 at electronic device 81 OA, according to various examples. With references to FIGs. 8A and 9A-9C, in some examples, electronic device 81 OA can include an authentication module 912. Authentication module 912 can include one or more sensors such as voice biometric sensors, facial recognition systems, fingerprint readers, NFC sensors, etc. In some examples, as shown in FIG. 9A, authentication module 912 can obtain authentication data 906 associated with user 804. In some examples, authentication data 906 can include user's voice biometrics, and/or fingerprint, and/or user's facial recognition data. For example, user 804' s voice biometrics may include the user's voice characteristics such as acoustic patterns or voiceprints. User 804's facial recognition data may include the user's facial characteristics that may uniquely identify the user, such as the relative position, size, and/or shape of the eyes, nose, cheekbones, jaw, etc.

[0239] In some examples, authentication data 906 can include sensing of another electronic device that identifies the user. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 810A may detect that user 804's wearable device (e.g., a smart watch) is disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA, communicate with the wearable device via NFC (e.g.,

Bluetooth), and obtain authentication data 906 from the wearable device (e.g., having already been authenticated on the user's watch). As another example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may detect that device 81 OA is physically in contact with the user's smartphone that identifies the user, communicate with the user's smartphone via NFC (e.g., Bluetooth), and obtain authentication data 906 from the user's smartphone. In some examples, authentication data 906 can include other credentials of the user, such as the user's fingerprints, passwords, or the like. It is appreciated that the digital assistant operating on electronic device 81 OA can obtain any authentication data associated with user 804 in any manner.

[0240] With reference to FIGs. 8A and 9A-9C, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can obtain a determination of the identity of the user 804 based on authentication data 906. As illustrated in FIG. 9B, in some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on electronic device 81 OA can provide the obtained authentication data 906 to electronic device 830 for authentication. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can provide the user's voice biometrics data, the user's facial recognition data, the user's fingerprint data, device sensing data, and/or other credentials to electronic device 830. As described, electronic device 830 can be a device that is associated with user 804 (e.g., user 804' s smartphone) and can thus store user identity information. Based on the received authentication data 906, device 830 can determine whether authentication data 906 include credentials that match with the stored user identity information (e.g., a password or a fingerprint). If authentication data 906 include credentials that match with user identity information, device 830 can send a determination of user identity 910 of user 804 to device 81 OA.

[0241] With reference to FIG. 9C, as described, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can provide authentication data 906 to device 830. In some embodiments, device 830 (e.g., a smartphone) may be incapable of obtaining the identity of user 804 and may thus forward authentication data 906 to electronic device 820. For example, device 830 may not store voice biometric information that can identify a user, and may thus be incapable of making a determination of user 804's identity. Device 830 may thus forward authentication data 906 to device 820. In some examples, device 820 may be disposed remotely from devices 810A and 830. For example, device 820 can be a server that is communicatively coupled to devices 810A and 830 via network(s) 850. Device 820 may store user identity information and may thus determine whether authentication data 906 include credentials that match with the stored identity information. If device 820 determines that authentication data 906 include credentials that match with user identity information of user 804, device 820 can send the determination of user identity 926 of user 804 to device 81 OA. In some examples, device 820 can send the determination of user identity 926 of user 804 directly to device 81 OA. In some examples, device 820 can send the determination of user identity 926 of user 804 to device 830, which then forward to device 810A.

[0242] In some examples, obtaining the identity of user 804 can be based on a speech input including predetermined content. As described above, based on a speech input including predetermined content (e.g., "Wake up, speaker" or "Hey, Speaker"), the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can activate device 81 OA. The speech input including the predetermined content can also be used to determine user 804's voice biometrics, which may include the user's voice characteristics such as acoustic patterns or voiceprints. As a result, a speech input including a predetermined content (e.g., a speech input for activating device 81 OA) can be used for identifying user 804, in manners similar to those described above.

[0243] FIGs. lOA-lOC illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services based on a user request for information, according to various examples. With reference to FIGs. 8A and lOA-lOC, in accordance with the obtained user identity, the digital assistant operating on electronic device 81 OA can provide a representation of the user request 1008 to at least one of device 820 or device 830. As described above, in some examples, device 820 may be a server disposed remotely from devices 810A-C and 830. Device 830 may be a client device associated with user 804 (e.g., the user's smartphone) and may be disposed in the vicinity of devices 810A-C (e.g., in the same house or building).

[0244] In some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide the representation of the user request 1008 to a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA before providing the representation of the user request to a remote device. As illustrated in FIG. 10A, user 804 may provide a speech input 1006 such as "When is my first meeting tomorrow?" Thus, speech input 1006 includes a user request for information regarding, for example, user 804's first meeting time on the next day. In some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine whether device 830 is communicatively coupled to device 81 OA. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can detect whether device 830 is within the range of communication and whether a connection can be established via NFC such as Bluetooth or Wi-Fi connections. In accordance with a determination that device 830 is communicatively coupled to device 81 OA, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide representation of the user request 1008 to device 830. In some embodiments, device 830 is a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 810A (e.g., the user's smartphone); and the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may not further provide representation of the user request to a remote device such as device 820 shown in FIG. 8A. As a result, the user request is not transmitted remotely, and may stay within a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 810A (e.g., the user's personal devices). By providing the representation of the user request 1008 only to device 830, which is disposed in the vicinity of device 810A, a response from device 830 may be obtained in a fast and efficient manner without having to consume time for communication with a remote device. As a result, the speed of responding to a user request at device 81 OA may be improved. Moreover, a user request (e.g., the user requested included in speech input 1006) may include a request for sensitive or confidential user-specific information (e.g., the user's calendar information). As a result, for privacy concerns, it may be desired not to send the representation of the user request 1008 to a remote device, such as a cloud server.

[0245] As illustrated in FIG. 10A, in some example, device 830 receives the

representation of user request 1008 from device 81 OA and determines whether it is capable of providing a response to the user request. For example, as described, the user request may include a request for information of user 804's first meeting time on the next day. Device 830 may determine that it stores user 804's calendar information is stored in device 830 and thus determine it is capable of providing the response to the user request. Accordingly, device 830 can send the response 1010 to the user request to device 810A. The response 1010 may include, for example, user 804's first meeting time on the next day. The digital assistant operating on device 810A receives the response 1010 to the user request from device 830, and can provide a representation of the response 1010 to user 804. As shown in FIG. 10A, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide a speech output 1012 such as "Your first meeting is at 9 a.m. tomorrow morning."

[0246] As described, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine whether device 830 is communicatively coupled to device 81 OA. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can detect whether device 830 is within the range of communication and whether a connection between the two devices can be established via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi connections. With reference to FIG. 10B, in some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can determine that device 830 is not

communicatively coupled to device 81 OA For example, the digital assistant operating on device 810A may not be capable of detecting device 830 because device 830 is beyond the range of communication, or because a connection cannot be established between the two devices. In accordance with a determination that the device 830 is not communicatively coupled to device 81 OA, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide the representation of the user request 1008 to device 820. As described above, device 820 can be a remote device such as a server. In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide the representation of the user request 1008 to device 820 via network(s) 850.

[0247] In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 10B, device 820 receives the

representation of user request 1008 from device 81 OA and determines whether it is capable of providing the response to the user request. For example, as described, the user request may include a request for information of user 804's first meeting time on the next day. Device 820 may determine that it stores, or has access to, user 804's calendar information (e.g., stored in user 804's cloud account) and thus determine it is capable of providing the response to the user request. Accordingly, device 820 can send a response 1014 to the user request to device 810A. The response 1014 to the user request may include, for example, the user's first meeting time on the next day. Device 810A receives the response 1014 to the user request from device 820, and can provide a representation of response 1014 to user 804. As shown in FIG. 10B, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide a speech output 1012 such as "Your first meeting is at 9 a.m. tomorrow morning." In some examples, after providing response to user 804, device 81 OA can continue to monitor subsequent speech inputs.

[0248] With reference to FIG. IOC, in some embodiments, user 804 may provide a speech input 1020 such as "What is the stock price of AAPL today?" This type of speech input represents a user request for non-user-specific information. Non-user-specific information is not specific to a particular user and may be general information such as weather information, stock price information, sports game information, etc. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. IOC, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide the representation of user request 1022 for non-user-specific information to device 820 and not to device 830. As described, device 820 may be a server that is disposed remotely from device 81 OA, and device 830 may be the user's smartphone that is disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA. In some embodiments, non-user-specific information (e.g., weather, stock price, game scores, etc.) may not be available and/or updated at device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone). Thus, device 810A can determine that it is more appropriate and efficient to obtain the non-user-specific information from a remote device (e.g., a server), rather than a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 810A (e.g., a user's personal device). As such, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide the

representation of user request 1022 for non-user-specific information to device 820 (e.g., a server) via network(s) 850.

[0249] As shown in FIG. IOC, device 820 receives the representation of user request 1022 from device 81 OA and determines that it is capable of providing the response to the user request. For example, as described, the user request may include a request for stock price information of AAPL. Device 820 may determine that it is capable of obtaining the information from a relevant data source (e.g., a finance website) and thus capable of providing the response to the user request. Accordingly, device 820 can send a response 1024 to the user request to device 81 OA. Response 1024 to the user request may include, for example, the current stock price of AAPL. The digital assistant operating on device 81 OA receives response 1024 from device 820, and can provide a representation of response 1024 to user 804. As shown in FIG. IOC, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide a speech output 1026 such as "AAPL closed at $200 today."

[0250] FIGs. 11 A-l ID illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services based on a user request for performing a task, according to various examples. With reference to FIGs. 11A and 11B, in some embodiments, user 804 may provide a speech input 1106 representing a user request for performing a task. For example, speech input 1106 may include "Play the Mighty Wings from Top Gun." Speech input 1106 thus represents a request to perform a task of playing a particular piece of music. In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 810A may be incapable of (e.g., due to lack of sufficient information) determining whether a response to a user request can be provided by device 830 (e.g., a device disposed in the vicinity of device 810A such as the user 804's personal smartphone) or device 820 (e.g., a remote server). In the above example, device 81 OA may not have sufficient information to determine whether the user 804' s smartphone or a server stores the song "Mighty Wings." Accordingly, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide the representation of user request 1108 to both device 830 and device 820.

[0251] As illustrated in FIG. 11 A, device 820 and device 830 both receive the representation of the user request 1108 (e.g., a user request to perform a task). One or both of device 820 and device 830 can determine whether the respective device is capable of providing the response to the user request 1108. For example, device 830 can determine whether it stores the song Might Wings and if so, determine that it is capable of providing the response. Device 820 can make a similar determination. In some examples, the

determinations can be made separately and independently on device 820 and device 830. For example, both devices 820 and 830 may determine whether they store the song "Mighty Wings;" and communicate the result of determination to the other device. In some examples, one of device 820 or device 830 can make the determination first and then send an indication to the other device. For example, device 830 may determine whether the song "Mighty Wings" is stored in device 830, and send an indication of the determination to device 820. If device 830 determines that it stores the song "Mighty Wings," it can send a corresponding indication to device 820 so that device 820 does not make any further determination. If device 830 determines that it does not have the song "Mighty Wings," it may send a corresponding indication to device 820 so that device 820 can then determine whether it stores, or has access to, the requested song. Similarly, device 820 may make a determination first and then send an indication to device 830. In some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can cause one or both devices 820 and 830 to determine whether the respective device is capable of providing the response the user request. For example, the representation of the user request 1 108 that is sent to devices 820 and 830 may include an explicit or implicit request for one or both devices 820 and 830 to determine whether one or both devices are capable of providing the requested response.

[0252] As shown in FIG. 11 A, in some examples, device 820 (e.g., a server) may determine that it is capable of providing the response to the user request; and device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone) may determine that it is incapable of providing the response to the user request. For example, device 820 may determine that it stores, or have access to, the requested song "Mighty Wings" and device 830 may determine that it does not store the song. Accordingly, device 820 can provide a response 1 112 to the user request to device 81 OA. For example, device 820 can stream the song "Mighty Wings" to device 81 OA.

Device 81 OA receives response 11 12 from device 820 and provides a representation of response 11 12 to user 804. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA receives the streaming of the song "Mighty Wings" and provides audio outputs 11 14 of the song.

[0253] With reference to FIG. 1 IB, in some examples, device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone) may determine that it is capable of providing the response to the user request; and device 820 (e.g., the server) may determine that it is incapable of providing the response to the user request. For example, device 830 may determine that it stores the song "Mighty Wings" and device 820 may determine that it does not store the song, or does not have access, to the requested song without requiring a further user interaction (e.g., asking the user to purchase the song). Accordingly, device 830 can provide a response 11 12 to the user request to device 81 OA. For example, device 830 can stream the song "Mighty Wings" to device 810A. The digital assistant operating on device 810A receives response 1 122 from device 830 and provides a representation of response 1122 to user 804. For example, device 81 OA receives the streaming of the song "Mighty Wings" and provides audio outputs 1124 of the song. [0254] With reference to FIGs. 11 A and 1 IB, in some examples, both device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone) and device 820 (e.g., a server) may determine that the respective device is capable of providing the response to the user request. For example, device 830 may determine that it stores the song "Mighty Wings;" and device 820 may determine that it also stores the requested song (e.g., in the user's cloud account) or has access to the song without requiring further user interaction (e.g., without requiring the user to purchase the song). Accordingly, either device 820 or device 830 is capable of providing a response to the user request to device 81 OA. In some examples, the selection of a device from multiple devices for providing the response can be based on a predetermined condition. For example, the predetermine condition may include a pre-configured policy (e.g., device 830 is the default device to provide response if more than one device are capable of providing responses), a condition of connection bandwidth (e.g., the device that has a higher bandwidth of connection is the device to provide response), a condition of user's preferences (e.g., in order to save cellular data usage, the user prefers to use a device that is connected to device 81 OA via Wi- Fi for providing responses), or the like. Based on the predetermine condition, one of device 820 and device 830 can stream the song "Mighty Wings" to device 810A. The digital assistant operating on device 81 OA receives the response to the user request and provides a representation of the response to the user. For example, device 81 OA receives the streaming of the song "Mighty Wings" and provides audio outputs of the song.

[0255] With reference to FIG. 11C, in some embodiments, user 804 may provide a speech input 1126 representing a user request for performing a task. Speech input 1126 may include, for example, "Play the movie Star Wars." The digital assistant operating on device 810A receives speech input 1126. In some examples, based on speech input 1126, device 810A can provide a representation of a user request 1128 to a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 810A (e.g., device 840) and not to a remote device (e.g., device 820 such as a server). The digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may not provide the representation of user request 1128 to a remote device for a number of reasons. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may determine that the information is likely to be available at a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 810A (e.g., device 840 such as a TV set-top box); that there is no or poor connection to a remote device; that the bandwidth to a remote device is limited or inferior; that a predetermined configuration requires providing representations of user requests to a device that is the vicinity of device 810A (e.g., a device connected to device 810A via Wi-Fi); or the like. As described above, device 840 may be a TV set-top box that is disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA, and device 820 may be a server disposed remotely. In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can be configured to always provide the representation of a user request to a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 810A (e.g., device 840). In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can be configured to provide the representation of a user request to a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA (e.g., device 840) or a remote device (e.g., device 820) based on the type and/or content of the user request. As described above, in some examples, if the user request is a request for user-specific information, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide the representation of the user request to a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA (e.g., the user's smartphone); and if the user request is a request for non-user-specific information, device 81 OA can provide the representation of the user request to a remote device (e.g., the server).

[0256] As shown in FIG. 1 1C, device 840 receives the representation of the user request 1128, which may cause device 840 to determine whether it is capable of providing a response to the user request. For example, device 840 may determine that it stores the movie Star Wars and thus is capable of providing the response to device 81 OA. As other examples, device 840 may determine it stores data including user's personal calendar, contacts, photos, media items, or the like, and thus is capable of providing a response for a user request for information or task performance using these stored data. In accordance with a determination that device 840 is capable of providing the response to the user request, device 840 can provide a response 1134 to device 81 OA. For example, device 840 can stream the movie "Star Wars" to device 81 OA. The digital assistant operating on device 81 OA receives response 1134 from device 81 OA, and provides a representation of response 1 134 to the user. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide audio outputs 1136 (e.g., play the movie "Star Wars") using its display and speakers. In some examples, device 840 can provide at least a portion of the response to device 81 OA while provide other portions of the response to one or more other devices. For example, device 840 can provide the audio portion of the movie "Star Wars" to device 81 OA while provide the video portion of the movie to a device 1137 (e.g., a TV).

[0257] With reference to FIG. 1 1C, as described, device 840 receives the representation of the user request 1 128, which may cause device 840 to determine whether it is capable of providing the response to the user request. In some examples, device 840 may determine that it is incapable of providing the response to the user request. For example, device 840 may determine that it does not store the movie "Star Wars" and thus cannot provide the response. As other examples, device 840 may determine that the user request is for information that is not stored in device 840 (e.g., stock information, web searching request, etc.), and thus determine it cannot provide the response.

[0258] As shown in FIG. 11C, in accordance with a determination that the device 840 is incapable of providing a response to the user request, device 840 can forward a representation of user request 1128 to device 820 via network(s) 850. As described, device 820 can be a server. Based on the representation of user request 1128, device 820 can then determine whether it is capable of providing a response. For example, device 820 may determine whether it stored a requested movie, or whether a requested movie is accessible from user 804' s cloud account or from a web source (e.g., a media website). If device 820 determines that it stores the requested movie or that the requested movie is accessible, device 820 determines that it is capable of providing the response. In some examples, device 820 can provide a response 1132 to device 840, which can then forward to device 81 OA and optionally device 1137 (e.g., a TV). In some examples, device 820 can provide response 1132 directly to device 810A and optionally device 1137. For example, device 820 can send the audio portion of the movie Star Wars to device 81 OA, while sending the video portion of the movie Star Wars to device 1137 (via device 840). The digital assistant operating on device 810A, and optionally device 1137, receives response 1132, and provides a representation of response 1132 to the user. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA, and optionally device 1137, can provide output 1136 based on the received response 1132 (e.g., play the movie "Star Wars").

[0259] Using the example illustrated in FIG. 11C, instead of providing speech input 1126, user 804 may provide a speech input such as "Play the movie Star Wars on my TV and set up another screen on my computer." Similar to those described above, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide a representation of the user request to device 840, and receive a response to the user request from device 840 or device 820, based on a determination whether device 840 (e.g., a TV set-top box disposed in the vicinity of device 810A) or device 820 (e.g., a server) is capable of providing the response. In some embodiments, the user request may indicate that the response to the user request is to be provided to multiple devices. Thus, device 840 and/or device 820 can provide the response accordingly. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can receive a portion of the response (e.g., audio portion of a movie); device 1137 can receive another portion of the response (e.g., the video portion of a movie); and another device (e.g., the user's computer) can receive a duplicate copy of the response (e.g., a copy of both the audio and video portions of the movie). In some examples, user 804 may want to watch a movie using a device such as his or her computer or tablet, but not using device 81 OA. User 804 may provide a speech input such as "Play the movie Star Wars on my computer" or "Play the movie Star Wars on my tablet." The speech input may be provided as an initial input to start the task performance (e.g., start to play the movie Star Wars). The speech input may also be provided as a subsequent input while a task is being performed (e.g., while device 840 is streaming the movie to device 810A and/or device 1137). Similar to those described above, device 810A can provide a representation of the user request to device 840 and/or device 820. The representation of the user request may indicate a response is to be provided to the user's computer or tablet (not shown in FIG. 11C). The user's computer or tablet can thus receive a response to the user request from device 840 or device 820, based on a determination whether device 840 (e.g., a TV set-top box disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA) or device 820 (e.g., a server) is capable of providing the response.

[0260] With reference to FIG. 1 ID, in some embodiments, user 804 may provide a speech input 1152 such as "Call Jane and conference Kevin." The digital assistant operating on device 81 OA receives speech input 1152 and can provide a representation of a user request 1154 to device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone). User request 1154 can include a request to perform a task at device 830 (e.g., calling Jane and conferencing Kevin). Device 830 receives the representation of user request 1154, and determines that it is capable of performing the task. As described above in connection with FIGs. 1-7C, and similarly in other examples, a natural language processing module of the digital assistant operating on device 830 (and/or device 81 OA) can identify an actionable intent based on the user request and generate a structure query to represent the identified actionable intent. For example, based on speech input 1152, device 830 can thus determine if the actionable intent is "making phone calls." In some examples, the digital assistant can actively elicit and obtain information needed to fully infer the user intent (e.g., by disambiguating words, elicit further clarification inputs from the user, and/or use context information such as the user's contact list). A structured query for "making phone calls" may include parameters such as {callees}, {telephone numbers}, and the like. Next, a task flow processing module of the digital assistant can receive the structured query and perform the actions required to provide a response to the user request. Accordingly, device 830 can perform the task according to user request 1 154 (e.g., call user 1194's device 1 182 and conference in user 1 196's device 1186). Based on the performance of the task, device 830 can also provide a response 1 157 to device 810A. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can receive response 1157 from device 830, indicating that the conference with user 1 194 (e.g., Jane) and user 1 196 (e.g., Kevin) has been established. Accordingly, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide an audio output 1162 such as "Jane and Kevin are connected."

[0261] FIGs. 12A-12C illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services based on a user request for information, according to various examples. With reference to FIG. 12A, user 804 may provide a speech input 1206 such as "Find Jane's mobile phone number." Speech input 1206 thus represents a user request for a telephone number. The digital assistant operating on device 810A receives speech input 1206, and provides a representation of a user request 1208 to a remote device (e.g., device 820 such as a server) via network(s) 850, and not to a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 810A (e.g.

device 830 such as the user's smartphone). The digital assistant operating on device 810A may not provide the representation of user request 1208 to a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA for a number of reasons. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may determine that the information is unlikely to be available at a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 810A (e.g., device 830); that there is no or poor connection to a device that is in the vicinity of device 810A (e.g., device 830 is out of communication range with device 81 OA); that the bandwidth to a device that is disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA is limited or inferior; that a predetermined configuration requires providing representations of user requests to a remote device; or the like.

[0262] In some embodiments, device 820 receives the representation of user request 1208, which may cause device 820 to determine whether it is capable of providing the response to the user request. For example, device 820 may determine that the user 804' s cloud account stores the requested telephone number and thus is capable of providing a response to the user request. In accordance with a determination that device 820 is capable of providing a response to the user request, device 820 can provide response 1210 to device 81 OA. For example, device 820 can provide Jane's telephone number to device 81 OA. The digital assistant operating on device 81 OA receives response 1210 from device 820, and provides a representation of response 1210 to user 804. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide an audio output 1212 such as "Jane's number is 123- 456-7890." [0263] With reference to FIG. 12B, similar to FIG. 12A, after device 81 OA receives a speech input 1226 such as "Find Jane's phone number," it can provide a representation of a user request 1228 to device 820 via network(s) 850. In some embodiments, device 820 receives the representation of user request 1228, which may cause device 820 to determine whether it is capable of providing a response to user request 1228. For example, device 820 may determine that the user 804's cloud account does not store Jane's telephone number and thus is incapable of providing a response to the user request. In accordance with a determination that device 820 is incapable of providing the response to the user request, device 820 can forward the representation of user request 1228 to device 830. Device 830 can be a device disposed in the vicinity of device 81 OA and can be a device associated with user 804 (e.g., user 804's personal device such as a smartphone). Similar to those described above, device 830 can determine whether it is capable of providing a response to the user request (e.g., whether it stores Jane's telephone number), and provides response 1232 to device 81 OA in accordance with the determination. For example, in accordance with a determination that device 830 is capable of providing Jane's telephone number, device 830 can provide Jane's telephone number to device 810A. The digital assistant operating on device 810A receives the response 1232 from device 830, and provides a representation of response 1232 to the user. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide an audio output 1234 such as "Jane's number is 123-456-7890." In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can receive the response directly from device 830. In some embodiments, device 830 can provide a response to device 820, which then forward the response to device 81 OA, as described below.

[0264] With reference to FIG. 12C and continuing the above example described in connection with FIG. 12B, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can receive a response 1252 indirectly from device 830. For example, device 830 can provide a response 1252 (e.g. Jane's telephone number) to device 820 (e.g., a server), which can then forward response 1252 to device 810A. The digital assistant operating on device 810A receives response 1252 from device 820, and provides a representation of response 1252 to user 804. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide an audio output 1256 such as "Jane's number is 123-456-7890."

[0265] FIGs. 13A-13B illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services at a first electronic device or additional electronic devices, according to various examples. With reference to FIG. 13 A, as described above, a plurality of devices 810A-C can be service- extension devices for extending digital assistant services from one device to another. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 A, devices 810A-C can be disposed in the vicinity of device 830 (e.g., user 804's smartphone device) to extend digital assistant services provided by device 830. In some examples, disposing a plurality of devices 810A-C in the vicinity of device 830 may include disposing devices 810A-C within a predetermined boundary or distance of device 830. For example, devices 810A-C may be disposed in the same house or building as device 830. As shown in FIG. 13 A, in some embodiments, devices 810A-C may be disposed in a manner for extending digital assistant services to different portions of an area 1300. As shown in FIG. 13, area 1300 may include, for example, a living room 1320, an office 1340, and a bedroom 1360. In some examples, device 810A can be disposed in living room 1320, device 810B can be disposed in office 1340; and device 8 IOC can be disposed in bedroom 1360. As described above, devices 810A-C can be communicatively coupled to each other and to other devices (e.g., devices 820 and 830).

[0266] As shown in FIG. 13A, user 804 may be located within living room 1302, in which device 81 OA is disposed. User 804 may want to go to bed with some light music, and thus provide a speech input 1306 such as "Play light music on my bedroom speaker" to device 810A. The digital assistant operating on device 810A receives speech input 1306 representing a user request. Similar to those described above, device 81 OA can provide a representation of the user request to at least one of device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone disposed in the vicinity of device 810A) or device 820 (e.g., a remoted disposed server). At least one of device 820 or device 830 determines whether the respective device is capable of providing a response to the user request, and provides the response to device 81 OA. The digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can then provide a representation of the response to user 804 (e.g., an audio output).

[0267] In some embodiments, prior to providing a representation of the response to user 804, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine whether the representation of the response is to be provided by device 81 OA or another device. For example, speech input 1306 may include "Play light music on my bedroom speaker." Accordingly, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine that the user intent is not to play the music on device 810A, but rather on device 810C disposed within bedroom 1360. The

determination can be made using, for example, natural language processing described above. In accordance with a determination that the representation of the response is not to be provided by device 81 OA, device 81 OA can forward the response to, or cause the response to be provided to, device 810C disposed in bedroom 1360. Device 810C can thus provide an audio output 1310 playing the light music user requested. In other examples, in accordance with a determination that the representation of the response is to be provided by device 81 OA, device 81 OA can itself provide the representation of response to the user 804. As described above, multiple devices 810A-C can be disposed in area 1400. In some examples, a digital assistant (the digital assistant operating on device 810A, 810B, 810C, device 830, etc.) can determine the location of each device 810A-C (e.g., based on an initial configuration). For example, during initial configuration, a device or a device set can be assigned a name such as "Living Room" based on its location within the user's home. In some embodiments, the name of a device or a device set is a default name such as "Device 1" or "Device 1 - Living Room." In some embodiments, the device location (e.g., a room name) and other device configurations are included in configuration data. During a configuration process, configuration data is received and stored by the devices.

[0268] As described above, prior to provide a representation of the response to user 804, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine whether a representation of the response is to be provided by device 81 OA or another device. In some examples, such determination can be based on the user request represented by the user's speech input (e.g., "Play light music on my bedroom speaker"). In some examples, such determination can be based on at least one of detecting a location of the user or tracking the user's movement. With reference to FIG. 13B, user 804 may be located within living room 1302, in which device 81 OA is disposed. User 804 may want to go to office 1340 and having some light music, and thus provide a speech input 1326 such as "Play light music" to device 81 OA. Speech input 1326 does not indicate on which device 810A-C user would like the music to be played. The digital assistant operating on device 81 OA receives speech input 1326 representing a user request. Similar to those described above, device 81 OA can provide a representation of the user request to at least one of device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone disposed in the vicinity of device 810A) or device 820 (e.g., a remoted disposed server). At least one of device 820 or device 830 determines whether the respective device is capable of providing a response to the user request, and provides the response to device 81 OA.

[0269] Prior to provide a representation of the response to user 804, device 81 OA can determine whether the representation of the response (e.g., an audio output) is to be provided by device 81 OA or another device. In some examples, device 81 OA can make such determination based on at least one of detecting of user 804's location or tracking user 804's movement. For example, device 81 OA may detect that user 804 is located in living room 1320 but is moving toward office 1340. Device 810A can detect location and/or movement using, for example, one or more sensors such as motion sensors, positioning systems, cameras, etc. In accordance with a determination that user 804 is moving toward office 1340, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine that the user intent is not to play the music on device 81 OA, but rather on device 810B disposed within office 1340, or that the music playback should be started on device 81 OA, but continued on device 810B disposed in office 1340 (and optionally discontinued on device 81 OA). In accordance with a

determination that the representation of the response is not to be provided by device 81 OA, device 81 OA can forward the response, or cause the response to be provided, to device 810B disposed in office 1340. Device 810B can thus provide an audio output 1328 playing the light music user requested.

[0270] In other examples, in accordance with a determination that the representation of the response is to be provided by device 81 OA (e.g., user 804 is located in living room 1320 and not moving), device 81 OA can itself provide the representation of response to the user 804. It is appreciated that the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine whether the response is to be provided device 81 OA or another device based on any context information, such as the user's preferences (e.g., user 804 prefers to listen to music before bedtime), past devices used for providing responses, device attributes and capabilities (e.g., device 81 OA may provide better sound than device 810B), etc.

[0271] FIG. 14 illustrates functionalities of providing continuity of digital assistant services between different electronic devices, according to various examples. As illustrated in FIG. 14, the digital assistant operating on device 810A may be providing a response 1406 to user 804 (e.g., playing music). While device 810A is in the process of providing response 1406, user 804 may move out of area 1400, in which device 810A is disposed. For example, user 804 may need to leave his or her house and go to work. In some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can determine whether the response 1406 is to be continually provided a different electronic device. As an example, while device 81 OA is providing response 1406, user 804 may provide a speech input such as "Continue to play the music on my smartphone." Device 81 OA receives this speech input and can determine that the user intent is to continue to play the music on device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone). Such determination can be made using natural language processing techniques described above. Based on the determined user intent, device 810A can determine that response 1406 should be to continue to provide the music at a different device.

[0272] In some embodiments, user 804 can also provide the speech input such as "Continue to play the music on my smartphone" to device 830, instead to device 810A. Based on the speech input and context information (e.g., device 81 OA is currently providing audio outputs), device 830 can determine the user intent is to continually perform a task that is being performed at device 81 OA. For example, device 830 can communicate with device 81 OA (and other devices communicatively coupled to device 830) to determine the status information of device 81 OA. The status information of device 81 OA may indicate that it is currently playing music. Accordingly, device 830 may determine that the user intent is to continually play the music that is being currently played on device 81 OA. Based on the determination, device 830 can communicate with device 81 OA for continually performing the task that is being currently performing by device 810A. For example, device 830 can obtain the content and/or metadata (e.g., time stamps associated with the currently playing music), continually play the music by device 830, and cause device 81 OA to stop playing.

[0273] As another example illustrated in FIG. 14, while the digital assistant operating on device 810A is providing response 1406, device 810A can perform at least one of detecting a location of the user or tracking the user's movement. Device 810A can detect location and/or movement using, for example, one or more sensors such as motion sensors, positioning systems, cameras, etc. As an example, device 81 OA can continuously or periodically track the user 804's current location and/or movement. In some examples, device 810A can detect whether the user 804's location variation with respect to device 810A satisfies a

predetermined condition. For example, device 81 OA can detect the user 804 has moved out of a predetermined boundary of area 1400 (e.g., a house). As a result, device 81 OA can determine that response 1406 should be continually provided at a different device.

[0274] As another example, while device 81 OA is in the process of providing response 1406, it can detect the movement of a device associated with user 804 (e.g., device 830 such as the user's smartphone). For example, device 81 OA can determine that the communication signal strength of device 830 reduced over a short duration of time, indicating that device 830 likely moves out of the boundary of area 1400. As a result, device 81 OA can determine that response 1406 should be continually provided at a different device (e.g., device 830). [0275] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that response 1406 is to be continually provided at a different electronic device, device 810A can cause response 1406 to be continually provided by one or more different electronic devices. For example, device 810A can transmit the remaining content (e.g., the rest of the response 1406) for providing response 1406 and/or metadata associated with providing the response 1406 (e.g., the timestamp of the current playing media that was streamed from device 820 or device 830) to device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone). In some examples, device 810A can also send a notification to another device (e.g., device 820), from which the content of response 1406 is obtained. The notification may indicate or request that the response 1406 is to be continually provided at another device and thus the content of response 1406 should be provided to that device. Based on the received remaining content and/or metadata, device 830 can continue to provide response 1406 to user 804. More details of continually providing digital assistant services on a different device are described in co-pending U. . Patent Application No.

15/271,766, entitled "INTELLIGENT DIGITAL ASSISTANT IN A MULTI-TASKING ENVIRONMENT," filed September 21, 2016, the content of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, and included in the Appendix.

[0276] In the above description in connection with FIGs. 8A-8B, 9A-9C, 1 OA- IOC, 11 A- 11D, 12A-12C, 13A-13B, and 14, device 820 can be a remote device such as a server. In some embodiments, a device can be disposed in the vicinity of devices 810A-C, operating as a proxy device for device 820. As one example and with reference back to FIG. 8A, device 840 (e.g., a TV set-top box) can operate as a proxy device for device 820 (e.g., a remote server). A proxy device can operate as an intermediary for requests from client devices (e.g., device 810A) seeking resources from other devices (e.g., servers). As a proxy, device 840 can operate to process requests from a plurality of home automation devices (e.g., a smart thermostat, a smart door, a smart light switch, etc.). For example, based on user's speech inputs (e.g., speech input received via device 810A), a smart thermostat may be required to perform a task of adjusting temperature and/or humidity levels. The smart thermostat may thus communicate with device 840 to request current temperature and humidity data from various sensors. Device 840 can thus operate as a proxy to relay the request to appropriate devices and/or sensors and provide the data to the smart thermostat.

5. Exemplary functions of a digital assistant providing digital assistant services based on notifications of events. [0277] FIGs. 2, 4, 6, and 15A-15G illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services by a digital assistant operating on an electronic device. In some examples, the digital assistant (e.g., digital assistant system 700) is implemented by a user device according to various examples. In some examples, the user device, a server (e.g., server 108, device 820), or a combination thereof, may implement a digital assistant system (e.g., digital assistant system 700). The user device can be implemented using, for example, device 200, 400, 600, 810A-C, 820, and/or 830. In some examples, the user device is a device having audio outputting capabilities and network connectivity, a smartphone, a laptop computer, a desktop computer, or a tablet computer.

[0278] FIGs. 15A-15G illustrate functionalities of providing digital assistant services based on notifications of events, according to various examples. As illustrated in FIG. 15 A, device 810A can receive a notification 1506 and/or 1508 of one or more events associated with user 1504. As described above, device 810A (and similarly other devices 810B-C) can include one or more audio input and output devices (e.g., a microphone and one or more speakers), one or more network communication interfaces, and optionally one or more indicators (e.g., lights) for providing device operational indications. In some examples, as shown in FIG. 15A, device 810A may receive notification 1506 from device 830 (e.g., the user's smartphone) and/or notification 1508 from device 820 (e.g., a remote server).

[0279] In some examples, a notification of an event can include a representation of at least one of an incoming call, a reminder, a message, a voicemail, a news alert, or the like. For example, a digital assistant operating on device 830 may receive a calendar reminder from a calendar application, and may forward a representation of the calendar reminder to device 810A. As shown in FIG. 15A, in response to receiving the notification 1506 and/or 1508, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can output one or more indications 1510 of notification 1506 and/or 1508. In some examples, an indication 1510 can be an audio indication (e.g., a beep, a tone, etc.), a visual indication (e.g., flashing lights, displayed messages, etc.), or a combination of audio and visual indications. While FIG. 15A illustrates that indication 1510 is provided by device 81 OA, indication 1510 can also be provided by other devices, such as device 830 and/or devices 810B-C (not shown in FIG. 15A). As described, device 830 can be, for example, the user's smartphone, smart watch, tablet, etc.; and devices 810B-C can be similar type of devices as device 81 OA and are disposed in the vicinity of device 810A (e.g., in the same house). Thus, an indication of a notification can be provided to user 1504 by any device at any location. Providing indications by multiple devices disposed at various locations can improve the likelihood of capturing user 1504's attention regarding the notifications. In some examples, a notification is only provided by one device (e.g., device 810A) in order to minimize the disturbance to user 1504.

[0280] As illustrated in FIG. 15B and continuing the above example, user 1504 receives indication 1510 and may provide a speech input 1516 inquiring about indication 1510. For example, speech input 1516 can include "What is it?" In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA receives speech input 1516 and can output a response 1518 in accordance with the notification of the event. For example, as shown in FIG. 15B, if the notification of the event includes a representation of a voice message from John, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can output a response 1518 such as "You have a voicemail from John." If the notification of the event includes a representation of a calendar reminder, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can output a response 1518 such as "You have an upcoming event on your calendar." If the notification of the event includes a representation of an incoming call from John, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can output a response 1518 such as "You have an incoming call from John."

[0281] As illustrated in FIG. 15C and continuing the above example, after outputting response 1518 in accordance with the notification of the event, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can continue to monitor user inputs by, for example, listening for user utterances during or after response 1518. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may receive a subsequent speech input 1526. Speech input 1526 may include, for example, "Play the message," "What is the event?", or "Take the call from John."

[0282] In some examples, as shown in FIG. 15C, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA receives speech input 1526 and can determine the user intent based on speech input 1526. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine that the user intent is to play the voicemail from John, listen to the upcoming calendar event, or take the call from John. Accordingly, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide the notification to user 1504 in accordance with the determined user intent. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide an audio output 1528 corresponding to the voicemail from John (e.g., "Hi, Bill, this is John. Do you have time to have lunch together tomorrow?").

[0283] In some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine whether the notification is to be provided at device 81 OA in according with one or more speech inputs. As described above, in some examples, device 81 OA can be shared among multiple users. Therefore, a notification of an event that device 81 OA receives may or may be for a particular user (e.g., user 1504). As illustrated in FIG. 15D and continuing the above example where device 81 OA outputs a response in accordance with the notification of the event (e.g., "Bill, you have a voicemail from John"), device 810A may receive a subsequent speech input 1536 from user 1505, which is a user that is different from the intended user for providing the notification of the event. Speech input 1536 may include, for example, "I am not Bill. He is not here."

[0284] In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can obtain an identity of the user who provides one or more speech inputs and determine whether the notification is to be provided to the user who provides the one or more speech inputs. As shown in FIG. 15D, for example, based on speech input 1536 (e.g., "I am not Bill. He is not here"), the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine that user 1505 is not the user to which the notification is intended to be provided (e.g., "not Bill"). Accordingly, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine that the notification should not be provided to user 1505.

[0285] In some examples, to obtain the identity of the user who provides one or more speech inputs, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can obtain authentication data associated with the user. As illustrated in FIG. 15E and continuing the above example where device 810A outputs a response in accordance with the notification of the event (e.g., "Bill, you have a voicemail from John"), the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may receive a subsequent speech input 1546 from user 1507, which is a user that is different from the intended user for providing the notification of the event. User 1507 may be, for example, a guest in user 1504's (e.g., Bill) house. User 1507 may decide to listen to Bill's message and thus speech input 1546 may include, for example, "Play the message." In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can obtain authentication data associated with user 1507. Similar to those described above, the authentication data can include user 1507's voice biometrics, user 1507's facial recognition data, sensing of another device that identifies the user 1507 (e.g., the user's smart watch), and other credentials of the user 1507 (e.g. fingerprints, passwords, etc.). Based on the authentication data, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can obtain a determination of the identity of user 1507. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 810A can authenticate user 1507 based on the authentication data. As another example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide the authentication data to at least one of device 830 (e.g., Bill's smartphone) or device 820 (e.g., a server) for authentication. Device 830 and/or device 820 receive the authentication data and can perform authentication to obtain identity of user 1507 (e.g., matching voice biometrics, fingerprints, passwords, etc.). The digital assistant operating on device 810A can thus receive user 1507's identity from at least one of device 830 or device 820.

[0286] In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine, based on the identity of the user and based on the received notification, whether the notification should be provided to the user who provides at least one of the one or more speech inputs. For example, as shown in FIG. 15E, based on the identity of user 1507 (e.g., a guest in user 1504's house) and notification 1506 (e.g., a representation of a voicemail for Bill), the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may determine that notification 1506 should not be provided to user 1507 because the identity of user 1507 does not match with the user for which the notification is intended (e.g., user 1507 is not Bill or authorized.

Accordingly, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide an audio output 1548 informing user 1507 that he or she is not authorized to receive the notification (e.g., "Sorry, you are not authorized to listen to this message"). On the other hand, the digital assistant operating on device 810A may determine that notification 1506 should be provided to user 1507 because the identity of user 1507 matches with the user for which the notification is intended (e.g., user 1507 is Bill) or authorized. For example, user 1507 may be user 1504's family member and is authorized to receive notifications for user 1504. Accordingly, device 81 OA can provide an audio output including the content of the notification 1506.

[0287] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the notification is to be provided to the user who provides at least one of the one or more speech inputs, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can further determine whether the notification is to be provided at device 810A. As illustrated in FIG. 15F, based on a speech input 1556 (e.g., "Play the message"), device 81 OA can obtain the identity of user 1504 and determine that user 1504 is authorized to receive the notification. Thus, the digital assistant operation on device 81 OA can determine that the notification should be provided to user 1504. In some examples, the digital assistant operation on device 81 OA can further determine whether the notification is to be provided at device 81 OA. As shown in FIG. 15 A, one or more devices may be disposed in the vicinity of user 1504. For example, device 810A may be disposed in living room 1520; device 810B may be disposed in office 1540; and device 8 I OC may be disposed in bedroom 1560. In some examples, device 81 OA may or may not be the optimum device for providing notifications to user 1504. For example, user 1504 may be moving away from device 810A (e.g., moving toward office 1540). As another example, there may be other users (e.g., guests) near device 81 OA disposed in living room 1520, and thus user 1504 may not want to receive notifications from device 810A for privacy concerns.

[0288] Similar to those described above, in some examples, a determination of whether the notification is to be provided at device 81 OA can be based on the user request represented by the user's speech input (e.g., "Play the message on my office speaker"). In some examples, such determination can be based on at least one of detecting a location of the user or tracking the user's movement. For example, user 1504 may want to go to office 1540 to receive the notification (e.g., listen to a voicemail, pick up a phone call, etc.). The digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may detect that user 804 is located in living room 1520 but is moving toward office 1540. The digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can detect location and/or movement using, for example, one or more sensors such as motion sensors, positioning systems, cameras, signal strength measurements to the various devices, etc. Based on the detection of user movement, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine that the notification should be provided by device 810B disposed in office 1540, instead of device 81 OA disposed in living room 1520. In other examples, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may detect that user 804 is not moving and remains in living room 1520. Accordingly, device 81 OA can determine that the notification should be provided by device 81 OA disposed in living room 1520.

[0289] FIG. 15G illustrates another example in which device 81 OA may determine that the notification should be provided by another device. As shown in FIG. 15G, while receiving notification 1572 (e.g., a representation of a voicemail from John), device 810A may be providing audio outputs 1576 (e.g., playing a media item). Thus, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA may determine that notification 1572 should not be provided at device 810A to avoid interruption of providing audio output 1576. Accordingly, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine an additional device for providing notification 1572. In some examples, such determination is based on context information. For instance, based on information that device 810A is currently providing audio output 1576 and based on detection of device 830, device 810A can determine that the notification 1572 can be provided at device 830. In some examples, device 81 OA can provide an output (e.g., audio and/or visual output) confirming with user 1504 that notification 1572 should be provided at another device. It is appreciated that the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can determine whether the notification is to be provided at device 81 OA or at another device based on any context information, such as the user's preferences (e.g., user 1504 prefers to listen voicemail from a colleague on device 81 OB in office 1540), past devices used for providing notifications, device attributes and capabilities (e.g., device 810B may provide better sound than device 81 OA), etc.

[0290] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that a notification is to be provided at device 81 OA, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can provide the notification at device 81 OA. For example, as illustrated in the above examples, digital assistant operating on device 810A can provide audio outputs including the notification (e.g., output voicemails, phone calls, calendar reminders, etc.). In accordance with a determination that a notification is to be provided at a device different from device 81 OA, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can cause the notification to be provided at the another device. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 81 OA can forward the notification to device 830, or send a request to device 830 for providing the notification at device 830. Based on the notification or request, device 830 can provide audio outputs 1574 including the content of the notification (e.g., output voicemails, phone calls, calendar reminders, etc.).

6. Process for providing digital assistant services based on user inputs.

[0291] FIGs. 16A-16I illustrates process 1600 for operating a digital assistant for providing digital assistant services based on user inputs, according to various examples. Process 1600 is performed, for example, using one or more electronic devices implementing a digital assistant. In some examples, process 1600 is performed using a client-server system (e.g., system 100), and the blocks of process 1600 are divided up in any manner between the server (e.g., DA server 106) and a client device. In other examples, the blocks of process 1600 are divided up between the server and multiple client devices (e.g., a mobile phone and a smart watch). Thus, while portions of process 1600 are described herein as being performed by particular devices of a client-server system, it will be appreciated that process 1600 is not so limited. In other examples, process 1600 is performed using only a client device (e.g., user device 104, electronic device 810A, device 830, or device 840) or only multiple client devices. In process 1600, some blocks are, optionally, combined, the order of some blocks is, optionally, changed, and some blocks are, optionally, omitted. In some examples, additional steps may be performed in combination with the process 1600. [0292] With reference to FIG. 16A, at block 1602, a second speech input including a predetermined content (e.g., "Wake up, speaker" or "Hey, Speaker") is received. At block 1604, in response to receiving the second speech input, a first electronic device is activated. The first electronic device can be a service-extension device (e.g., device 810A as shown in FIGs. 8A-15G). At block 1606, in some examples, the second speech input does not cause one or more additional electronic devices to be activated. The one or more additional electronic devices may be disposed in the vicinity of the first electronic device. For example, the volume or sound pressure associated with the speech input can be detected and recorded by both of the first electronic device and an additional electronic device. Based on the comparison of the sound pressure detected at the two devices, the user's position relative to the two devices can be determined. For example, it may be determined that the user is physically closer to the first electronic device than to other device. As a result, the first electronic device may be activated while the other device may not be activated.

[0293] At block 1608, a first speech input representing a user request is received from a first user. At block 1610, the user request comprises a request for information specific to the first user (e.g., the first user's calendar, contacts, etc.). At block 1612, the user request comprises a request for non-user-specific information (e.g., weather information, stock prices, sports game information, etc.) At block 1614, the user request comprises a request for performing a task (e.g., play music, establish a conference, etc.).

[0294] At block 1616, an identity of the first user is the obtained. At block 1618, authentication data associated with the first user is obtained. The authentication data may include, for example, user's voice biometrics, user's facial recognition data, sensing of another electronic device that identifies the user, other credentials of the user, such as the user's fingerprints, passwords, or the like. At block 1620, a determination of the identity of the first user is obtained based on the authentication data. At block 1622, to obtain the identity of the first user, the authentication data are provided to at least one of a second electronic device (e.g., a remote server) or the third electronic device (e.g., user's smartphone). At block 1624, the identity of the first user is received from at least one of the second electronic device or the third electronic device. The identity of the first user is determined based on the authentication data. At block 1626, the identity of the first user is obtained based on the second speech input (e.g., "Wake up, speaker" or "Hey, speaker"). As described above, the second speech input may be associated with the user's voice biometrics and can be used for determination of the user's identity. [0295] With reference to FIG. 16B, at block 1628, one or more speech inquiries regarding the user request represented by the first speech input is outputted. The speech inquiries may be used to clarify the first speech input with the first user (e.g., "What's that?" or "I did not quite get that"). At block 1630, an additional speech input is received from the first user in response to the one or more speech inquiries. For example, the first user may repeat or rephrase the first speech input).

[0296] At block 1632, a connection is established between the first electronic device (e.g., a server-extension device) and at least one of the second electronic device (e.g., a remote server) or the third electronic device (e.g., a device disposed in the vicinity of the first electronic device). At block 1634, establishing a connection is based on a near-field communication between the first electronic device and the third electronic device. At block 1636, establishing a connection is based on detecting of the third electronic device being within a predetermined distance from the first electronic device. At block 1638, establishing a connection is based on a previous established connection between the first electronic device and the third electronic device. For example, the connected can be established based a log file indicating that the first electronic device and the third electronic device have been connected in the past before. The log file may also indicate connection parameters used in the previous connection.

[0297] As described above, a server-extension device can be shared by multiple users and thus connect to multiple devices associated with one or more users. At block 1640, a connection is established between the first electronic device (e.g., a service-extension device) and the third electronic device (e.g., a client device of the first user). The third electronic device is associated with the first user. At block 1642, a connection is established between the first electronic device and a fourth electronic device (e.g., a tablet device of the second user). The fourth electronic device is associated with a second user. At block 1644, in some examples, after establishing a connection between the first electronic device and the third electronic device, the second electronic device is notified of the established connection. For example, after a connection is established between a server-extension device (e.g., device 81 OA shown in FIGs. 8A-8B) and a smartphone device, a server can be notified of the established connection.

[0298] With reference to FIG. 16C, as described above, an identity of the first user is obtained. At block 1646, in accordance with the user identity, a representation of the user request is provided to at least one of a second electronic device or a third electronic device. At block 1648, the second electronic device is a server remotely disposed from the first electronic device; and the third electronic device is a client device disposed in the vicinity of the first electronic device. At block 1650, the third electronic device is a proxy device of a server. For example, a client device (e.g., device 840 shown in FIG. 8 A) can operate as a proxy device for a server (e.g., device 820 shown in FIG. 8 A) to process requests from other devices (e.g., home automation devices such as am intelligent thermostat).

[0299] At block 1652, in some examples, to provide the representation of the user request to at least one of the second electronic device or the third electronic device, it is determined whether the third electronic device (e.g., a client device disposed in the vicinity of the first electronic device) is communicatively coupled to the first electronic device (e.g., a service- extension device). At block 1654, in accordance with a determination that the third electronic device is communicatively coupled to the first electronic device, the representation of the user request is provided to the third electronic device and not to the second electronic device. At block 1656, in accordance with a determination that the third electronic device is not communicatively coupled to the first electronic device, the representation of the user request is provided to the second electronic device.

[0300] At block 1658, in some examples, the representation of the user request is provided to the second electronic device (e.g., a remote server) and not to the third electronic device (e.g., a client device disposed in the vicinity of the first electronic device). At block 1660, in some examples, the representation of the user request is provided to both the second electronic device and the third electronic device.

[0301] As described above, the second electronic device and/or the third electronic device receives the representation of the user request and can determine whether one or both is to provide a response to the first electronic device. With reference to FIG. 16C, at block 1662, based on a determination of whether the second electronic device or the third electronic device, or both, is to provide a response to the first electronic device, the response to the user request is received from the second electronic device or the third electronic device.

[0302] At block 1664, as described above, in some examples, the representation of the user request is provided to the third electronic device and not to the second electronic device. At block 1666, for receiving the response to the user request, it is caused the third electronic device (e.g., a client device) to determine whether the third electronic device is capable of providing the response to the user request. At block 1668, in accordance with a determination that the third electronic device is capable of providing the response to the user request, it is received, at the first electronic device, the response to the user request from the third electronic device. At block 1670, a determination is made that the third electronic device is incapable of providing the response to the user request. At block 1672, in accordance with such a determination, the representation of the user request is forwarded by the third electronic device to the second electronic device. At block 1674, the response to the user request is received at the first electronic device from the second electronic device.

[0303] With reference to FIG. 16E, as described above, in some examples, at block 1676, the representation of the user request is provided to the second electronic device (e.g., a remote server) and not to the third electronic device (e.g., a client device). At block 1678, for receiving a response to the user request at the first electronic device, it is caused the second electronic device to determine whether the second electronic device is capable of providing the response to the user request. At block 1680, in accordance with a determination that the second electronic device is capable of providing the response to the user request, the response to the user request is received at the first electronic device from the second electronic device. At block 1682, it is determined that the second electronic device is incapable of providing the response to the user request.

[0304] At block 1684, in accordance with such a determination, the representation of the user request is forwarded by the second electronic device to the third electronic device. The third electronic device (e.g., a client device) can thus provide a response based on the user request. At block 1686, the response to the user request.is received at the first electronic device. At block 1688, the first electronic device receives the response to the user request from the third electronic device. At block 1690, the first electronic device receives the response to the user request from the second electronic device (e.g., a remote server) based on a response provided by the third electronic device to the second electronic device. For example, a client device can forward the response to the remote server, which provides the response to the first electronic device (e.g., a server-extension device).

[0305] With reference to FIG. 16F, as described, in some examples, at block 1692, the representation of the user request is provided from the first electronic device to both the second electronic device and the third electronic device. At block 1694, for receiving the response to the user request, it is caused the second electronic device (e.g., a remote server) to determine whether the second electronic device is capable of providing the response to the user request. At block 1696, for receiving the response to the user request, it is caused the third electronic device (e.g., a client device disposed in the vicinity of the first electronic device) to determine whether the third electronic device is capable of providing the response to the user request. One or both of the determinations in block 1694 and block 1696 can be performed.

[0306] At block 1698, in accordance with a determination that the second electronic device is capable of providing the response to the user request, and that the third electronic device is incapable of providing the response to the user request, the response to the user request is received at the first electronic device from the second electronic device. At block 1700, in accordance with a determination that the third electronic device is capable of providing the response to the user request, and that the second electronic device is incapable of providing the response to the user request, the response to the user request is received at the first electronic device from the third electronic device. At block 1702, in accordance with a determination that both the second electronic device and the third electronic device are capable of providing the response to the user request, the response to the user request is received at the first electronic device from the second electronic device or the third electronic device based on a predetermined condition. The predetermined condition can be, for example, a pre-configured policy (e.g., the third electronic device is the default device to provide a response), user preferences, bandwidth conditions of the connections to the second and third electronic devices, etc.

[0307] With reference to FIG. 16G, at block 1704, it is determining whether the representation of the response is to be provided by the first electronic device (e.g., a service- extension device). At block 1706, the determination of whether the response is to be provided by the first electronic device is based on the user request (e.g., the user's speech input indicates that the response is to be provided at a different electronic device). At block 1708, the determination of whether the response is to be provided by the first electronic device is based on at least one of detecting a location of the user or tracking the user's movement. For example, if it is detected that the user is moving away from the first electronic device toward another device, the response may not be provided by the first electronic device.

[0308] At block 1710, in accordance with a determination that the representation of the response is to be provided by the first electronic device, the representation of the response is provided to the first user by the first electronic device. At block 1712, in accordance with a determination that the representation of the response is not to be provided by the first electronic device, the response to is forwarded to one or more additional electronic devices, which can provide the response to the first user.

[0309] With reference to FIG. 16H, at block 1714, a representation of the response is provided to the first user. At block 1716, to provide the representation of the response, a speech output including information in response to the user request is provided at the first electronic device. At block 1718, the information is provided by the second electronic device or the third electronic device to the first electronic device.

[0310] At block 1720, to provide the representation of the response, a speech output associated with performing a task in accordance with the user request is provided at the first electronic device. At block 1722, in some examples, the task is performed by the third electronic device (e.g., a client device such as the first user's smartphone). At block 1724, in some examples, the task is performed by the first electronic device and the third electronic device. For example, the first electronic device may output an audio portion of a response, while the third electronic device (e.g., a TV set-top box connected to a TV screen) may output a video portion of the response. At block 1726, the task is further performed by one or more additional electronic devices. For example, in addition to providing a response (e.g., playing a movie) at a service-extension device and a client device such as a TV set-top box, the response may be further provided at an additional device such as a laptop computer.

[0311] At block 1728, in some examples, one or more connections are established between the first electronic device and one or more additional electronic devices. The additional electronic devices are the same type of devices as the first electronic device. For example, connections can be established among multiple service-extension devices (e.g., devices 810A-C as shown in FIGs. 8A-8B).

[0312] At block 1730, the response is being provided to the first user by the first electronic device. At block 1732, while providing the response to the first user by the first electronic device, it is determined whether the response is to be continually provided at a different electronic device (e.g., a client device such as the user's smartphone). At block 1734, the determination of whether the response is to be continually provided at a different electronic device is based on a third speech input (e.g., a speech input from the first user such as "Continue to play the song on my phone"). At block 1736, the determination of whether the response is to be continually provided at a different electronic device is based on detecting whether the first user's location variation with respect to the first electronic device satisfies a predetermined condition. For example, it can be determined whether the first user has moved out of a predetermined boundary such that the response should be continually provided at a device different from the first electronic device.

[0313] At block 1738, in accordance with a determination that the response is to be continually provided at a different electronic device, the response is caused to be continually provided by at least one of the third electronic device or one or more additional electronic devices.

[0314] At block 1740, after providing the response to the first user, subsequent speech inputs are monitored.

7. Process for providing digital assistant services based on notifications of events.

[0315] FIGs. 17A-17D illustrates process 1800 for operating a digital assistant for providing digital assistant services based on notifications of events, according to various examples. Process 1800 is performed, for example, using one or more electronic devices implementing a digital assistant. In some examples, process 1800 is performed using a client-server system (e.g., system 100), and the blocks of process 1800 are divided up in any manner between the server (e.g., DA server 106) and a client device. In other examples, the blocks of process 1800 are divided up between the server and multiple client devices (e.g., a mobile phone and a smart watch). Thus, while portions of process 1800 are described herein as being performed by particular devices of a client-server system, it will be appreciated that process 1800 is not so limited. In other examples, process 1800 is performed using only a client device (e.g., user device 104, devices 810A-C) or only multiple client devices. In process 1800, some blocks are, optionally, combined, the order of some blocks is, optionally, changed, and some blocks are, optionally, omitted. In some examples, additional steps may be performed in combination with the process 1800.

[0316] With reference to FIG. 17A, at block 1802, prior to receiving a notification of an event, a connection is established between a first electronic device (e.g., a service-extension device) and at least one of a second electronic device (e.g., a server) or a third electronic device (e.g., a client device disposed in the vicinity of the first electronic device). At block 1804, establishing the connection is based on a near-field communication between the first electronic device and the third electronic device. At block 1806, establishing the connection is based on detecting of the third electronic device being within a predetermined distance from the first electronic device. At block 1808, establishing the connection is based on a previous established connection between the first electronic device and the third electronic device.

[0317] As described above, the first electronic device (e.g., a service-extension device) can be shared by multiple users. At block 1810, a connection between the first electronic device and the third electronic device is established; and the third electronic device is associated with the first user. At block 1812, a connection between the first electronic device and a fourth electronic device is established; and the fourth electronic device is associated with a second user. At block 1814, after establishing a connection between the first electronic device and the third electronic device, the second electronic device (e.g., a remote server) is notified of the established connection.

[0318] With reference to FIG. 17B, at block 1816, a notification of an event associated with a first user is received. At block 1818, the notification of the event includes a representation of at least one of an incoming call, a reminder, a message, a voicemail, or a news alert. At block 1820, the notification is received from at least one of a second electronic device (e.g., a remote server) or a third electronic device (e.g., a client device disposed in the vicinity of the first electronic device).

[0319] At block 1822, in response to receiving the notification, an indication of the notification is outputted. An indication can be, for example, a beep, an alert, a ringtone, etc. At block 1824, the indication of the notification is outputted by the first electronic device or one of the additional electronic devices communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. For example, a client device such as user's smartphone can output the indication of the notification; and another service-extension device can output the indication of the notification.

[0320] At block 1826, one or more speech inputs are received. At block 1828, for example, a first speech input is received regarding the notification (e.g., the user may provide a first speech input inquiring about the indication of the even notification such as "What is it?"). At block 1830, a response is outputted in accordance with the notification of the event. For example, a speech output may be provided such as "You have a voicemail from John." At block 1832, a second speech input is received. For example, the user may say "Play the voicemail." [0321] With reference to FIG. 17C, at block 1834, in accordance with the one or more speech inputs, it is determined whether the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device. At block 1836, to determine whether the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device, it is obtained an identity of the user who provides at least one of the one or more speech inputs. At block 1838, to obtain the identity of the user, it is obtained authentication data associated with the user who provides at least one of the one or more speech inputs. The authentication data can include, for example, the user's biometrics, fingerprints, facial recognition data, passwords, etc. At block 1840, it is obtained a determination of the identity of the user who provides at least one of the one or more speech inputs based on the authentication data.

[0322] At block 1842, to obtain the determination of the identity of the user who provides at least one of the one or more speech inputs, the authentication data is provided to at least one of a second electronic device and a third electronic device. At block 1844, it is received the identity of the user who provides at least one of the one or more speech inputs from at least one of the second electronic device and the third electronic device. The identity of the user who provides at least one of the one or more speech inputs is determined based on the authentication data.

[0323] At block 1846, it is determined, based on the identity of the user who provides at least one of the one or more speech inputs and based on the notification, whether the notification is to be provided to the user who provides at least one of the one or more speech inputs. At block 1848, in accordance with a determination that the notification is to be provided to the user who provides at least one of the one or more speech inputs, it is determined whether the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device.

[0324] With reference to FIG. 17D, at block 1850, in accordance with a determination that the notification is to be provided at the first electronic device, the notification is provided at the first electronic device. At block 1852, to provide the notification at the first electronic device, an audio output is provided associated with the notification at the first electronic device.

[0325] At block 1854, in accordance with a determination that the notification is not to be provided at the first electronic device, an additional electronic device for providing the notification is determined. At block 1856, determining the additional electronic device for providing the notification is based on the one or more speech inputs. At block 1858, determining the additional electronic device for providing the notification is based on context information.

[0326] The operations described above with reference to FIGs. 16A-16I and 17A-17D are optionally implemented by components depicted in FIGs. 1-4, 6A-B, and 7A-C. For example, the operations of process 1600 and 1800 may be implemented by digital assistant system 700. It would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes are implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1-4, 6A-B, and 7A-C.

8. Exemplary functions of providing digital assistant services using multiple devices.

[0327] As described above, digital assistant services can be provided by one or more devices. Due to device capability limitations, certain devices may be incapable of, or not optimum for, providing certain digital assistant services. For example, a smartwatch typically has a small screen size and thus is not optimum for playing video. As another example, unlike a smartphone, a TV set-top box may be incapable of providing speech outputs for text messages.

[0328] FIGs. 18A-18E illustrate functionalities for providing digital assistant services based on capabilities of multiple electronic devices, according to various examples. In some examples, the digital assistant (e.g., digital assistant system 700) is implemented by a user device according to various examples. In some examples, the user device, a server (e.g., server 108, device 820), or a combination thereof, may implement a digital assistant system (e.g., digital assistant system 700). The user device can be implemented using, for example, device 200, 400, 600, 820, 830, 840, 1880, and/or 1882. In some examples, the user device is a device having audio outputting capabilities and network connectivity, a smart watch, smartphone, a laptop computer, a desktop computer, or a tablet computer.

[0329] As illustrated in FIG. 18A, user 804 may provide a speech input 1886 such as "Show me the video I took last Sunday." Speech input 1886 can represent a user request (e.g., a request for information or a request for performing a task). In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 receives speech input 1886 from user 804. Device 1880 can be, for example, a client device (e.g., a wearable device such as smart watch). Device 1880 can also be a device similar to device 810A described above, which can include one or more audio input and output devices (e.g., a microphone and one or more speakers) and one or more network communication interfaces. Device 1880 may or may not be capable of, or optimum for, responding to the user request (e.g., providing the requested information or performing the requested tasks). For example, device 1880 may not have a display or may have a small-sized display that is not optimum to play video.

[0330] In some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can obtain capability data associated with one or more electronic devices capable of being

communicatively coupled to device 1880. For example, as shown in FIG. 18A, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can determine that device 820 (e.g., a remote server), device 830 (e.g., a client device such as the user's smartphone), device 840 (a TV set-top box) are communicatively coupled to device 1880. The determination can be made, for example, via Bluetooth pairing, Wi-Fi connection, etc., similar to as described above with respect to device 81 OA. Based on the determination that devices 820, 830, and 840 are communicatively coupled, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can obtain capability data associated with these devices. In some examples, some devices are client devices disposed in the vicinity of device 1880 and some devices are disposed remotely from device 1880. For example, device 1880, device 830, and device 840 are client devices disposed within a predetermined boundary (e.g., a house, a building, a car, etc.); and device 820 is a server disposed remotely.

[0331] In some examples, capability data can include device capabilities associated with electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to device 1880. Device capabilities can include one or more physical capabilities and/or informational capabilities. Physical capabilities of a device can include the device's physical attributes such as whether the device has a display, the size of the display, the number of speakers, network capabilities, or the like. Informational capabilities of a device can include data that the device is capable of providing. For example, device 830 may store media items (e.g., videos and photos) that user 804 took, and is thus capable of providing the stored media items to other devices communicatively connected to device 830.

[0332] In some examples, prior to obtaining the capability data, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can be configured to establish communication with other electronic devices (e.g., devices 820, 830, and/or 840). In some examples, the communication can be established via a direct communication connection, such as Bluetooth, near-field

communication (NFC), BTLE (Bluetooth Low Energy), or the like, or via a wired or wireless network, such as a local Wi-Fi network. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can detect device 830 via Bluetooth discovery, and communicatively coupled to devices 830 via Bluetooth connection. As another example, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can detect a Wi-Fi network and couple to device 840 via the Wi-Fi network. As another example, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can detect a near field communication when the device 830 (e.g., a client device such as the user's smartphone) is in close proximity with, or physically in touch with, device 1880. For instance, to pair up device 1880 and device 830, user 804 may tap device 1880 with device 830, thereby establishing near-field communication between the two devices. As another example, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 may detect that device 830 (e.g., a client device such as the user's smartphone) is within a predetermined distance (e.g., within a range of Bluetooth communication) and establish a connection with device 830. For instance, as user 804 approaches device 1880 with device 830, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 detects that device 830 is within communication range, and thus connects device 1880 with device 830. As another example, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 may establish a connection with device 830 based on one or more previous established connections between the two devices. For instance, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can store a log file including the devices that it connected in the past, and optionally connection parameters. Thus, based on the log file, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can determine, for example, that it has connected to device 830 before. Based on such determination, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can establish the connection with device 830 again.

[0333] In some examples, prior to obtaining the capability data, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can inquire user 804 regarding accessing one or more devices capable of being communicatively coupled to device 1880. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 may provide a speech output such as "Do I have your permission to access your phone and TV?" In some examples, user 804 may respond with a speech input either permitting the access or denying the access. In response to receiving the speech input, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can determine whether it is authorized to access the devices communicatively coupled to device 1880. For example, if user 804's speech input is "OK," the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can determine that it is authorized to access devices 830 and 840. If user 804's speech input is "No," the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can determine that it is not authorized to access devices 830 and 840. If user 804's speech input is "Yes for my phone, No for my TV" (e.g., user 804 may be watching another video by using device 840 and device 1882 (e.g., a TV display), and does not wish to disturb the video playing on device 1882), the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can determine that it is authorized to access device 830 but not device 840 for playing the video on device 1882.

[0334] With reference to FIGs. 18A and 18B, in some embodiments, in accordance with the capability data, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can identify, from the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the device, a device for providing at least a portion of a response to the user request. In some examples, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can obtain one or more steps for responding to the user request based on speech input 1886. The one or more steps for responding to the user request can include steps for providing requested information and/or steps for performing a requested task. For example, based on speech input 1886 such as "Show me the video I took last Sunday," device 1880 can determine the user request is to find the video user 804 took last Sunday and play it. The determination can be made using natural language processing techniques described above.

[0335] According to the determined user request, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can determine one or more steps required for responding to the user request. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can determine that step # 1 for playing a video user 804 took last Sunday is to find the particular video that user 804 took last Sunday; and step # 2 is to play the particular video. In some embodiments, the determination of the one or more steps can be made on another device (e.g., device 820 such as a remote server) and provided to device 1880. In some embodiments, the determination of the one or more steps can be made using both device 820 and device 1880. For example, a digital assistant can operate on device 1880 in the front end to interface with user 804 and operate on device 820 in the back end to process the user input. In some embodiments, the one or more steps for responding to the user request can form at least a portion of an execution plan. An execution plan may include the steps for responding to the user request and the device for perform each of the steps.

[0336] In some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can identify one or more devices for performing the steps for responding to the user request based on capability data associated with one or more electronic devices capable of being

communicatively coupled to device 1880. Continuing the above example, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can identify a device for performing step # 1 of finding a particular video that user 804 took last Sunday; and identify a device for performing step # 2 of playing the particular video. As shown in FIG. 18B, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 may determine that, among the devices communicatively connected to device 1880 (e.g., devices 820, 830, and 840), the capability data of device 830 (e.g., a client device such as the user's smartphone) indicate that device 830 has the capability of finding the particular video user 804 took last Sunday. For example, user 804 took a video last Sunday using device 830, and therefore the informational capability data of device 830 may indicate that a file stored in device 830 has a format of a video and a time stamp of last Sunday.

Accordingly, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can identify device 830 for performing step # 1 of finding the particular video user 804 intended.

[0337] As another example, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 may determine that, among devices 820, 830, and 840, the capability data of device 840 (e.g., a TV set-top box) indicate that device 840 is an optimum device for performing step # 2 of playing videos. For example, device capability data of devices 830 and 840 may both indicate that the devices are capable of playing videos. Device capability data of device 840 may further indicate that one or more device attributes (e.g., display size/resolution/number of speakers) of a device 1882 (e.g., a TV screen), on which device 840 can play the video, are superior than the device attributes of device 830. For example, the display size of device 1882 is bigger than the display size of device 830. As a result, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can identify device 840, instead of device 830, for performing step # 2 of playing the video.

[0338] In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 18B, based on the determination of the devices for performing the steps for responding to the user request, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can provide a speech output to user 804 seeking confirmation or permission to access the devices identified for responding to the user request. For example, as shown in FIG. 18B, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can provide a speech output 1883 such as "I will retrieve the video from your phone and play it on your TV, OK to proceed?" With reference to FIG. 18C, in some examples, device 1880 may receive subsequent speech input 1885 from user 804. In response to receiving speech input 1885, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can determine whether at least a portion of the response is to be provided by one or more devices communicatively coupled to device 1880. For example, if speech input 1885 includes "OK," the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can determine that the video should be retrieved from device 830 and played on device 1882 (e.g., a TV display) using device 840 (e.g., a TV set-top box). If speech input 1885 includes "No, play the video on my phone," the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can determine that the video should be retrieved from device 830, but played on device 830 rather than device 1882. It is appreciated that, in some examples, providing speech output 1883 seeking confirmation/permission and receiving subsequence user input 1885 are optional.

[0339] In some embodiments, prior to providing a speech output for confirming or requesting permission to user the devices identified for responding to the user request, the digital assistant can annotate one or more steps for responding to the user request, and providing the speech output based on the annotation. Using the above example, the digital assistant operation on device 1880 can determine whether performing a particular step would require altering a state of a device. For instance, for performing step # 2 of playing video on device 1882 (e.g., a TV display), a state of device 840 may be altered (e.g., changing from a state of power off to power on, switching from the current playing video to the video user requested, etc.). As a result, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can annotate step # 2 as a step that requires altering state of the identified device.

[0340] As another example, for performing step # 1 of finding the video user 804 took on last Sunday, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 may determine that performing step # 1 would not require altering the state of device 830. As a result, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 may not annotate step # 1 as a step that requires altering state of the identified device. In some examples, based on the annotation, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can then provide a speech output seeking confirmation or permission to use the devices identified for responding to the user request. Using the above example, because step # 2 of playing video is a state-altering step for the identified device 840, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can provide a speech output seeking permission to access device 840. The speech output may include, for example, "I will play the video on your TV, OK to proceed?" And because step # 1 of finding a video is a not state-altering step for the identified device 830, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 may not provide a speech output seeking permission to access device 830.

[0341] With reference to FIG. 18C, in some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can cause one or more identified devices to provide at least a portion of a response to the user request. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can request device 830 to search and find the video user 804 took last Sunday and transmit the video to device 840. It can further request device 840 to play the video on device 1882 (e.g., a TV).

[0342] As described above, in some examples, prior to obtaining the capability data, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can seek confirmation or permission to access one or more electronic devices being capable of communicatively coupled to device 1880. For example, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 may provide a speech output such as "Do I have your permission to access your phone?" With reference to FIG. 18D, in some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can provide one or more duration options for accessing the devices being capable of communicatively coupled to device 1880. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 18D, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can display options 1884A-C on device 1880. Option 1884A may include "Allow Once," indicating that the access to device 830 from device 1880 is permitted only this time. Option 1884B may include "Allow while both devices are at home," indicating that the access to device 830 from device 1880 is permitted while both devices are within a predetermined boundary (e.g., within or nearby a house). Option 1884C may include "Always allow," indicating the access to device 830 from device 1880 is always permitted. In some examples, the digital assistant may also provide an option 1884D (not shown), which may include "Not allow," indicating that access to device 830 from device 1880 is denied. In some

embodiments, similar duration options 1887A-D can be displayed on device 830, thereby enabling the user of device 830 (e.g. a user that may or may not be the same as the user of device 1880) to control the access of device 830.

[0343] In some embodiments, the digital assistant operating on device 1880 can receive a selection of a duration option from user 804 and access the devices capable of being communicatively coupled to device 1880 based on the selected duration option. For example, if the selection is option 1884A such as "Allow once," the digital assistant operating on device 1880 may only access device 830 to find the video the user requested for this time.

[0344] As described above, in some embodiments, a digital assistant can cause one or more identified devices to provide at least a portion of a response to the user request. In some embodiments, prior to causing the identified devices to provide a response, the digital assistant can obtain an identity of the user and determine whether the user is authorized to receive at least a portion of the response. As illustrated in FIG. 18E, for example, device 840 may be a device (e.g., a TV set-top box) that is shared between multiple users and thus user

1888 may be a user that is authorized to access device 840. Device 830 may be a client device such as a smartphone of another user (e.g., user 804). User 1888 may not be authorized to access device 830. In some examples, user 1888 may provide a speech input

1889 such as "Play the video Bill Took last Sunday on his phone." The digital assistant operating on device 840 may identify, based on the capability data of devices

communicatively coupled to device 840, device 830 for providing at least a portion of a response to the user request. In some embodiments, before accessing device 830 to perform a step for responding to the user request, the digital assistant operating on device 840 can obtain the identity of user 1888. In some examples, obtaining the identity of user 1888 can be based on a voice profile. A voice profile may include voice biometrics, such as the user's voice characteristics (e.g., acoustic patterns, voiceprints, the user's accent, or the like). A voice profile can be associated with a particular user and uniquely identifies the user. For example, a voice profile of user 1888 can include voice characteristics of user 1888 and thus uniquely identify user 1888. In some examples, a voice profile can also assistant the natural language processing described above to more accurately determine the user intent. For example, the speech-to-text conversion process may be more accurately performed using a voice profile that includes the user's accent data.

[0345] With reference to FIG. 18E, the digital assistant operating on device 840 can compare the voice characteristics in speech input 1889 with one or more voice profiles of one or more authorized users of device 830. Based on the comparison, the digital assistant operating on device 840 may determine that voice characteristics in speech input 1889 does not match any of the voice profile for authorized user of device 830. As a result, the digital assistant operating on device 840 can determine that user 1888 is not authorized to access device 830, and thus not authorized to access the video stored in device 830.

9. Process for providing digital assistant services using multiple devices.

[0346] FIGs. 19A-19D illustrates process 1900 for operating a digital assistant for providing digital assistant services based on notifications of events, according to various examples. Process 1900 is performed, for example, using one or more electronic devices implementing a digital assistant. In some examples, process 1900 is performed using a client-server system (e.g., system 100), and the blocks of process 1900 are divided up in any manner between the server (e.g., DA server 106) and a client device. In other examples, the blocks of process 1900 are divided up between the server and multiple client devices (e.g., a mobile phone and a smart watch). Thus, while portions of process 1900 are described herein as being performed by particular devices of a client-server system, it will be appreciated that process 1900 is not so limited. In other examples, process 1900 is performed using only a client device (e.g., user device 104, device 1880) or only multiple client devices. In process 1900, some blocks are, optionally, combined, the order of some blocks is, optionally, changed, and some blocks are, optionally, omitted. In some examples, additional steps may be performed in combination with the process 1900.

[0347] With reference to FIG. 19A, at block 1902, a first speech input representing a user request is received from a first user. At block 1904, prior to obtaining capability data associated with the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device, a connection is established between the first electronic device and the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. In some examples, the first electronic device and the electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device are disposed within a predetermined boundary (e.g., a house). In some examples, establishing the connection is based on a near-field communication between the first electronic device and the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. In some examples, establishing the connection is based on detecting of the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device being within a predetermined distance from the first electronic device. In some examples, establishing the connection is based on one or more previous established connections between the first electronic device and the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device.

[0348] At block 1906, prior to obtaining capability data associated with the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device, the first user is inquired regarding accessing, by the first electronic device, the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. At block 1908, a third speech input is received from the first user. The third speech input may indicate whether the first electronic device is authorized to access other devices. At block 1910, in response to receiving the third speech input, it is determined whether the first electronic device is authorized to access the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device.

[0349] At block 1912, it is provided one or more duration options for accessing the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. The duration options may include, for example, allow once, allow while both devices are at home, always allow, not allow. At block 1914, a selection of a duration option is received from the first user. At block 1916, the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device are accessed based on the selected duration option.

[0350] With reference to FIG. 19B, at block 1918, it is obtained capability data associated with one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. At block 1920, to obtain capability data, it is obtained device capabilities associated with the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. At block 1922, the device capabilities include one or more physical attributes associated with the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device. At block 1924, the device capabilities include data that are capable of being provided by the one of more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device.

[0351] At block 1926, in accordance with the capability data, it is identified, from the one or more electronic devices capable of being communicatively coupled to the first electronic device, a second electronic device for providing at least a portion of a response to the user request. At block 1928, to identify the second electronic device, one or more steps for responding to the user request are obtained based on the first speech input. In some examples, at block 1930, to obtain the one or more steps, a plan for responding to the user request is received from a third electronic device (e.g., a server) remotely located from the first electronic device. In some examples, at block 1932, a plan for responding to the user request is determined by the first electronic device (e.g., a client device such as a wearable device), wherein the plan comprising one or more steps for responding to the user request.

[0352] At block 1934, it is identified, based on the capability data, the second electronic device (e.g., device 840 such as a TV set-top box) for performing at least one step for responding to the user request. At block 1936, it is identified, based on the capability data, one or more additional electronic devices for performing the remaining steps for responding the user request.

[0353] With reference to FIG. 19C, at block 1938, a first speech output is provided to the first user regarding providing at least a portion of the response by the second electronic device. For example, the first speech output may be a speech out requesting authorization to access the second electronic device. At block 1940, for providing the first speech output, one or more steps for responding to the user request are annotated. For example, some steps may be annotated as state-altering steps and thus may require authorization; and some steps may not be annotated and thus may not require authorization. At block 1942, the first speech output is provided to the first user based on the annotation of one or more steps.

[0354] At block 1944, a second speech input is received from the first user. The second speech input may indicate whether the first user authorizes accessing certain devices. At block 1946, in response to receiving the second speech input, it is determined whether at least a portion of the response is to be provided by the second electronic device.

[0355] At block 1948, in some examples, prior to causing the second electronic device to provide at least a portion of the response to the first user, an identity of the first user is obtained. At block 1950, the identity is obtained based on a voice profile. At block 1952, it is determined, based on the identity of the first user, whether the first user is authorized to receive at least a portion of the response to the user request.

[0356] With reference to FIG. 19D, at block 1954, the second electronic device is caused to provide at least a portion of the response to the user request. At block 1956, the second electronic device is caused to perform at least one step for responding to the user request. At block 1958, one or more additional electronic devices are caused to perform the remaining steps for responding to the user request.

[0357] The operations described above with reference to FIGs. 19A-19D are optionally implemented by components depicted in FIGs. 1-4, 6A-B, and 7A-C. For example, the operations of process 1900 may be implemented by digital assistant system 700. It would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes are implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1-4, 6A-B, and 7A-C. [0358] In accordance with some implementations, a computer-readable storage medium (e.g., a non-transitory computer readable storage medium) is provided, the computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods or processes described herein.

[0359] In accordance with some implementations, an electronic device (e.g., a portable electronic device) is provided that comprises means for performing any of the methods or processes described herein.

[0360] In accordance with some implementations, an electronic device (e.g., a portable electronic device) is provided that comprises a processing unit configured to perform any of the methods or processes described herein.

[0361] In accordance with some implementations, an electronic device (e.g., a portable electronic device) is provided that comprises one or more processors and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods or processes described herein.

[0362] The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the techniques and their practical applications. Others skilled in the art are thereby enabled to best utilize the techniques and various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.

[0363] Although the disclosure and examples have been fully described with reference to the accompanying drawings, it is to be noted that various changes and modifications will become apparent to those skilled in the art. Such changes and modifications are to be understood as being included within the scope of the disclosure and examples as defined by the claims.

[0364] As described above, one aspect of the present technology is the gathering and use of data available from various sources to obtain a user's identity. As described above, data for authenticating a user may include voice biometrics, facial recognition data, fingerprints, etc. The present disclosure contemplates that in some instances, this gathered data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specific person. As described above, informational capabilities of client devices may be obtained. The informational capabilities of client devices may include personal information data. Such personal information data can include personal identification data, demographic data, location-based data, telephone numbers, email addresses, home addresses, or any other identifying information.

[0365] The present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information data, in the present technology, can be used to the benefit of users. For example, the personal information data can be used to deliver targeted content that is of greater interest to the user. Accordingly, use of such personal information data enables calculated control of the delivered content. Further, other uses for personal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated by the present disclosure.

[0366] The present disclosure further contemplates that the entities responsible for the collection, analysis, disclosure, transfer, storage, or other use of such personal information data will comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices. In particular, such entities should implement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmental requirements for maintaining personal information data private and secure. For example, personal information from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses. Further, such collection should occur only after receiving the informed consent of the users. Additionally, such entities would take any needed steps for safeguarding and securing access to such personal information data and ensuring that others with access to the personal information data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures. Further, such entities can subject themselves to evaluation by third parties to certify their adherence to widely accepted privacy policies and practices.

[0367] Despite the foregoing, the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively block the use of, or access to, personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data. For example, in the case of advertisement delivery services, the present technology can be configured to allow users to select to "opt in" or "opt out" of participation in the collection of personal information data during registration for services. In another example, users can select not to provide location information for targeted content delivery services. In yet another example, users can select to not provide precise location information, but permit the transfer of location zone information.

[0368] Therefore, although the present disclosure broadly covers use of personal information data to implement one or more various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that the various embodiments can also be implemented without the need for accessing such personal information data. That is, the various embodiments of the present technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all or a portion of such personal information data. For example, content can be selected and delivered to users by inferring preferences based on non-personal information data or a bare minimum amount of personal information, such as the content being requested by the device associated with a user, other non-personal information available to the content delivery services, or publically available information.

APPENDIX

INTELLIGENT DIG1TIAL ASSISTANT IN A MULTI-TASKING ENVIRONMENT

CRO S S-REFERENCE TO REL ATED APPLICATIONS

[0001] This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/348,728, entitled "INTELLIGENT DIGITAL ASSISTANT IN A MULTI-TASKING ENVIRONMENT," filed on June 10, 2016, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety for all purposes.

FIELD

[0002] The present disclosure relates generally to a digital assistant and, more specifically, to a digital assistant that interacts with a user to perform a task in a multi -tasking environment.

BACKGROUND

[0003] Digital assistants are increasing popular. In a desktop or tablet environment, a user frequently multi-tasks including searching files or information, managing files or folders, playing movies or songs, editing documents, adjusting system configurations, sending emails, etc. It is often cumbersome and inconvenient for the user to manually perform multiple tasks in parallel and to frequently switch between tasks. It is thus desirable for a digital assistant to have the ability to assist the user to perform some of the tasks in a multi-tasking environment based on a user's voice input.

BRIEF SUMMARY

[0004] Some existing techniques for assisting the user to perform a task in a multi-tasking environment may include, for example, dictation. Typically, a user may be required to manually perform many other tasks in a multi-tasking environment. As an example, a user may have been working on a presentation yesterday on his or her desktop computer and may wish to continue to work on the presentation. The user is typically required to manually locate the presentation on his or her desktop computer, open the presentation, and continue the editing of the presentation. APPENDIX

[0005] As another example, a user may have been booking a flight on his or her smartphone when the user is away from his desktop computer. The user may wish to continue booking the flight when the desktop computer is available. In existing technologies, the user needs to launch a web browser and start over on the flight booking process at the user's desktop computer. In other words, the prior flight booking progress that the user made at the smartphone may not be continued at the user's desktop computer.

[0006] As another example, a user may be editing a document on his or her desktop computer and wish to change a system configuration such as changing the brightness level of the screen, turning on Bluetooth connections, or the like. In existing technologies, the user may need to stop editing the document, find and launch the brightness configuration application, and manually change the settings. In a multi-tasking environment, some existing technologies are incapable of performing tasks as described in the above examples based on a user's speech input. Providing a voice-enabled digital assistant in a multi-tasking environment is thus desired and advantageous.

[0007] Systems and processes for operating a digital assistant are provided. In accordance with one or more examples, a method includes, at a user device with one or more processors and memory, receiving a first speech input from a user. The method further includes identifying context information associated with the user device and determining a user intent based on the first speech input and the context information. The method further includes determining whether the user intent is to perform a task using a searching process or an object managing process. The searching process is configured to search data stored internally or externally to the user device, and the object managing process is configured to manage objects associated with the user device. The method further includes, in accordance with a determination that the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process, performing the task using the searching process. The method further includes, in accordance with the determination that the user intent is to perform the task using the object managing process, performing the task using the object managing process.

[0008] In accordance with one or more examples, a method includes, at a user device with one or more processors and memory, receiving a speech input from a user to perform a task. The APPENDIX method further includes identifying context information associated with the user device and determining a user intent based on the speech input and context information associated with the user device. The method further includes, in accordance with user intent, determining whether the task is to be performed at the user device or at a first electronic device communicatively connected to the user device. The method further includes, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the user device and content for performing the task is located remotely, receiving the content for performing the task. The method further includes, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the first electronic device and the content for performing the task is located remotely to the first electronic device, providing the content for performing the task to the first electronic device.

[0009] In accordance with one or more examples, a method includes, at a user device wit one or more processors and memory, receiving a speech input from a user to manage one or more system configurations of the user device. The user device is configured to concurrently provide a plurality of user interfaces. The method further includes identifying context

information associated with the user device and determining a user intent based on the speech input and context information. The method further includes determining whether the user intent indicates an informational request or a request for performing a task. The method further includes, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates an informational request, providing a spoken response to the informational request. The method further includes, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates a request for performing a task, instantiating a process associated with the user device to perform the task.

[0010] Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. APPENDIX

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0011] For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Detailed Description below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures.

[0012] FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating a system and environment for implementing a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0013] FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant in accordance with some embodiments.

[0014] FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling according to various examples.

[0015] FIG. 3 illustrates a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0016] FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface according to various examples.

[0017] FIG. 5A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device according to various examples.

[0018] FIG. 5B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display according to various examples.

[0019] FIG. 6A illustrates a personal electronic device according to various examples.

[0020] FIG. 6B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device according to various examples.

[0021] FIG. 7A is a block diagram illustrating a digital assistant system or a server portion thereof according to various examples. APPENDIX

[0022] FIG. 7B illustrates the functions of the digital assistant shown in FIG. 7A according to various examples.

[0023J FIG. 7C illustrates a portion of an ontology according to various examples.

[0024] FIGs. 8A-8F illustrate functionalities of performing a task using a search process or an object managing process by a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0025] FIGs. 9A-9H illustrate functionalities of performing a task using a search process by a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0026] FIGs. 10A-10B illustrate functionalities of performing a task using an object managing process by a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0027] FIGs.l 1 A- 1 I D illustrate functionalities of performing a task using a search process by a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0028] FIGs. 12.A-12D illustrate functionalities of performing a task using a search process or an object managing process by a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0029] FIGs. 13.A-13C illustrate functionalities of performing a task using an object managing process by a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0030] FIGs. 14A-14D illustrate functionalities of performing a task at a user device using remotely located content by a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0031] FIGs. 15A-15D illustrate functionalities of performing a task at a first electronic device using remotely located content by a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0032] FIGs. 16A-16C illustrate functionalities of performing a task at a first electronic device using remotely located content by a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0033] FIGs. 17A-17E illustrate functionalities of performing a task at a user device using remotely located content by a digital assistant according to various examples. APP Έ! Ι SSJOi IX

[0034] FIGs. 18A-18F illustrate functionalities of providing system configuration information in response to an informational request of the user by a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0035] FIGs. 19A- 19D illustrate functionalities of performing a task in response to a user request by a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0036] FIGs. 20A-20G illustrate a flow diagram of an exemplary process for operating a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0037] FIGs. 21 A-21E illustrate a flow diagram of an exemplary process for operating a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0038] FIGs. 22A-22D illustrate a flow diagram of an exemplary process for operating a digital assistant according to various examples.

[0039] FIG. 23 illustrates a block diagram of an electronic device according to various examples.

Detail ed Descr iption

[0040] In the following description of the disclosure and embodiments, reference is made to the accompanying drawings, in which it is shown by way of illustration, of specific embodiments that can be practiced. It is to be understood that other embodiments and examples can be practiced and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the disclosure.

[0041] Techniques for providing a digital assistant in a multi-tasking environment are desirable. As described herein, techniques for providing a digital assistant in a multi-tasking environment are desired for various purposes such as reducing the cumbersomeness of searching objects or information, enabling efficient object management, maintaining continuity between tasks performed at the user device and at another electronic device, and reducing the user's manual effort in adjusting system configurations. Such techniques are advantageous by allowing the user to operate a digital assistant to perform various tasks using speech inputs in a multitasking environment. Further, such techniques alleviate the cumbersomeness or inconvenience APPENDIX associated with performing various tasks in a multi-tasking environment. Furthermore, by allowing the user to perform tasks using speech, they are able to keep both hands on the keyboard or mouse while performing tasking that would require a context switch - effectively, allowing the digital assistant to perform tasks as if a "third-hand" of the user. As will be appreciated, by allowing the user to perform tasks using speech it allows the user to more efficiently complete tasks that may require multiple interactions with multiple applications. For example, searching for images and sending them to an individual in an email may require opening a search interface, entering search terms, selecting one or more results, opening am email for composition, copying or moving the resulting files to the open email, addressing the email and sending it. Such a task can be completed more efficiently by voice with a command such as "find pictures from X date and send them to my wife". Similar requests for moving files, searching for information on the internet, composing messages can all be made more efficient using voice, while simultaneously allowing the user to perform other tasks using their hands.

[0042] Although the following description uses terms "first," "second," etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first storage could be termed a second storage, and, similarly, a second storage could be termed a first storage, without departing from the scope of the various described examples. The first storage and the second storage can both be storages and, in some cases, can be separate and different storages.

[0043] The terminology used in the description of the various described examples herein is for the purpose of describing particular examples only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described examples and the appended claims, the singular forms "a," "an," and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term "and/or" as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms "includes," "including," "comprises," and/or "comprising," when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. APPENDIX

[0044] The term "if may be construed to mean "when" or "upon" or "in response to determining" or "in response to detecting," depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase "if it is determined" or "if [a stated condition or event] is detected" may be construed to mean "upon determining" or "in response to determining" or "upon detecting [the stated condition or event]" or "in response to detecting [the stated condition or event]," depending on the context.

1. System and Environment

[0045] FIG. 1 illustrates a block diagram of system 100 according to various examples. In some examples, system 100 can implement a digital assistant. The terms "digital assistant," "virtual assistant," "intelligent automated assistant," or "automatic digital assistant" can refer to any information processing system that interprets natural language input in spoken and/or textual form to infer user intent, and performs actions based on the inferred user intent. For example, to act on an inferred user intent, the system can perform one or more of the following: identifying a task flow with steps and parameters designed to accomplish the inferred user intent, inputting specific requirements from the inferred user intent into the task flow; executing the task flow by invoking programs, methods, services, APIs, or the like; and generating output responses to the user in an audible (e.g., speech) and/or visual form.

[0046] Specifically, a digital assistant can be capable of accepting a user request at least partially in the form of a natural language command, request, statement, narrative, and/or inquiry. Typically, the user request can seek either an informational answer or performance of a task by the digital assistant. A satisfactory response to the user request can be a provision of the requested informational answer, a performance of the requested task, or a combination of the two. For example, a user can ask the digital assistant a question, such as "Where am I right now?" Based on the user's current location, the digital assistant can answer, "You are in Central Park near the west gate." The user can also request the performance of a task, for example, "Please invite my friends to my girlfriend's birthday party next week." In response, the digital assistant can acknowledge the request by saying "Yes, right away," and then send a suitable calendar invite on behalf of the user to each of the user' s friends listed in the user's electronic address book. During performance of a requested task, the digital assistant can sometimes interact with the user in a continuous dialogue involving multiple exchanges of information over APPENDIX an extended period of time. There are numerous other ways of interacting with a digital assistant to request information or performance of various tasks. In addition to providing verbal responses and taking programmed actions, the digital assistant can also provide responses in other visual or audio forms, e.g., as text, alerts, music, videos, animations, etc.

[0047] As shown in FIG. 1 , in some examples, a digital assistant can be implemented according to a client-server model. The digital assistant can include client-side portion 102 (hereafter "DA client 102") executed on user device 104 and server-side portion 106 (hereafter "DA server 106") executed on server system 108. DA client 102 can communicate with DA server 106 through one or more networks 1 10. DA client 102 can provide client- side

functionalities such as user-facing input and output processing and communication with DA server 106. D A server 106 can provide server-side functionalities for any number of DA clients 102 each residing on a respective user device 104.

[0048] In some examples, DA server 106 can include client-facing I/O interface 1 12, one or more processing modules 114, data and models 1 16, and I/O interface to external services 118. The client-facing I/O interface 112 can facilitate the client-facing input and output processing for DA server 106. One or more processing modules 1 14 can utilize data and models 116 to process speech input and determine the user's intent based on natural language input. Further, one or more processing modules 114 perform task execution based on inferred user intent. In some examples, D A server 106 can communicate with external services 120 through network(s) 110 for task completion or information acquisition. I/O interface to external services 1 18 can facilitate such communications.

[0049] User device 104 can be any suitable electronic device. For example, user devices can be a portable multifunctional device (e.g., device 200, described below with reference to

FIG. 2A), a multifunctional device (e.g., device 400, described below with reference to FIG. 4), or a personal electronic device (e.g., device 600, described below with reference to FIG. 6A-B). A portable multifunctional device can be, for example, a mobile telephone that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Specific examples of portable multifunction devices can include the iPhone®, iPod Touch©, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other examples of portable multifunction devices can include, APPENDIX without limitation, laptop or tablet computers. Further, in some examples, user device 104 can be a non-portable multifunctional device. In particular, user device 104 can be a desktop computer, a game console, a television, or a television set-top box. In some examples, user device 104 can operate in a multi-tasking environment. A multi-tasking environment allows a user to operate device 104 to perform multiple tasks in parallel. For example, a multi-tasking environment may be a desktop or laptop environment, in which device 104 may perform one task in response to the user input received from a physical user-interface device and, in parallel, perform another task in response to the user's voice input. In some examples, user device 104 can include a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads). Further, user device 104 can optionally include one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick. Various examples of electronic devices, such as multifunctional devices, are described below in greater detail.

[0050] Examples of communication network(s) 1 10 can include local area networks (LAN) and wide area networks (W AN), e.g., the Internet. Communication network(s) 1 10 can be implemented using any known network protocol, including various wired or wireless protocols, such as, for example, Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol.

[0051] Server system 108 can be implemented on one or more standalone data processing apparatus or a distributed network of computers. In some examples, server system 108 can also employ various virtual devices and/or services of third-party service providers (e.g., third-party cloud service providers) to provide the underlying computing resources and/or infrastructure resources of server system 108.

[0052] In some examples, user device 104 can communicate with DA server 106 via second user de vice 122. Second user device 122 can be similar or identical to user device 104. For example, second user device 122 can be similar to devices 200, 400, or 600 described below with reference to FIGs. 2A, 4, and 6A-B. User device 104 can be configured to communicatively couple to second user device 122 via a direct communication connection, such as Bluetooth, APPENDIX

NFC, BTLE, or the like, or via a wired or wireless network, such as a local Wi-Fi network. In some examples, second user device 122 can be configured to act as a proxy between user device 104 and DA server 106. For example, DA client 102 of user device 104 can be configured to transmit information (e.g., a user request received at user device 104) to DA server 106 via second user device 122. DA server 106 can process the information and return relevant data (e.g., data content responsive to the user request) to user device 104 via second user device 122.

[0053] In some examples, user device 104 can be configured to communicate abbreviated requests for data to second user device 122 to reduce the amount of information transmitted from user device 104. Second user device 122 can be configured to determine supplemental information to add to the abbreviated request to generate a complete request to transmit to DA server 106. This system architecture can advantageously allow user device 104 having limited communication capabilities and/or limited battery power (e.g., a watch or a similar compact electronic device) to access services provided by D A server 106 by using second user device 122, having greater communication capabilities and/or battery power (e.g., a mobile phone, laptop computer, tablet computer, or the like), as a proxy to DA server 106. While only two user devices 104 and 122 are shown in FIG. 1 , it should be appreciated that system 100 can include any number and type of user devices configured in this proxy configuration to communicate with DA server system 106.

[0054] Although the digital assistant shown in FIG. I can include both a client-side portion (e.g., DA client 102) and a server-side portion (e.g., DA server 106), in some examples, the functions of a digital assistant can be implemented as a standalone application installed on a user device. In addition, the divisions of functionalities between the client and server portions of the digital assistant can vary in different implementations. For instance, in some examples, the DA client can be a thin-client that provides only user-facing input and output processing functions, and delegates all other functionalities of the digital assistant to a backend server.

2. Electronic Devices

[0055] Attention is now directed toward embodiments of electronic devices for

implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 200 with touch-sensitive display system 212 in APPENDIX accordance with some embodiments. Touch- sensitive display 212 is sometimes called a "touch screen" for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a "touch-sensitive display system." Device 200 includes memory 202 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory controller 222, one or more processing units (CPUs) 220, peripherals interface 218, RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, input/output (I/O) subsystem 206, other input control devices 216, and external port 224. Device 200 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 264. Device 200 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 200 (e.g., a touch- sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200). Device 200 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs on device 200 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200 or touchpad 455 of device 400). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 203.

[0056] As used in the specification and claims, the term "intensity" of a contact on a touch- sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch- sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity APPENDIX threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch- sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button).

[0057] As used in the specification and claims, the term '"tactile output" refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user's sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user's hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a "down click" or "up click" of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an "down click" or "up click" even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as "roughness" of the touch- sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an "up click," a "down click," "roughness"), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical APPENDIX displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.

[0058] It should be appreciated that device 200 is only one example of a portable

multifunction device, and that device 200 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG. 2A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application-specific integrated circuits.

[0059] Memory 202 may include one or more computer-readable storage mediums. The computer-readable storage mediums may be tangible and non-transitory. Memory 202 may include high-speed random access memory and may also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non- volatile solid- state memory devices. Memory controller 222 may control access to memory 202 by other components of device 200.

[0060] In some examples, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of memory 202 can be used to store instructions (e.g., for performing aspects of process 1200, described below) for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processor-containing system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions. In other examples, the instructions (e.g., for performing aspects of process 1200, described below) can be stored on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium (not shown) of the server system 108 or can be divided between the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of memory 202 and the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of server system 108. In the context of this document, a "non-transitory computer-readable storage medium" can be any medium that can contain or store the program for use by or in connection with the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device.

[0061] Peripherals interface 218 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 220 and memory 202. The one or more processors 220 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 202 to perform various functions APPENDIX for device 200 and to process data. In some embodiments, peripherals interface 218, CPU 220, and memory controller 222 may be implemented on a single chip, such as chip 204. In some other embodiments, they may be implemented on separate chips.

[0062] RF (radio frequency) circuitry 208 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 208 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry 208 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (M AN), and other devices by wireless communication. The RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile

Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV- DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.1 1 a, IEEE 802.1 lb, IEEE 802.1 Ig, IEEE 802. l ln, and/or IEEE 802.1 lac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant

Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document. APPENDIX

[0063] Audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, and microphone 213 provide an audio interface between a user and device 200. Audio circuitry 210 receives audio data from peripherals interface 218, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 211. Speaker 211 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 210 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 213 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 210 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 218 for processing. Audio data may be retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 202 and/or RF circuitry 208 by peripherals interface 218. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 210 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 312, FIG. 3). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 210 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).

[0064] I/O subsystem 206 couples input/output peripherals on device 200, such as touch screen 212 and other input control devices 216, to peripherals interface 218. I/O subsystem 206 optionally includes display controller 256, optical sensor controller 258, intensity sensor controller 259, haptic feedback controller 261 , and one or more input controllers 260 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 260 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices 216. The other input control devices 216 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s) 260 are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 308, FIG. 3) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 21 1 and/or microphone 213. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 306, FIG. 3).

[0065] A quick press of the push button may disengage a lock of touch screen 212 or begin a process that uses gestures on the touc screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. Patent Application 11/322,549, "Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image," filed December 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No. 7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. A longer press of the push button (e.g., 306) may turn power to device 200 on or off. APPENDIX

The user may be able to customize a functionality of one or more of the buttons. Touch screen 212 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.

|0066] Touch-sensitive display 212 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller 256 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen 212. Touch screen 212 displays visual output to the user. The visual output may include graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed "graphics"). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output may correspond to user interface objects.

|0067J Touch screen 212 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accept input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 202) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen 212 and convert the detected contact into interaction with user interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen 212. In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch screen 212 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user.

|0068] Touch screen 212 may use LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light- emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light-emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies may be used in other embodiments. Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 may detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch-sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capaeitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 212. In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the i Phone© and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.

[0Θ69] A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 may be analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S. Patents;

6,323,846 (Westerman et a!.), 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and/or 6,677,932 (Westerman), and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by APPENDIX reference in its entirety. However, touch screen 212 displays visual output from device 200, whereas touch- sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.

| 0070] A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 may be as described in the following applications: (1) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/381 ,313, "Multipoint Touch Surface Controller," filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/840,862, "Multipoint Touchscreen," filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/903,964, "Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices," filed July 30, 2004; (4) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/048,264, "Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices," filed January 31, 2005; (5) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/038,590, "Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive Input Devices," filed January 18, 2005; (6) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,758, "Virtual Input Device Placement On A Touch Screen User Interface," filed September 16, 2005; (7) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,700, "Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface," filed September 16, 2005; (8) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,737, "Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen Virtual Keyboard," filed September 16, 2005; and (9) U.S. Patent

Application No. 1 1/367,749, "Mu!ti-Functional Hand-Held Device," filed March 3, 2006. All of these applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.

[0071] Touch screen 212 may have a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user may make contact with touch screen 212 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.

[0072] In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 200 may include a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad may be a touch -se sitive surface that is separate from touch screen 212 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen. APPENDIX

[0073] Device 200 also includes power system 262 for powering the various components. Power system 262 may include a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery or alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode) and any other components associated with the generation, management, and distribution of power in portable devices.

[0074] Device 200 may also include one or more optical sensors 264. FIG. 2A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 258 in I/O subsystem 206. Optical sensor 264 may include charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor 264 receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 243 (also called a camera module), optical sensor 264 may capture still images or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212 on the front of the device so that the touch screen display may be used as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the front of the device, so that the user's image may be obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display. In some embodiments, the position of optical sensor 264 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a single optical sensor 264 may be used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.

[0Θ75] Device 200 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265. FIG. 2A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 259 in I/O subsystem 206. Contact intensity sensor 265 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor 265 receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system APPENDIX

212). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200.

|0076] Device 200 may also include one or more proximity sensors 266. FIG. 2A shows proximity sensor 266 coupled to peripherals interface 218. Alternately, proximity sensor 266 may be coupled to input controller 260 in I/O subsystem 206. Proximity sensor 266 may perform as described in U.S. Patent Application Nos. 11/241,839, "'Proximity Detector In Handheld Device": 11/240,788, "Proximity Detector In Handheld Device"; 11/620,702, "Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output"; 11/586,862, "Automated

Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In Portable Devices"; and 11/638,251, "Methods And Systems For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals," which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 212 when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).

[0077] Device 200 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 267. FIG. 2A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 261 in I/O subsystem 206. Tactile output generator 267 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Contact intensity sensor 265 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 233 and generates tactile outputs on device 200 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 200. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch- sensitive surface (e.g., touch- ensitive display system 212) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 200) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 200). In some

embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200. APPENDIX

[0078] Device 200 may also include one or more accelerometers 268. FIG. 2A shows accelerometer 268 coupled to peripherals interface 218. Alternately, accelerometer 268 may be coupled to an input controller 260 in VO subsystem 206. Accelerometer 268 may perform as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, "Acceleratio -based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices," and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20060017692, "Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer," both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device 200 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 268, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 200.

[0079] In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 202 include operating system 226, communication module (or set of instructions) 228, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 230, graphics module (or set of instructions) 232, text input module (or set of instructions) 234, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 235, Digital Assistant Client Module 229, and applications (or sets of instructions) 236. Further, memory 202 can store data and models, such as user data and models 231.

Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 202 (FIG. 2A) or 470 (FIG. 4) stores device/global internal state 257, as shown in FIGS. 2A and 4. Device/global internal state 257 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views, or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display 212; sensor state, including information obtained from the device's various sensors and input control devices 216; and location information concerning the device's location and/or attitude.

[0080] Operating system 226 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS,

WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components. APPENDIX

[0081] Communication module 228 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 224 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 208 and/or external port 224. External port 224 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with, the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.

[0082] Contact/motion module 230 optionally detects contact with touch screen 212 (in conjunction with display controller 256) and other touch- sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module 230 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch- sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module 230 receives contact data from the touch -sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., "multitouch'Vmultiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 230 and display controller 256 detect contact on a touchpad.

[0083] In some embodiments, contact/motion module 230 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has "clicked" on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 200). For example, a mouse "click" threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined APPENDIX threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click

"intensity" parameter).

[0084] Contact/motion module 230 optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch- sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event.

[0085] Graphics module 232 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 212 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term "graphics" includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including, without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.

[0086] In some embodiments, graphics module 232 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 232 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 256.

[0087] Haptic feedback module 233 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 267 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 200 in response to user interactions with device 200. APPENDIX

|Ό088] Text input module 234, which may be a component of graphics module 232, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 237, email 240, IM 241, browser 247, and any other application that needs text input).

[0089] GPS module 235 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 238 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 243 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).

[0090] Digital assistant client module 229 can include various client-side digital assistant instructions to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant. For example, digital assistant client module 229 can be capable of accepting voice input (e.g., speech input), text input, touch input, and/or gestural input through various user interfaces (e.g., microphone 213, accelerometer(s) 268, touch- sensitive display system 212, optical sensor(s) 264, other input control devices 216, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200. Digital assistant client module 229 can also be capable of providing output in audio (e.g., speech output), visual, and/or tactile forms through various output interfaces (e.g., speaker 21 1, touch-sensitive display system 212, tactile output generator(s) 267, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200. For example, output can be provided as voice, sound, alerts, text messages, menus, graphics, videos, animations, vibrations, and/or combinations of two or more of the above. During operation, digital assistant client module 229 can communicate with DA server 106 using RF circuitry 208.

[0091] User data and models 231 can include various data associated with the user (e.g., user-specific vocabulary data, user preference data, user- specified name pronunciations, data from the user's electronic address book, to-do lists, shopping lists, etc.) to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant. Further, user data and models 231 can includes various models (e.g., speech recognition models, statistical language models, natural language processing models, ontology, task flow models, service models, etc.) for processing user input and determining user intent.

[0092] In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 can utilize the various sensors, subsystems, and peripheral devices of portable multifunction device 200 to gather additional information from the surrounding environment of the portable multifunction device 200 to APPENDIX establish a context associated with a user, the current user interaction, and/or the current user input. In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 can provide the contextual information or a subset thereof with the user input to DA server 106 to help infer the user's intent. In some examples, the digital assistant can also use the contextual information to determine how to prepare and deliver outputs to the user. Contextual information can be referred to as context data.

[0093] In some examples, the contextual information that accompanies the user input can include sensor information, e.g., lighting, ambient noise, ambient temperature, images or videos of the surrounding environment, etc. In some examples, the contextual information can also include the physical state of the device, e.g., device orientation, device location, device temperature, power level, speed, acceleration, motion patterns, cellular signals strength, etc. In some examples, information related to the software state of DA server 106, e.g., running processes, installed programs, past and present network activities, background services, error logs, resources usage, etc., and of portable multifunction device 200 can be provided to D A server 106 as contextual information associated with a user input.

[0094] In some examples, the digital assistant client module 229 can selectively provide information (e.g., user data 231) stored on the portable multifunction device 200 in response to requests from DA server 106. In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 can also elicit additional input from the user via a natural language dialogue or other user interfaces upon request by DA server 106. Digital assistant client module 229 can pass the additional input to D A server 106 to help DA server 106 in intent deduction and/or fulfillment of the user's intent expressed in the user request.

[0095] A more detailed description of a digital assistant is described below with reference to FIGs. 7A-C. It should be recognized that digital assistant client module 229 can include any number of the sub-modules of digital assistant module 726 described below.

[0096] Applications 236 may include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:

• Contacts module 237 (sometimes called an address book or contact list); APPENDIX

Telephone module 238;

Video conference module 239;

Email client module 240;

Instant messaging (IM) module 241 ;

Workout support module 242;

Camera module 243 for still and/or video images;

Image management module 244;

Video player module;

Music player module;

Browser module 247;

Calendar module 248;

Widget modules 249, which may include one or more of: weather widget 249- 1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249-4, dictionary widget 249- 5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets 249-6;

Widget creator module 250 for making user-created widgets 249-6;

Search module 251 ;

Video and music player module 252, which merges video player module and music player module;

Notes module 253;

Map module 254; and/or

Online video module 255. APPENDIX

|Ό097] Examples of other applications 236 that may be stored in memory 202 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.

|0098] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, contacts module 237 may be used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 292 of contacts module 237 in memory 202 or memory 470), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), email address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name;

categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers or email addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 238, video conference module 239, email 240, or IM 241; and so forth.

[0099] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, telephone module 238 may be used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module 237, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication may use any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies.

[0100] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, touch screen 212, display controller 256, optical sensor 264, optical sensor controller 258, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, contacts module 237, and telephone module 238, video conference module 239 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.

[0101] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, email client APPENDIX module 240 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage email in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module 244, email client module 240 makes it very easy to create and send emails with still or video images taken with camera module 243.

[0102] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, instant messaging module 241 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages may include graphics, photos, audio files, video files, and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, "instant messaging" refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).

[0103] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, GPS module 235, map module 254, and music player module, workout support module 242 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals);

communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data.

[0104] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, optical sensor(s) 264, optical sensor controller 258, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and image management module 244, camera module 243 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 202, modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory 202. APPENDIX

[0105] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and camera module 243, image management module 244 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.

[0106] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, browser module 247 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.

[0107] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, email client module 240, and browser module 247, calendar module 248 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to- do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.

[0108] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and browser module 247, widget modules 249 are mini-applications that may be downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 249-1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249-4, and dictionary widget 249-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 249-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML

(Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).

[0109] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and browser module 247, the widget creator module 250 may be used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user- specified portion of a web page into a widget). APPENDIX

[0110] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, search module 251 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 202 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.

[0111] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211 , RF circuitry 208, and browser module 247, video and music player module 252 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen 212 or on an external, connected display via external port 224). In some embodiments, device 200 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).

[0112] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, notes module 253 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.

[0113] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, GPS module 235, and browser module 247, map module 254 may be used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user

instructions.

[0114] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, audio circuitry 210, speaker 21 1 , RF circuitry 208, text input module 234, email client module 240, and browser module 247, online video module 255 includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port 224), send an email with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one APPENDIX or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 241, rather than email client module 240, is used to send a link to a particular online video.

Additional description of the online video application can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/936,562, "Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User

Interface for Playing Online Videos," filed June 20, 2007, and U.S. Patent Application No. 1 1/968,067, "Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos," filed December 31, 2007, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by- reference in their entirety.

[0115] Each of the above-identified modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules may be combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. For example, video player module may be combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 252, FIG. 2A). In some embodiments, memory 202 may store a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 202 may store additional modules and data structures not described above.

[0116] In some embodiments, device 200 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 200, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 200 may be reduced.

[0117] The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device 200 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 200. In such embodiments, a "menu button" is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad. APPENDIX

[0118] FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 202 (FIG. 2A) or 470 (FIG. 4) includes event sorter 270 (e.g., in operating system 226) and a respective application 236- 1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 237-251, 255, 480-490).

[0119] Event sorter 270 receives event information and determines the application 236-1 and application view 291 of application 236- 1 to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter 270 includes event monitor 271 and event dispatcher module 274. In some embodiments, application 236- 1 includes application internal state 292, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 212 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 257 is used by event sorter 270 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 292 is used by event sorter 270 to determine application views 291 to which to deliver event information.

[0120] In some embodiments, application internal state 292 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 236- 1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 236-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 236-1 , and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.

[0121] Event monitor 271 receives event information from peripherals interface 218. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display 212, as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 218 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 206 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 266, accelerometer(s) 268, and/or microphone 213 (through audio circuitry 210). Information that peripherals interface 218 receives from I/O subsystem 206 includes information from touch-sensitive display 212 or a touch-sensitive surface.

[0122] In some embodiments, event monitor 271 sends requests to the peripherals interface 218 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration). APPENDIX

[0123] In some embodiments, event sorter 270 also includes a hit view determination module 272 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 273.

[0124] Hit view determination module 272 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive display 212 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.

[0125] Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected may correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected may be called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs may be determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.

[0126] Hit view determination module 272 receives information related to sub events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 272 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module 272, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.

[0127] Active event recognizer determination module 273 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some

embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch APPENDIX sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.

[0128] Event dispatcher module 274 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 280). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 273, event dispatcher module 274 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 273. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 274 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 282.

[0129] In some embodiments, operating system 226 includes event sorter 270. Alternatively, application 236- 1 includes event sorter 270. In yet other embodiments, event sorter 270 is a stand-alone module or a part of another module stored in memory 202, such as contact/motion module 230.

[0130] In some embodiments, application 236- 1 includes a plurality of event handlers 290 and one or more application views 291, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application's user interface. Each application view 291 of the application 236-1 includes one or more event recognizers 280. Typically, a respective application view 291 includes a plurality of event recognizers 280. In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 280 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 236- 1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler 290 includes one or more of: data updater 276, object updater 277, GUI updater 278, and/or event data 279 received from event sorter 270. Event handler 290 may utilize or call data updater 276, object updater 277, or GUI updater 278 to update the application internal state 292. Alternatively, one or more of the application views 291 include one or more respective event handlers 290. Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a respective application view 291.

[0131] A respective event recognizer 280 receives event information (e.g., event data 279) from event sorter 270 and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer 280 includes event receiver 282 and event comparator 284. In some embodiments, event recognizer APPENDIX

280 also includes at least a subset of; metadata 283 and event delivery instructions 288 (which may include sub-event delivery instructions).

[0132] Event receiver 282 receives event information from event sorter 270. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information may also include speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.

[0133] Event comparator 284 compares the event information to predefined event or sub- event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 284 includes event definitions 286. Event definitions 286 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (287-1 ), event 2 (287-2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event (287) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event 1 (287-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (287-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch- sensiti e display 212, and liftoff of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 290.

[0134] In some embodiments, event definition 287 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an APPENDIX application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 212, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 212, event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub- event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 290, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 290 should be activated. For example, event comparator 284 selects an event handler associated with the sub- event and the object triggering the hit test.

[0135] In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event (287) also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer's event type.

[0136] When a respective event recognizer 280 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 286, the respective event recognizer 280 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub- events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.

[0137] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 includes metadata 283 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers may interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub- events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.

[0138] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 activates event handler 290 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 290. Activating an event handler 290 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer APPENDIX

280 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 290 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.

[0139] In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 288 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.

[0140] In some embodiments, data updater 276 creates and updates data used in application 236- 1. For example, data updater 276 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 237, or stores a video file used in video player module. In some embodiments, object updater 277 creates and updates objects used in application 236- 1. For example, object updater 277 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater 278 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 278 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 232 for display on a touch-sensitive display.

[0141] In some embodiments, event handler(s) 290 includes or has access to data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278. In some embodiments, data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a single module of a respective application 236- 1 or application view 291. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.

[0142] It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 200 with input devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc. on touchpads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye

movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized. APPENDIX

[0143] FIG. 3 illustrates a portable multifunction device 200 having a touch screen 212 in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 300. In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 302 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 303 (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward, and/or downward), and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward, and/or downward) that has made contact with device 200. In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.

[0144] Device 200 may also include one or more physical buttons, such as "'home" or menu button 304. As described previously, menu button 304 may be used to navigate to any application 236 in a set of applications that may be executed on device 200. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 212.

[0145] In one embodiment, device 200 includes touch screen 212, menu button 304, push button 306 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 308, subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 310, headset jack 312, and docking/charging external port 224. Push button 306 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In an alternative embodiment, device 200 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 213. Device 200 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen 212 and/or one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 200. APPENDIX

|Ό146] FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch- sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device 400 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 400 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child's learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 400 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 410, one or more network or other communications interfaces 460, memory 470, and one or more communication buses 420 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 420 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device 400 includes input/output (I/O) interface 430 comprising display 440, which is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface 430 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 450 and touchpad 455, tactile output generator 457 for generating tactile outputs on device 400 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 267 described above with reference to FIG. 2A), sensors 459 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch- sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 265 described above with reference to FIG. 2A). Memory 470 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 470 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 410. In some embodiments, memory 470 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 470 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200. For example, memory 470 of device 400 optionally stores drawing module 480, presentation module 482, word processing module 484, website creation module 486, disk authoring module 488, and/or spreadsheet module 490, while memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2 A) optionally does not store these modules.

[0147] Each of the above-identified elements in FIG. 4 may be stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above-identified modules or APPENDIX programs (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules may be combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 470 may store a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 470 may store additional modules and data structures not described above.

[0148] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces that may be implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 200.

[0149] FIG. 5A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 200 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces may be implemented on device 400. In some embodiments, user interface 500 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof;

[0150] Signal strength indicator(s) 502 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;

• Time 504;

• Bluetooth indicator 505;

• Battery status indicator 506;

• Tray 508 with icons for frequently used applications, such as: o Icon 516 for telephone module 238, labeled "Phone," which optionally includes an indicator 514 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; o Icon 518 for email client module 240, labeled "Mail," which optionally includes an indicator 510 of the number of unread emails; o Icon 520 for browser module 247, labeled "Browser;" and o Icon 522 for video and music player module 252, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 252, labeled "iPod;" and APPENDIX

• Icons for other applications, such as; o Icon 524 for IM module 241, labeled "Messages;" o Icon 526 for calendar module 248, labeled "Calendar;" o Icon 528 for image management module 244, labeled "Photos;" o Icon 530 for camera module 243, labeled "Camera;" o Icon 532 for online video module 255, labeled "Online Video;" o Icon 534 for stocks widget 249-2, labeled "Stocks;" o Icon 536 for map module 254, labeled "Maps;" o Icon 538 for weather widget 249-1 , labeled "Weather;" o Icon 540 for alarm clock wideet 249-4, labeled "Clock;" o Icon 542 for workout support module 242, labeled "Workout Support;" o Icon 544 for notes module 253, labeled "Notes;" and o Icon 546 for a settings application or module, labeled "Settings," which provides access to settings for device 200 and its various applications 236.

[0151] It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG. 5A are merely exemplary. For example, icon 522 for video and music player module 252 may optionally be labeled "Music" or "Music Player." Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.

[0152] FIG. 5B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 400, FIG. 4) with a touch-sensitive surface 551 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 455, FIG. 4) that is separate from APPENDIX the display 550 (e.g., touch screen display 212). Device 400 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 457) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 551 and/or one or more tactile output generators 459 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 400.

[0153] Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 212 (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 5B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 551 in FIG. 5B) has a primary axis (e.g., 552 in FIG. 5B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 553 in FIG. 5B) on the display (e.g., 550). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 560 and 562 in FIG. 5B) with the touch- sensitive surface 551 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in FIG. 5B, 560 corresponds to 568 and 562 corresponds to 570). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 560 and 562, and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 551 in FIG. 5B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g., 550 in FIG. 5B) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein.

[0154] Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, and/or finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously. APPENDIX

[0155] FIG. 6A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 600. Device 600 includes body 602. In some embodiments, device 600 can include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 200 and 400 (e.g., FIGS. 2A-4B). In some embodiments, device 600 has touch-sensitive display screen 604, hereafter touch screen 604. Alternatively, or in addition to touch screen 604, device 600 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As with devices 200 and 400, in some embodiments, touch screen 604 (or the touch-sensitive surface) may have one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied. The one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 604 (or the touch-sensitive surface) can provide output data that represents the intensity of touches. The user interface of device 600 can respond to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 600.

[0156] Techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity may be found, for example, in related applications: International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/040061, titled "Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects

Corresponding to an Application," filed May 8, 2013, and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/069483, titled "Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for

Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships," filed November 11, 2013, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

[0157] In some embodiments, device 600 has one or more input mechanisms 606 and 608. Input mechanisms 606 and 608, if included, can be physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms. In some embodiments, device 600 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device 600 with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms may permit device 600 to be worn by a user.

[0158] FIG. 6B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 600. In some embodiments, device 600 can include some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS. 2A, 2B, and 4. Device 600 has bus 612 that operative! y couples I/O section 614 with one or more computer processors 616 and memory 618. I/O section 614 can be connected to display 604, APPENDIX which can have touch-sensitive component 622 and, optionally, touch-intensity sensitive component 624. In addition, VO section 614 can be connected with communication unit 630 for receiving application and operating system data using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field

communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques. Device 600 can include input mechanisms 606 and/or 608. Input mechanism 606 may be a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example. Input mechanism 608 may be a button, in some examples.

[0159] Input mechanism 608 may be a microphone, in some examples. Personal electronic device 600 can include various sensors, such as GPS sensor 632, accelerometer 634, directional sensor 640 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 636, motion sensor 638, and/or a combination thereof, all of which can be operatively connected to I/O section 614.

[0160] Memory 618 of personal electronic device 600 can be a non-transitory computer- readable storage medium, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 616, for example, can cause the computer processors to perform the techniques described below, including process 1200 (FIGs. 12A-D). The computer- executable instructions can also be stored and/or transported within any non-transitory computer- readable storage medium for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processor-containing system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions. Personal electronic device 600 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 6B, but can include other or additional components in multiple

configurations.

[0161] As used here, the term "affordance" refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that may be displayed on the display screen of devices 200, 400, and/or 600 (FIGS. 2, 4, and 6). For example, an image (e.g., icon), a button, and text (e.g., link) may each constitute an affordance.

[0162] As used herein, the term "focus selector" refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a "'focus selector" so that when an APPENDIX input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 455 in FIG. 4 or touch-sensitive surface 551 in FIG. 5B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212 in FIG. 2A or touch screen 212 in FIG. 5 A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a "focus selector" so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device). j0163J As used in the specification and claims, the term "characteristic intensity" of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The

characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 , 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, APPENDIX and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds may include a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.

[0164] In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface may receive a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location, at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location may be based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm may be applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow APPENDIX spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity, j0165J The intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface may be characterized relative to one or more intensity thresholds, such as a contact-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more other intensity thresholds. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch -sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold.

Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.

[0166] An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a "light press" input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a "deep press" input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact- detection intensity threshold to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact- detection intensity threshold to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is greater than zero. APPENDIX

|Ό167] In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some

embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., a '"down stroke" of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., an "up stroke" of the respective press input).

[0168] In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs, sometimes termed "jitter," where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an "up stroke" of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances). APPENDIX

|Ό169] For ease of explanation, the descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting either: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity

threshold, and/or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold.

3. Digital Assistant System

[0170] FIG. 7 A illustrates a block diagram of digital assistant system 700 in accordance with various examples. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 can be implemented on a standalone computer system. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 can be distributed across multiple computers. In some examples, some of the modules and functions of the digital assistant can be divided into a server portion and a client portion, where the client portion resides on one or more user devices (e.g., devices 104, 122, 200, 400, or 600) and communicates with the server portion (e.g., server system 108) through one or more networks, e.g., as shown in FIG. 1. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 can be an implementation of server system 108 (and/or DA server 106) shown in FIG. I. It should be noted that digital assistant system 700 is only one example of a digital assistant system, and that digital assistant system 700 can have more or fewer components than shown, may combine two or more components, or may have a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG. 7A can be implemented in hardware, software instructions for execution by one or more processors, firmware, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits, or a combination thereof. APPENDIX

|Ό171] Digital assistant system 700 can include memory 702, one or more processors 704, input/output (I/O) interface 706, and network communications interface 708. These components can communicate with one another over one or more communication buses or signal lines 710.

[0172] In some examples, memory 702 can include a non-transitory computer -readable medium, such as high-speed random access memory and/or a non-volatile computer -readable storage medium (e.g., one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices).

[0173] In some examples, I/O interface 706 can couple input/output devices 716 of digital assistant system 700, such as displays, keyboards, touch screens, and microphones, to user interface module 722. I/O interface 706, in conjunction with user interface module 722, can receive user inputs (e.g., voice input, keyboard inputs, touch inputs, etc.) and process them accordingly. In some examples, e.g., when the digital assistant is implemented on a standalone user device, digital assistant system 700 can include any of the components and I O

communication interfaces described with respect to devices 200, 400, or 600 in FIGs. 2A, 4, 6A- B, respectively. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 can represent the server portion of a digital assistant implementation, and can interact with the user through a client-side portion residing on a user device (e.g., devices 104, 200, 400, or 600).

[0174] In some examples, the network communications interface 708 can include wired communication port(s) 712 and/or wireless transmission and reception circuitry 714. The wired communication port(s) 712 can receive and send communication signals via one or more wired interfaces, e.g., Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc. The wireless circuitry 714 can receive and send RF signals and/or optical signals from/to communications networks and other communications devices. The wireless communications can use any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, such as GSM, EDGE, CDMA, TDMA, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, VoIP, Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol. Network communications interface 708 can enable communication between digital assistant system 700 with networks, such as the Internet, an intranet, and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN), and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices. APPENDIX

[0175] In some examples, memory 702, or the computer-readable storage media of memory 702, can store programs, modules, instructions, and data structures including all or a subset of: operating system 718, communications module 720, user interface module 722, one or more applications 724, and digital assistant module 726. In particular, memory 702, or the computer- readable storage media of memory 702, can store instructions for performing process 1200, described below. One or more processors 704 can execute these programs, modules, and instructions, and read/write from/to the data structures.

[0176] Operating system 718 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, iOS, OS X,

WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) can include various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communications between various hardware, firmware, and software components.

[0177] Communications module 720 can facilitate communications between digital assistant system 700 with other devices over network communications interface 708. For example, communications module 720 can communicate with RF circuitry 208 of electronic devices such as devices 200, 400, and 600 shown in FIGs. 2A, 4, 6A-B, respectively. Communications module 720 can also include various components for handling data received by wireless circuitry 714 and/or wired communications port 712.

[0178] User interface module 722 can receive commands and/or inputs from a user via I/O interface 706 (e.g., from a keyboard, touch screen, pointing device, controller, and/or microphone), and generate user interface objects on a display. User interface module 722 can also prepare and deliver outputs (e.g. , speech, sound, animation, text, icons, vibrations, haptic feedback, light, etc.) to the user via the I/O interface 706 (e.g., through displays, audio channels, speakers, touch-pads, etc.).

[0179] Applications 724 can include programs and/or modules that are configured to be executed by one or more processors 704. For example, if the digital assistant system is implemented on a standalone user device, applications 724 can include user applications, such as games, a calendar application, a navigation application, or an email application. If digital APPENDIX assistant system 700 is implemented on a server, applications 724 can include resource management applications, diagnostic applications, or scheduling applications, for example.

[0180] Memory 702 can also store digital assistant module 726 (or the server portion of a digital assistant). In some examples, digital assistant module 726 can include the following sub- modules, or a subset or superset thereof: input/output processing module 728, speech-to-text (SIT) processing module 730, natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738, and speech synthesis module 740. Each of these modules can have access to one or more of the following systems or data and models of the digital assistant module 726, or a subset or superset thereof: ontology 760, vocabulary index 744, user data 748, task flow models 754, service models 756, and ASR systems 731.

[0181] In some examples, using the processing modules, data, and models implemented in digital assistant module 726, the digital assistant can perform at least some of the following: converting speech input into text; identifying a user's intent expressed in a natural language input received from the user; actively eliciting and obtaining information needed to fully infer the user's intent (e.g., by disambiguating words, games, intentions, etc.); determining the task flow for fulfilling the inferred intent; and executing the task flow to fulfill the inferred intent.

[0182] In some examples, as shown in FIG. 7B, I O processing module 728 can interact with the user through I/O devices 716 in FIG. 7A or with a user device (e.g., devices 104, 200, 400, or 600) through network communications interface 708 in FIG. 7A to obtain user input (e.g., a speech input) and to provide responses (e.g., as speech outputs) to the user input. I/O processing module 728 can optionally obtain contextual information associated with the user input from the user device, along with or shortly after the receipt of the user input. The contextual information can include user-specific data, vocabulary, and/or preferences relevant to the user input. In some examples, the contextual information also includes software and hardware states of the user device at the time the user request is received, and/or information related to the surrounding environmen of the user at the time that the user request was received. In some examples, I/O processing module 728 can also send follow-up questions to, and receive answers from, the user regarding the user request. When a user request is received by I/O processing module 728 and APPENDIX the user request can include speech input, I/O processing module 728 can forward the speech input to STT processing module 730 (or a speech recognizer) for speech-to-text conversions.

[0183] STT processing module 730 can include one or more ASR systems. The one or more ASR systems can process the speech input that is received through I/O processing module 728 to produce a recognition result. Each ASR system can include a front-end speech pre-processor. The front-end speech pre-processor can extract representative features from the speech input. For example, the front-end speech pre-processor can perform a Fourier transform on the speech input to extract spectral features that characterize the speech input as a sequence of

representative multi-dimensional vectors. Further, each ASR system can include one or more speech recognition models (e.g., acoustic models and/or language models) and can implement one or more speech recognition engines. Examples of speech recognition models can include Hidden Markov Models, Gaussian-Mixture Models, Deep Neural Network Models, n-gram language models, and other statistical models. Examples of speech recognition engines can include the dynamic time warping based engines and weighted finite-state transducers (WFST) based engines. The one or more speech recognition models and the one or more speech recognition engines can be used to process the extracted representative features of the front-end speech pre-processor to produce intermediate recognitions results (e.g., phonemes, phonemic strings, and sub-words), and ultimately, text recognition results (e.g., words, word strings, or sequence of tokens). In some examples, the speech input can be processed at least partially by a third-party service or on the user ^' s device (e.g., device 104, 200, 400, or 600) to produce the recognition result. Once STT processing module 730 produces recognition results containing a text string (e.g., words, or sequence of words, or sequence of tokens), the recognition result can be passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction.

[0184] More details on the speech-to-text processing are described in U.S. Utility

Application Serial No. 13/236,942 for "Consolidating Speech Recognition Results," filed on September 20, 2011, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

[0185] In some examples, STT processing module 730 can include and/or access a vocabulary of recognizable words via phonetic alphabet conversion module 731. Each vocabulary word can be associated with one or more candidate pronunciations of the word APPENDIX represented in a speech recognition phonetic alphabet. In particular, the vocabulary of recognizable words can include a word that is associated with a plurality of candidate pronunciations. For example, the vocabulary may include the word "tomato" that is associated with the candidate pronunciations of /ts'meirou/ and /tg'matoo/. Further, vocabulary words can be associated with custom candidate pronunciations that are based on previous speech inputs from the user. Such custom candidate pronunciations can be stored in STT processing module 730 and ca be associated with a particular user via the user's profile on the device. In some examples, the candidate pronunciations for words can be determined based on the spelling of the word and one or more linguistic and/or phonetic rules. In some examples, the candidate pronunciations can be manually generated, e.g., based on known canonical pronunciations.

[0186] In some examples, the candidate pronunciations can be ranked based on the commonness of the candidate pronunciation. For example, the candidate pronunciation

/ta'meirou/ can be ranked higher than /ta'matou/, because the former is a more commonly used pronunciation (e.g., among all users, for users in a particular geographical region, or for any other appropriate subset of users). In some examples, candidate pronunciations can be ranked based on whether the candidate pronunciation is a custom candidate pronunciation associated with the user. For example, custom candidate pronunciations can be ranked higher than canonical candidate pronunciations. This can be useful for recognizing proper nouns having a unique pronunciation that deviates from canonical pronunciation. In some examples, candidate pronunciations can be associated with one or more speech characteristics, such as geographic origin, nationality, or ethnicity. For example, the candidate pronunciation /ta'meirou/ can be associated with the United States, whereas the candidate pronunciation /ts'matoo/ can be associated with Great Britain. Further, the rank of the candidate pronunciation can be based on one or more characteristics (e.g., geographic origin, nationality, ethnicity, etc.) of the user stored in the user's profile on the device. For example, it can be determined from the user ^' s profile that the user is associated with the United States. Based on the user being associated with the United States, the candidate pronunciation /ts'meirou/ (associated with the United States) can be ranked higher than the candidate pronunciation /ts'matou/ (associated with Great Britain). In some examples, one of the ranked candidate pronunciations can be selected as a predicted

pronunciation (e.g., the most likely pronunciation). APPENDIX

[0187] When a speech input is received, STT processing module 730 can be used to determine the phonemes corresponding to the speech input (e.g., using an acoustic model), and then attempt to determine words that match the phonemes (e.g., using a language model). For example, if STT processing module 730 can first identify the sequence of phonemes /ts'meirou/ corresponding to a portion of the speech input, it can then determine, based on vocabulary index 744, that this sequence corresponds to the word "tomato."

[0188] In some examples, STT processing module 730 can use approximate matching techniques to determine words in a voice input. Thus, for example, the STT processing module 730 can determine that the sequence of phonemes /ta'meirou/ corresponds to the word "tomato," even if that particular sequence of phonemes is not one of the candidate sequence of phonemes for that word.

[0189] Natural language processing module 732 ("natural language processor") of the digital assistant can take the sequence of words or tokens ("token sequence") generated by STT processing module 730 and attempt to associate the token sequence with one or more "actionable intents" recognized by the digital assistant. An "actionable intent" can represent a task that can be performed by the digital assistant and can have an associated task flow implemented in task flow models 754. The associated task flow can be a series of programmed actions and steps that the digital assistant takes in order to perform the task. The scope of a digital assistant's capabilities can be dependent on the number and variety of task flows that have been

implemented and stored in task flow models 754 or, in other words, on the number and variety of "actionable intents" that the digital assistant recognizes. The effectiveness of the digital assistant, however, can also be dependent on the assistant's ability to infer the correct "actionable intent(s)" from the user request expressed in natural language.

[0190] In some examples, in addition to the sequence of words or tokens obtained from STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732 can also receive contextual information associated with the user request, e.g., from I/O processing module 728. The natural language processing module 732 can optionally use the contextual information to clarify, supplement, and/or further define the information contained in the token sequence received from STT processing module 730. The contextual information can include, for example, user APPENDIX preferences, hardware and/or software states of the user device, sensor information collected before, during, or shortly after the user request, prior interactions (e.g., dialogue) between the digital assistant and the user, and the like. As described herein, contextual information can be dynamic, and can change with time, location, content of the dialogue, and other factors.

|0191] In some examples, the natural language processing can be based on, e.g., ontology 760. Ontology 760 can be a hierarchical structure containing many nodes, each node representing either an "actionable intent" or a "property" relevant to one or more of the

"actionable intents" or other "properties." As noted above, an "actionable intent" can represent a task that the digital assistant is capable of performing, i.e., it is "actionable" or can be acted on. A "property" ca represent a parameter associated with an actionable intent or a sub-aspect of another property. A linkage between an actionable intent node and a property node in ontology 760 can define how a parameter represented by the property node pertains to the task represented by the actionable intent node.

[0192] In some examples, ontology 760 can be made up of actionable intent nodes and property nodes. Within ontology 760, each actionable intent node can be linked to one or more property nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes. Similarly, each property node can be linked to one or more actionable intent nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes. For example, as shown in FIG. 7C, ontology 760 can include a "restaurant reservation" node (i.e., an actionable intent node). Property nodes "restaurant," "date/time" (for the reservation), and "party size" can each be directly linked to the actionable intent node (i.e., the "restaurant reservation" node).

[0193] In addition, property nodes "cuisine," "price range," "phone number," and "location" can be sub-nodes of the property node "restaurant," and can each be linked to the "restaurant reservation" node (i.e., the actionable intent node) through the intermediate property node "restaurant." For another example, as shown in FIG. 7C, ontology 760 can also include a "set reminder" node (i.e., another actionable intent node). Property nodes "date/time" (for setting the reminder) and "subject" (for the reminder) can each be linked to the "set reminder" node. Since the property "date/time" can be relevant to bot the task of making a restaurant reservation and APPENDIX the task of setting a reminder, the property node "date/time" can be linked to both the "restaurant reservation" node and the "set reminder" node in ontology 760. j0194J An actionable intent node, along with its linked concept nodes, can be described as a "domain." In the present discussion, each domain can be associated with a respective actionable intent and refers to the group of nodes (and the relationships there between) associated with the particular actionable intent. For example, ontology 760 shown in FIG. 7C can include an example of restaurant reservation domain 762 and an example of reminder domain 764 within ontology 760. The restaurant reservation domain includes the actionable intent node "restaurant reservation," property nodes "restaurant," "date/time," and "party size," and sub-property nodes "cuisine," "price range," "phone number," and "location." Reminder domain 764 can include the actionable intent node "set reminder," and property nodes "subject" and "date/time." In some examples, ontology 760 can be made up of many domains. Each domain can share one or more property nodes with one or more other domains. For example, the "date/time" property node can be associated with many different domains (e.g., a scheduling domain, a travel reservation domain, a movie ticket domain, etc.), in addition to restaurant reservation domain 762 and reminder domain 764.

[0195] While FIG. 7C illustrates two example domains within ontology 760, other domains can include, for example, "find a movie," "initiate a phone call," "find directions," "schedule a meeting," "send a message," and "provide an answer to a question," "read a list," "providing navigation instructions," "provide instructions for a task," and so on. A "send a message" domain can be associated with a "send a message" actionable intent node, and may further include property nodes such as "recipient(s)," "message type," and "message body." The property node "recipient" can be further defined, for example, by the sub-property nodes such as "recipient name" and "message address."

[0196] In some examples, ontology 760 can include all the domains (and hence actionable intents) that the digital assistant is capable of understanding and acting upon. In some examples, ontology 760 can be modified, such as by adding or removing entire domains or nodes, or by modifying relationships between the nodes within the ontology 760. APPENDIX

[0197] In some examples, nodes associated with multiple related actionable intents can be clustered under a "super domain" in ontology 760. For example, a "travel" super-domain can include a cluster of property nodes and actionable intent nodes related to travel. The actionable intent nodes related to travel can include "airline reservation," "hotel reservation," "car rental," "get directions," "find points of interest," and so on. The actionable intent nodes under the same super domain (e.g., the "travel" super domain) can have many property nodes in common. For example, the actionable intent nodes for "airline reservation," "hotel reservation," "car rental," "get directions," and "find points of interest" can share one or more of the property nodes "start location," "destination," "departure date/time," "arrival date/time," and "party size."

[0198] In some examples, each node in ontology 760 can be associated with a set of words and/or phrases that are relevant to the property or actionable intent represented by the node. The respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node can be the so-called

"vocabulary" associated with the node. The respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node can be stored in vocabulary index 744 in association with the property or actionable intent represented by the node. For example, returning to FIG. 7B, the vocabulary associated with the node for the property of "restaurant" can include words such as "food," "drinks," "cuisine," "hungry," "eat," "pizza," "fast food," "meal," and so on. For another example, the vocabulary associated with the node for the actionable intent of "initiate a phone call" can include words and phrases such as "call," "phone," "dial," "ring," "call this number," "make a call to," and so on. The vocabulary index 744 can optionally include words and phrases in different languages.

[0199] Natural language processing module 732 can receive the token sequence (e.g., a text siring) from STT processing module 730, and determine what nodes are implicated by the words in the token sequence. In some examples, if a word or phrase in the token sequence is found to be associated with one or more nodes in ontology 760 (via vocabulary index 744), the word or phrase can "trigger" or "activate" those nodes. Based on the quantity and/or relative importance of the activated nodes, natural language processing module 732 can select one of the actionable intents as the task that the user intended the digital assistant to perform. In some examples, the domain that has the most "triggered" nodes can be selected. In some examples, the domain having the highest confidence value (e.g., based on the relative importance of its various APPENDIX triggered nodes) can be selected. In some examples, the domain can be selected based on a combination of the number and the importance of the triggered nodes. In some examples, additional factors are considered in selecting the node as well, such as whether the digital assistant has previously correctly interpreted a similar request from a user. j020G] User data 748 can include user-specific information, such as user-specific vocabulary, user preferences, user address, user's default and secondary languages, user's contact list, and other short-term or long-term information for each user. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 can use the user-specific information to supplement the information contained in the user input to further define the user intent. For example, for a user request "invite my friends to my birthday party," natural language processing module 732 can be able to access user data 748 to determine who the "friends" are and when and where the "birthday party" would be held, rather than requiring the user to provide such information explicitly in his/her request.

[0201] Other details of searching an ontology based on a token string is described in U.S. Utility Application Serial No. 12/341,743 for "Method and Apparatus for Searching Using An Active Ontology," filed December 22, 2008, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

[0202] In some examples, once natural language processing module 732 identifies an actionable intent (or domain) based on the user request, natural language processing module 732 can generate a structured query to represent the identified actionable intent. In some examples, the structured query can include parameters for one or more nodes within the domain for the actionable intent, and at least some of the parameters are populated with the specific information and requirements specified in the user request. For example, the user may say "Make me a dinner reservation at a sushi place at 7." In this case, natural language processing module 732 can be able to correctly identify the actionable intent to be "restaurant reservation" based on the user input. According to the ontology, a structured query for a "restaurant reservation" domain may include parameters such as {Cuisine) , {Time}, {Date) , {Party Size}, and the like. In some examples, based on the speech input and the text derived from the speech input using STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732 can generate a partial structured APPENDIX query for the restaurant reservation domain, where the partial structured query includes the parameters {Cuisine = "Sushi" } and {Time = "7pm"} . However, in this example, the user's speech input contains insufficient information to complete the structured query associated with the domain. Therefore, other necessary parameters such as {Party Size} and {Date } may not be specified in the stmctured query based on the information currently available. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 can populate some parameters of the structured query with received contextual information. For example, in some examples, if the user requested a sushi restaurant "near me," natural language processing module 732 can populate a {location} parameter in the structured query with GPS coordinates from the user device.

[0203] In some examples, natural language processing module 732 can pass the generated structured query (including any completed parameters) to task flow processing module 736 ("task flow processor"). Task flow processing module 736 can be configured to receive the structured query from natural language processing module 732, complete the structured query, if necessary, and perform the actions required to "complete" the user's ultimate request. In some examples, the various procedures necessary to complete these tasks can be provided in task flow models 754. In some examples, task flow models 754 can include procedures for obtaining additional information from the user and task flows for performing actions associated with the actionable intent.

[0204] As described above, in order to complete a structured query, task flow processing module 736 may need to initiate additional dialogue with the user in order to obtain additional information, and/or disambiguate potentially ambiguous speech inputs. When such interactions are necessary, task flow processing module 736 can invoke dialogue flow processing module 734 to engage in a dialogue with the user. In some examples, dialogue flow processing module 734 can determine how (and/or when) to ask the user for the additional information and receive and processes the user responses. The questions can be provided to and answers can be received from the users through I/O processing module 728. In some examples, dialogue flow processing module 734 can present dialogue output to the user via audio and/or visual output, and receive input from the user via spoken or physical (e.g., clicking) responses. Continuing with the example above, when task flow processing module 736 invokes dialogue flow processing APPENDIX module 734 to determine the "party size" and "date" information for the structured query associated with the domain "restaurant reservation," dialogue flow processing module 734 can generate questions such as "For how many people?" and "On which day?" to pass to the user. Once answers are received from the user, dialogue flow processing module 734 can then populate the structured query with the missing information or pass the information to task flow processing module 736 to complete the missing information from the structured query.

[0205] Once task flow processing module 736 has completed the structured query for an actionable intent, task flow processing module 736 can proceed to perform the ultimate task associated with the actionable intent. Accordingly, task flow processing module 736 can execute the steps and instructions in the task flow model according to the specific parameters contained in the structured query. For example, the task flow model for the actionable intent of "restaurant reservation" can include steps and instructions for contacting a restaurant and actually requesting a reservation for a particular party size at a particular time. For example, using a structured query such as: {restaurant reservation, restaurant = ABC Cafe, date = 3/12/2012, time = 7pm, party size = 5}, task flow processing module 736 can perform the steps of: (1) logging onto a server of the ABC Cafe or a restaurant reservation system such as OPENTABLE®; (2) entering the date, time, and party size information in a form on the website; (3) submitting the form; and (4) making a calendar entry for the reservation in the user's calendar.

[0206] In some examples, task flow processing module 736 can employ the assistance of service processing module 738 ("service processing module") to complete a task requested in the user input or to provide an informational answer requested in the user input. For example, service processing module 738 can act on behalf of task flow processing module 736 to make a phone call, set a calendar entry, invoke a map search, invoke or interact with other user applications installed on the user device, and invoke or interact with third-party services (e.g., a restaurant reservation portal, a social networking website, a banking portal, etc.). In some examples, the protocols and application programming interfaces (API) required by each service can be specified by a respective service model among service models 756. Service processing module 738 can access the appropriate service model for a service and generate requests for the service in accordance with the protocols and APIs required by the service according to the service model. APPENDIX

[0207] For example, if a restaurant has enabled an online reservation service, the restaurant can submit a service model specifying the necessary parameters for making a reservation and the APIs for communicating the values of the necessary parameter to the online reservation service. When requested by task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738 can establish a network connection with the online reservation service using the web address stored in the service model and send the necessary parameters of the reservation (e.g., time, date, party size) to the online reservation interface in a format according to the API of the online reservation service.

[0208] In some examples, natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, and task flow processing module 736 can be used collectively and iteratively to infer and define the user's intent, obtain information to further clarify and refine the user intent, and finally generate a response (i.e., an output to the user, or the completion of a task) to fulfill the user's intent. The generated response can be a dialogue response to the speech input that at least partially fulfills the user's intent. Further, in some examples, the generated response can be output as a speech output. In these examples, the generated response can be sent to speech synthesis module 740 (e.g., speech synthesizer) where it can be processed to synthesize the dialogue response in speech form. In yet other examples, the generated response can be data content relevant to satisfying a user request in the speech input.

[0209] Speech synthesis module 740 can be configured to synthesize speech outputs for presentation to the user. Speech synthesis module 740 synthesizes speech outputs based on text provided by the digital assistant. For example, the generated dialogue response can be in the form of a text string. Speech synthesis module 740 can convert the text string to an audible speech output. Speech synthesis module 740 can use any appropriate speech synthesis technique in order to generate speech outputs from text, including, but not limited to, concatenative synthesis, unit selection synthesis, diphone synthesis, domain-specific synthesis, form ant synthesis, articulatory synthesis, hidden Markov model (HMM) based synthesis, and sinewave synthesis. In some examples, speech synthesis module 740 can be configured to synthesize individual words based on phonemic strings corresponding to the words. For example, a phonemic string can be associated with a word in the generated dialogue response. The phonemic string can be stored in metadata associated with the word. Speech synthesis model APPENDIX

740 can be configured to directly process the phonemic string in the metadata to synthesize the word in speech form.

[0210] In some examples, instead of (or in addition to) using speech synthesis module 740, speech synthesis can be performed on a remote device (e.g., the server system 108), and the synthesized speech can be sent to the user device for output to the user. For example, this can occur in some implementations where outputs for a digital assistant are generated at a server system. And because server systems generally have more processing power or resources than a user device, it can be possible to obtain higher quality speech outputs than would be practical with client-side synthesis.

[0211] Additional details on digital assistants can be found in the U.S. Utility Application No. 12/987,982, entitled "'Intelligent Automated Assistant," filed January 10, 2011, and U.S. Utility Application No. 13/251,088, entitled "'Generating and Processing Task Items That Represent Tasks to Perform," filed September 30, 2011, the entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.

[0212] 4. Exemplary Functions of a Digital Assistant - intelligent search and object management

[0213] FIGs. 8A--8F, 9A-9H, 10A-10B, 11A-11D, 12A-12D, and 13A-13C illustrate functionalities of performing a task using a search process or an object managing process by a digital assistant. In some examples, the digital assistant system (e.g., digital assistant system 700) is implemented by a user device according to various examples. In some examples, the user device, a server (e.g., server 108), or a combination thereof, may implement a digital assistant system (e.g., digital assistant system 700). The user device can be implemented using, for example, device 104, 200, or 400. In some examples, the user device is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, or a tablet computer. The user device can operate in a multi-tasking environment, such as a desktop environment.

[0214] With references to FIGs. 8A-8F, 9A-9H, I0A-10B, 11A-11D, 12A-12D, and ISA- ISC, in some examples, a user device provides various user interfaces (e.g., user interfaces 810, 910, 1010, 1110, 1210, and 1310). The user device displays the various user interfaces on a APPENDIX display (e.g., touch- sensitive display system 212, display 440) associated with the user device. The various user interfaces provide one or more affordances representing different processes (e.g., affordances 820, 920, 1020, 1120, 1220, and 1320 representing searching processes; and affordances 830, 930, 1030, 1130, 1230, and 1330 representing object managing processes). The one or more processes can be instantiated directly or indirectly by the user. For example, a user instantiates the one or more processes by selecting the affordances using an input device such as a keyboard, a mouse, a joystick, a finger, or the like. A user can also instantiate the one or more processes using a speech input, as described in more detail below. Instantiating a process includes invoking the process if the process is not already executing. If at least one instance of the process is executing, instantiating a process includes executing an existing instance of the process or generating a new instance of the process. For example, instantiating an object managing process includes invoking the object managing process, using an existing object managing process, or generate a new instance of the object managing process.

[0215] As shown in FIGs. 8A-8F, 9A-9H, i 0Λ · I OB. 11 A-l ID, 12A-12D, and 13A-13C, the user device displays, on a user interface (e.g., user interface 810, 910, 1010, 1 110, 1210, and 1310) an affordance (e.g., affordance 840, 940, 1040, 1140, 1240, and 1340) to instantiate a digital assistant service. The affordance can be, for example, a microphone icon representing the digital assistant. The affordance can be displayed at any location on the user interfaces. For example, the affordance can be displayed on the dock (e.g., dock 808, 908, 1008, 1 108, 1208, and 1308) at the bottom of the user interfaces, on the menu bar (e.g. menu bar 806, 906, 1006, 1106, 1206, and 1306) at the top of the user interfaces, in a notification center at the right side of the user interfaces, or the like. The affordance can also be displayed dynamically on the user interface. For example, the user device displays the affordance near an application user interface (e.g., an application window) such that the digital assistant service can be conveniently instantiated.

[0216] In some examples, the digital assistant is instantiated in response to receiving a predetermined phrase. For example, the digital assistant is invoked in response to receiving a phrase such as "Hey, Assistant," "Wake up, Assistant," "Listen up, Assistant," "OK, Assistant," or the like. In some examples, the digital assistant is instantiated in response to receiving a selection of the affordance. For example, a user selects affordance 840, 940, 1040, 1140, 1240, APPENDIX and/or 1340 using an input device such as a mouse, a stylus, a finger, or the like. Providing a digital assistant on a user device consumes computing resources (e.g., power, network bandwidth, memory, and processor cycles). In some examples, the digital assistant is suspended or shut down until a user invokes it. In some examples, the digital assistant is active for various periods of time. For example, the digital assistant can be active and monitoring the user's speech input during the time that various user interfaces are displayed, that the user device is turned on, that the user device is hibernating or sleeping, that the user is logged off, or a combination thereof.

[0217] With reference to FIGs. 8A-8F, 9A-9H, 10A-10B, 11A-11D, 12A-12D, and DA- DC, a digital assistant receives one or more speech inputs, such as speech inputs 852, 854, 855, 856, 952, 954, 1052, 1054, 1 152, 1252, or 1352, from a user. The user provides various speech inputs for the purpose of, for example, performing a task using a searching process or an object managing process. In some examples, the digital assistant receives speech inputs directly from the user at the user device or indirectly through another electronic device that is

communicatively connected to the user device. The digital assistant receives speech inputs directly from the user via, for example, a microphone (e.g., microphone 213) of the user device. The user device includes a device that is configured to operate in a multi-tasking environment, such as a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet, a server, or the like. The digital assistant can also receive speech inputs indirectly through one or more electronic devices such as a headset, a smartphone, a tablet, or the like. For instance, the user may speak to a headset (not shown). The headset receives the speech input from the user and transmits the speech input or a representation of it to the digital assistant of the user device via, for example, a Bluetooth connection between the headset and the user device.

[0218] With reference to FIGs. 8A-8F, 9A-9H, 10A-10B, 1 1 A-11D, 12A-12D, and DA- DC, in some embodiments, the digital assistant (e.g., represented by affordance 840, 940, 1040, 1 140, 1240, and 1340) identifies context information associated with the user device. The context information includes, for example, user-specific data, metadata associated with one or more objects, sensor data, and user device configuration data. An object can be a target or a component of a process (e.g., an object managing process) associated with performing a task or a graphical element currently displayed on screen, and the object or graphical element may have or APPENDIX may not currently have focus (e.g., be currently selected). For example, an object can include a file (e.g., a photo, a document), a folder, a communication (e.g., an email, a message, a notification, or a voicemail), a contact, a calendar, an application, an online resource, or the like. In some examples, the user-specific data includes log information, user preferences, the history of user's interaction with the user device, or the like. Log information indicates recent objects (e.g., a presentation file) used in a process. In some examples, metadata associated with one or more objects includes the title of the object, the time information of the object, the author of the object, the summary of the object, or the like. In some examples, the sensor data includes various data collected by a sensor associated with the user device. For example, the sensor data includes location data indicating the physical location of the user device. In some examples, the user device configuration data includes the current device configurations. For example, the device configurations indicate that the user device is communicatively connected to one or more electronic devices such as a smartphone, a tablet, or the like. As described in more detail below, the user device can perform one or more processes using the context information.

[0219] With reference to FIGs. 8A-8F, 9A-9H, 10A-10B, 1 lA-i ID, 12A- ! .?! ). and 13 A- 13C, in response to receiving a speech input, the digital assistant determines a user intent based on the speech input. As described above, in some examples, the digital assistant processes a speech input via an I/O processing module (e.g., I/O processing module 728 as shown in FIG. 7B), an STT processing module (e.g., STT processing module 730 as shown in FIG. 7B), and a natural language processing module (e.g., natural language processing module 732 as shown in FIG. 7B). The I/O processing module forwards the speech input to an STT processing module (or a speech recognizer) for speech-to-text conversions. The speech -to- ext conversion generates text based on the speech input. As described above, the STT processing module generates a sequence of words or tokens ("token sequence") and provides the token sequence to the natural language processing module. The natural language processing module performs natural language processing of the text and determines the user intent based on a result of the natural language processing. For example, the natural language processing module may attempt to associate the token sequence with one or more actionable intents recognized by the digital assistant. As described, once the natural language processing module identifies an actionable intent based on the user input, it generates a structured query to represent the identified actionable intent. The structured query includes one or more parameters associated with the APPENDIX actionable intent. The one or more parameters are used to facilitate the performance of a task based on the actionable intent.

|0220] In some embodiments, the digital assistant further determines whether the user intent is to perform a task using a searching process or an object managing process. The searching process is configured to search data stored internally or externally to the user device. The object managing process is configured to manage objects associated with the user device. Various examples of determination of the user intent are provided below in more detail with respect to FIGs. 8A-8F, 9A-9H, iOA-lOB, 11A-11D, 1 A- 121 ⁾ . and 13A-13C.

[0221] With reference to FIG. 8A, in some examples, a user device receives a speech input 852 from a user to instantiate the digital assistant. Speech input 852 includes, for example, "Hey, Assistant." In response to the speech input, the user device instantiates the digital assistant represented by affordance 840 or 841 such that the digital assistant is actively monitoring subsequent speech inputs. In some examples, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 872 indicating that it is instantiated. For example, spoken output 872 includes "Go ahead, I am listening." In some examples, the user device receives a selection of affordance 840 or affordance 841 from the user to instantiate the digital assistant. The selection of affordance is performed by using an input device such as a mouse, a stylus, a finger, or the like.

[0222] With reference to FIG. 8B, in some examples, the digital assistant receives a speech input 854. Speech input 854 includes, for example, "Open the searching process and find the AAPL stock price today," or simply "show me the AAPL stock price today." Based on speech input 854, the digital assistant determines the user intent. For example, to determine the user intent, the digital assistant determines that the actionable intent is obtaining online information and that one or more parameters associated with this actionable intent include "A APL stock price," and "today."

[0223] As described, in some examples, the digital assistant further determines whether the user intent is to perform a task using a searching process or an object managing process. In some embodiments, to make the determination, the digital assistant determines whether the speech input includes one or more keywords representing the searching process or the object managing process. For example, the digital assistant determines that speech input 854 includes keywords APPENDIX or a phrase such as "open the searching process," indicating the user intent is to use the searching process to perform the task. As a result, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to perform a task using the searching process.

[0224] As shown in FIG. 8B, in accordance with a determination the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process, the digital assistant performs the task using the searching process. As described, the natural language processing module of the digital assistant generates a structured query based on the user intent and passes the generated structured query to a task flow processing module (e.g., task flow processing module 736). The task flow processing module receives the structured query from the natural language processing module, completes the structured query, if necessary, and performs the actions required to "complete" the user's ultimate request. Performing the task using the searching process includes, for example, searching at least one object. In some embodiments, at least one object includes a folder, a file (e.g., a photo, an audio, a video), a communication (e.g., an email, a message, a notification, a voicemail), a contact, a calendar, an application (e.g., Keynote, Number, iTunes, Safari), an online informational source (e.g., Google, Yahoo, Bloomberg), or a combination thereof. In some examples, searching an object is based on metadata associated with the object. For example, the searching of a file or folder can use metadata such as a tag, a date, a time, an author, a title, a type of the file, a size, a page count, and/or a file location associated with the folder or file. In some examples, the file or folder is stored internally or externally to the user device. For example, the file or folder can be stored on the hard disk of the user device or stored on a cloud server. In some examples, searching a communication is based on metadata associated with the communication. For example, the searching of an email uses metadata such as the sender of the email, the receiver of the email, the sent/receive dates of the email, or the like.

[0225] As illustrated in FIG. 8B, in accordance with the determination that the user intent is to obtain the AAPL stock price using the searching process, the digital assistant performs the searching. For example, the digital assistant instantiates a searching process, represented by affordance 820, and causes the searching process to search today's AAPL stock price. In some examples, the digital assistant further causes the searching process to display a user interface 822 APPENDIX

(e.g., a snippet or a window) providing text corresponding to speech input 854 (e.g., "Open the searching process and find the AAPL stock price today").

|0226J With reference to FIG. 8C, in some embodiments, the digital assistant provides a response based on a result of performing the task using the searching process. As illustrated in FIG. 8C, as a result of searching the AAPL stock price, the digital assistant displays a user interface 824 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing the result of performing the task using the searching process. In some embodiments, user interface 824 is located within user interface 822 as a separate user interface. In some embodiments, user interfaces 824 and 822 are integrated together as a single user interface. On user interface 824, the search result of the stock price of AAPL is displayed. In some embodiments, user interface 824 further provides affordances 831 and 833. Affordance 831 enables closing of user interface 824. For example, if the digital assistant receives a user's selection of affordance 831 , user interface 824 disappears or closes from the display of the user device. Affordance 833 enables moving or sharing of the search result displayed on user interface 824. For example, if the digital assistant receives the user's selection of affordance 833, it instantiates a process (e.g., the object managing process) to move or share user interface 824 (or the search result thereof) with a notification application. As shown in FIG. 8C, the digital assistant displays a user interface 826 that is associated with the notification application to provide the searc result of AAPL stock price. In some embodiments, user interface 826 displays an affordance 827. Affordance 827 enables scrolling within user interface 826 such that the user can view the entire content (e.g., multiple notifications) within user interface 826 and/or indicates that relative position of the document with respect to its entire length and/or width. In some embodiments, user interface 826 displays results and/or dialog history (e.g., search results obtained from a current and/or past searching process) stored by the digital assistant. Further, in some examples, results of the performance the task are dynamically updated over time. For example, the AAPL stock price can be dynamically updated over time and displayed on user interface 826.

[0227] In some embodiments, the digital assistant also provides a spoken output

corresponding to the search result. For example, the digital assistant (e.g., represented by affordance 840) provides a spoken output 874 including "Today's AAPL price is $100.00." In some examples, user interface 822 includes text corresponding to spoken output 874. APPENDIX

|Ό228] With reference to FIG. 8D, in some examples, the digital assistant instantiates a process (e.g., the object managing process) to move or share the search result displayed on user interface 824 in response to a subsequent speech input. For example, the digital assistant receives a speech input 855 such as "Copy the AAPL stock price to my notes." In response, the digital assistant instantiates a process to move or copy the search result (e.g., the AAPL stock price) to the user's note. As shown in FIG. 8D, in some examples, the digital assistant further displays a user interface 825 providing the copied or moved search result in user's note. In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output 875 such as "OK, the AAPL stock price is copied to your notes." In some examples, user interface 822 includes text corresponding to spoken output 875.

[0229] With reference to FIG. 8E, in some examples, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to perform a task using the object managing process and performs the task using an object managing process. For example, the digital assistant receives a speech input 856 such as "Open the object managing process and show me all the photos from my Colorado trip," or simply "Show me all the photos from my Colorado trip." Based on speech input 856 and context information, the digital assistant determines the user intent. For example, the digital assistant determines that the actionable intent is to display photos and determines one or more parameters such as "all," and "Colorado trip." The digital assistant further determines which photos correspond to the user's Colorado trip using context information. As described, context information includes user-specific data, metadata of one or more objects, sensor data, and/or device configuration data. As an example, metadata associated with one or more files (e.g., file 1 , file 2, and file 3 displayed in user interface 832) indicates that the file names includes the word "Colorado" or a city name of Colorado (e.g., "Denver"). The metadata may also indicate that a folder name includes the word "Colorado" or a city name of Colorado (e.g., "Denver"). As another example, sensor data (e.g., GPS data) indicates that the user was travelling within Colorado during a certain period of time. As a result, any photos the user took during that particular period of time are photos taken during the user's Colorado trip. As well, photos themselves may include geotagged metadata that associates the photo with the location at which it was taken. Based on the context information, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to, for example, display photos stored in a folder having a folder name "Colorado trip," or display photos taken during the period of time that the user was travelling within Colorado. APPENDIX

[0230] As described, in some examples, the digital assistant determines whether the user intent is to perform a task using a searching process or an object managing process. To make such determination, the digital assistant determines whether the speech input includes one or more keywords representing the searching process or the object managing process. For example, the digital assistant determines that speech input 856 includes keywords or a phrase such as "open the object managing process," indicating that the user intent is to use the object managing process to perform the task.

[0231] In accordance with a determination the user intent is to perform the task using the object managing process, the digital assistant performs the task using the object managing process. For example, the digital assistant searches at least one object using the object managing process. In some examples, at least one object includes at least one of a folder or a file. A file can include at least one of a photo, an audio (e.g., a song), or a video (e.g., a movie). In some examples, searching a file or a folder is based on metadata associated with the folder or file. For example, the searching of a file or folder uses metadata such as a tag, a date, a time, an author, a title, a type of the file, a size, a page count, and/or a file location associated with the folder or file. In some examples, the file or folder can be stored internally or externally to the user device. For example, the file or folder can be stored on the hard disk of the user device or stored on a cloud server.

[0232] As illustrated in FIG. 8E, in accordance with the determination that the user intent is, for example, to display photos stored in a folder having a folder name "Colorado trip," or display photos taken during the period of time that the user was travelling within Colorado, the digital assistant performs the task using the object managing process. For example, the digital assistant instantiates an object managing process represented by affordattce 830 and causes the object managing process to search for photos from the user's Colorado trip. In some examples, the digital assistant also causes the object managing process to display a snippet or a window (not shown) providing text of the user's speech input 856.

[0233] With reference to FIG. 8F, in some embodiments, the digital assistant further provides a response based on a result of performing the task using the object managing process. As illustrated in FIG. 8F, as a result of searching the photos of the user's Colorado trip, the APPENDIX digital assistant displays a user interface 834 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing the result of performing the task using the object managing process. For example, on user interface 834, a preview of the photos is displayed. In some examples, the digital assistant instantiates a process (e.g., the object managing process) to perform additional tasks on the photos, such as inserting the photos to a document or attaching the photos to email. As described in more detail below, the digital assistant can instantiate a process to perform the additional tasks in response to a user's additional speech input. As well, the digital assistant can perform multiple tasks in response to a single speech input, such as "'send the photos from my Colorado trip to my Mom by email." The digital assistant can also instantiate a process to perform such additional tasks in response to the user's input using an input device (e.g., a mouse input to select of one or more affordances or perform a drag-and-drop operation). In some embodiments, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output corresponding to the result. For example, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 876 including "Here are the photos from your Colorado trip."

[0234] With reference to FIG. 9A, in some examples, user's speech input may not include one or more keywords indicating whether the user intent is to use the searching process or the object managing process. For example, the user provides a speech input 952 such as "What is the score of today's Warriors game?" Speech input 952 does not include keywords indicating "the searching process" or the "object managing process." As a result, the keywords may not be available for the digital assistant to determine whether the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process or the object managing process.

[0235] In some embodiments, to determine whether the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process or the object managing process, the digital assistant determines whether the task is associated with searching based on the speech input. In some examples, a task that is associated with searching can be performed by either the searching process or the object managing process. For example, both the searching process and the object managing process can search a folder and a file. In some examples, the searching process can further search a variety of objects including online information sources (e.g., websites), communications (e.g., emails), contacts, calendars, or the like. In some examples, the object managing process may not be configured to search certain objects such as online information sources. APPENDIX

[0236] In accordance with a determination that the task is associated with searching, the digital assistant further determines whether performing the task requires the searching process. As described, if a task is associated with searching, either the searching process or the object managing process can be used to perform the task. However, the object managing process may not be configured to search certain objects. As a result, to determine whether the user intent is to use the searching process or the object managing process, the digital assistant further determines whether the task requires the searching process. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 9A, based on speech input 952, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is, for example, to obtain the score of today's Warriors game. According to the user intent, the digital assistant further determines that performing the task requires searching online information sources and therefore is associated with searching. The digital assistant further determines whether performing the task requires the searching process. As described, in some examples, the searching process is configured to search online information sources such as websites, while the object managing process may not be configured to search such online information sources. As a result, the digital assistant determines that searching online information sources (e.g., searching Warriors' website to obtain the score) requires the searching process.

[0237] With reference to FIG. 9B, in some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that performing the task requires the searching process, the digital assistant performs the task using the searching process. For example, in accordance with the determination that searching the score of today's Warriors game requires the searching process, the digital assistant instantiates a searching process represented by affordance 920, and causes the searching process to search score of today's Warriors game. In some examples, the digital assistant further causes the searching process to display a user interface 922 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing text of user speech input 952 (e.g., "What is the score of today's Warriors game?"). User interface 922 includes one or more affordances 921 and 927. Similar to described above, affordance 921 (e.g., a close button) enables closing of user interface 922 and affordance 927 (e.g., a scrolling bar) enables scrolling within user interface 922 such that the user can view the entire content within user interface 922.

[0238] With reference to FIG. 9B, in some examples, based on the search results, the digital assistant further provides one or more responses. As illustrated in FIG. 9B, as a result of APPENDIX searching the score of today's Warriors game, the digital assistant displays a user interface 924 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing the result of performing the task using the searching process. In some embodiments, user interface 924 is located within user interface 922 as a separate user interface. In some embodiments, user interfaces 924 and 922 are integrated together as a single user interface. In some examples, the digital assistant displays the user interface 924 providing the current search results (e.g., the Warriors game score) together with another user interface (e.g., user interface 824 shown on FIG. 8C) providing prior search results (e.g., the AAPL stock price). In some embodiments, the digital assistant only displays user interface 924 providing the current search results and does not display another user interface providing prior search results. As illustrated in FIG. 9B, the digital assistant only displays user interface 924 to provide the current search results (e.g., the Warriors game score). In some examples, affordance 927 (e.g., a scrolling bar) enables scrolling within user interface 922 such that the user can view the prior search results. Further, in some examples, prior search results dynamically update or refresh, e.g., such that stock prices, sports score, weather forecast, etc., update over t me.

[0239] As illustrated in FIG. 9B, on user interface 924, the search result of the score of today's Warriors game is displayed (e.g., Warriors 104-89 Cavaliers). In some embodiments, user interface 924 further provides affordances 923 and 925. Affordance 923 enables closing of user interface 924. For example, if the digital assistant receives a user's selection of affordance 923, user interface 924 disappears or closes from the display of the user device. Affordance 925 enables moving or sharing of the search result displayed on user interface 924. For example, if the digital assistant receives the user's selection of affordance 925, it moves or shares user interface 924 (or the search result thereof) with a notification application. As shown in FIG. 9B, the digital assistant displays user interface 926 that is associated with the notification application to provide the search result of Warriors game score. As described, results of the performance the task are dynamically updated over time. For example, the Warriors game score can be dynamically updated over time while the game is ongoing and displayed on user interface 924 (e.g., the snippet or window) and/or on user interface 926 (e.g., the notification application user interface). In some embodiments, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output corresponding to the search result. For example, the digital assistant represented by affordance 940 or 941 provides a spoken output 972 such as "Warriors beats Cavaliers, 104-89." In some APPENDIX examples, user interface 922 (e.g., a snippet or a window) provides text corresponding to spoken output 972.

|0240] As described above, in some embodiments, the digital assistant determines whether the task is associated with searching, and in accordance with such a determination, the digital assistant determines whether performing the task requires the searching process. With reference to FIG. 9C, in some embodiments, the digital assistant determines that performing the task does not require the searching process. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 9C, the digital assistant receives a speech input 954 such as "Show me all the files called Expenses." Based on speech input 954 and context information, the digital assistant determines that user intent is to display all the files having the word "Expenses" (or a portion, a variation, a paraphrase thereof) contained in their file names, the metadata, the content of the files, or the like. According to the user intent, the digital assistant determines that the task to be performed includes searching all the files associated with the word "Expenses." As a result, the digital assistant determines that performing the task is associated with searching. As described above, in some examples, the searching process and the object managing process can both perform searching of files. As a result, the digital assistant determines that performing the task of searching all the files associated with the word "Expenses" does not require the searching process.

[0241] With reference to FIG. 9D, in some examples, in accordance with a determination that performing the task does not require the searching process, the digital assistant determines, based on a pre-determined configuration, whether the task is to be performed using the searching process or the object managing process. For example, if both the searching process and the object managing process can perform the task, a pre-determined configuration may indicate that the task is to be performed using the searching process. The pre-determined configuration can be generated and updated using context information such as user preferences or user-specific data. For example, the digital assistant determines that historically, for a particular user, the searching process was selected more frequently than the object managing process for file searching. As a result, the digital assistant generates or updates the pre-determined configuration to indicate that the searching process is the default process for searching files. In some examples, the digital assistant generates or updates the pre-determined configuration to indicate that the object managing process is the default process. APPENDIX

[0242] As illustrated in FIG. 9D, based on a pre -determined configuration, the digital assistant determines that the task of searching all the files associated with the word "Expense" is to be performed using the searching process. As a result, the digital assistant performs the searching of all the files associated with the word "Expenses" using the searching process. For example, the digital assistant instantiates a searching process represented by afford ance 920 displayed on user interface 910, and causes the searching process to search all files associated with the word "Expenses." In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output 974, informing the user that the task is being performed. Spoken output 974 includes, for example, "OK, searching all files called 'Expenses'." In some examples, the digital assistant further causes the searching process to display a user interface 928 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing text corresponding to speech input 954 and spoken output 974.

[0243] With reference to FIG. 9E, in some embodiments, the digital assistant further provides one or more responses based on a result of performing the task using the searching process. As illustrated in FIG. 9E, as a result of searching all files associated with the word "Expenses," the digital assistant displays a user interface 947 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing the search results. In some embodiments, user interface 947 is located within user interface 928 as a separate user interface. In some embodiments, user interfaces 947 and 928 are integrated together as a single user interface. On user interface 947, a list of files that are associated with the word "Expenses" are displayed. In some embodiments, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output corresponding to the search result. For example, the digital assistant represented by affordance 940 or 941 provides a spoken output 976 such as "Here are all the files called Expenses." In some examples, the digital assistant further provides, on user interface 928, text corresponding to spoken output 976.

[0244] In some embodiments, the digital assistant provides one or more links associated with the result of performing the task using the searching process. A link enables instantiating a process (e.g., opening a file, invoking an object managing process) using the search result. As illustrated in FIG. 9E, on user interface 947, the list of files (e.g., Expenses File 1 , Expenses File 2, Expenses File 3) represented by their file names can be associated with links. As an example, a link is displayed on the side of each file name. As another example, the file names is displayed in a particular color (e.g., blue) indicating that the file names are associated with links. In some APPENDIX examples, the file names associated with links are displayed in the same color as other items displayed on user interface 947.

[0245J As described, a link enables instantiating a process using the search result.

Instantiating a process includes invoking the process if the process is not already running. If at least one instance of the process is running, instantiating a process includes executing an existing instance of the process or generating a new instance of the process. For example, instantiating an object managing process includes invoking the object managing process, using an existing object managing process, or generating a new instance of the object managing process. As illustrated in FIGs. 9E and 9F, a link displayed on user interface 947 enables managing an object (e.g., a file) associated with the link. For example, user interface 947 receives a user selection of a link (e.g., a selection by a cursor 934) associated with a file (e.g., "Expenses file 3"). In response, the digital assistant instantiates an object managing process represented by affordance 930 to enable managing of the file. As shown in FIG. 9F, the digital assistant displays a user interface 936 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing the folder containing the file associated with the link (e.g., "Expenses file 3"). Using user interface 936, the digital assistant instantiates the object managing process to perform one or more additional tasks (e.g., copying, editing, viewing, moving, compressing, or the like) with respect to the files.

[0246] With reference back to FIG. 9E, in some examples, a link displayed on user interface 947 enables direct viewing and/or editing of the object. For example, the digital assistant, via user interface 947, receives a selection of a link (e.g., a selection by a cursor 934) associated with a file (e.g., "Expenses file 3"). In response, the digital assistant instantiates a process (e.g., a document viewing/editing process) to view and/or edit the file. In some examples, the digital assistant instantiates the process to view and/or edit the file without instantiating an object managing process. For example, the digital assistant directly instantiates a Number process or an Excel process to view and/or edit of the Expense file 3.

[0247] With reference to FIGs. 9E and 9G, in some examples, the digital assistant instantiates a process (e.g., the searching process) to refine the search results. As illustrated in FIGs. 9E and 9G, the user may desire to refine the search result displayed on user interface 947. For example, the user may desire to select one or more files from the search results. In some APPENDIX examples, the digital assistant receives, from the user, a speech input 977 such as "just the ones Kevin sent me that I tagged with draft." Based on speech input 977 and context information, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to display only the Expenses files that were sent from Kevin and that are associated with draft tags. Based on the user intent, the digital assistant instantiates a process (e.g., the searching process) to refine the search results. For example, as shown in FIG. 9G, based on the search result, the digital assistant determines that Expenses File 1 and Expense file 2 were sent from Kevin to the user and were tagged. As a result, the digital assistant continues to display these two files on user interface 947 and remove the Expense file 3 from user interface 947. In some examples, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 978 such as "'Here are just the ones Kevin sent you that you tagged with draft." The digital assistant may further provide text corresponding to spoken output 978 on user interface 928.

[0248] With reference to FIG. 9H, in some examples, the digital assistant instantiates a process (e.g., an object managing process) to perform an object managing task (e.g., coping, moving, sharing, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 9H, the digital assistant receives, from the user, a speech input 984 such as '"Move the Expenses file 1 to Documents folder." Based on speech input 984 and context information, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to copy or move Expense file 1 from its current folder to Document folder. In accordance with the user intent, the digital assistant instantiates a process (e.g., the object managing process) to copy or move Expense file 1 from its current folder to Document folder. In some examples, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 982 such as "Ok, moving Expenses File 1 to your Documents folder." In some examples, the digital assistant furthers provide text corresponding to spoken output 982 on user interface 928.

[0249] As described, in some examples, a user's speech input may not include keywords indicating whether the user intent is to perform the task using the search process or the object managing process. With reference to FIG. 10A-10B, in some embodiments, the digital assistant determines that performing the task does not require the searching process. In accordance with the determination, the digital assistant provides a spoken output requesting the user to select the searching process or the object managing process. For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the digital assistant receives, from the user, a speec input 1052 such as "Show me all the files called 'Expenses. ¹ " Based on speech input 1052 and context information, the digital assistant APPENDIX determines that the user intent is to display all the files associated with the word "'Expense." In accordance with the user intent, the digital assistant further determines that the task can be performed by either the searching process or the object managing process, and therefore does not require the search process. In some examples, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1072 such as "Do you want to search using the searching process or the object managing process?" In some examples, the digital assistant receives, from the user, a speech input 1054 such as "Object managing process." Speech input 1054 thus indicates that the user intent is to perform the task using the object managing process. According to the selection, for example, the digital assistant instantiates an object managing process represented by affordance 1030 to search all the files associated with the word "Expenses." As shown in FIG. I0B, similar to those described above, as a result of the searching, the digital assistant displays a user interface 1032 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing a folder containing the files associated with the word "Expenses". Similar to those described above, using user interface 1032, the digital assistant instantiates the object managing process to perform additional one or more tasks (e.g., copying, editing, viewing, moving, compressing, or the like) with respect to the files.

[0250] With reference to FIGs. 1 1 A and 1 IB, in some embodiments, the digital assistant identifies context information and determines the user intent based on the context information and the user's speech input. As illustrated in FIG. 11A, the digital assistant represented by affordance 1 140 or 1 141 receives a speech input 1152 such as "Open the Keynote presentation I created last night." In response to receiving speech input 1 152, the digital assistant identifies context information such as the history of the user's interaction with the user device, the metadata associated with files that the user recently worked on, or the like. For example, the digital assistant identifies the metadata such as the date, the time, and the type of files the user worked on yesterday from 6p.m. -2a.m. Based on the identified context information and speech input 1152, the digitai assistant determines that the user intent includes searching a Keynote presentation file associated with metadata indicating that the file was edited approximately

6p.m.- 12a.m yesterday; and instantiating a process (e.g., a Keynote process) to open the presentation file.

[0251] In some examples, the context information includes application names or

identifications (IDs). For example, a user's speech input provides "Open the Keynote APPENDIX presentation," "find my Pages document," or "find my HotNewApp documents." The context information includes the application names (e.g., Keynote, Pages, HotNewApp) or application IDs. In some examples, the context information is dynamically updated or synchronized. For example, the context information is updated in real time after the user installs a new application named HotNewApp. In some examples, the digital assistant identifies the dynamically updated context information and determines the user intent. For example, the digital assistant identifies the application names Keynote, Pages, HotNewApp or their IDs and determines the user intent according to the application names/IDs and speech inputs.

[0252] In accordance with the user intent, the digital assistant further determines whether the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process or the object managing process. As described, the digital assistant makes such determination based on one or more keywords included in the speech input, based on whether the task requires the searching process, based on a predetermined configuration, and/or based on the user's selection. As illustrated in FIG. 1 lA, speech input 1152 does not include keywords that indicate whether the user intent is to use the searching process or the object managing process. As a result, the digital assistant determines, for example, based on a pre-determined configuration that the user intent is to use the object managing process. In accordance with the determination, the digital assistant instantiate an object managing process to search a Keynote presentation file associated with metadata that indicates the file was edited approximately 6p.m.-12a.m yesterday. In some embodiments, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output 1 172 such as "OK, looking for the Keynote presentation you created last night."

[0253] In some embodiments, context information is used in performing the task. For example, application names and/or IDs can be used to form a query for searching the application and/or objects (e.g., files) associated with the application names/IDs. In some examples, a server (e.g., server 108) forms a query using the application names (e.g., Keynote, Pages, HotNewApp) and/or IDs and sends the query to the digital assistant of a user device. Based on the query, the digital assistant instantiates a searching process or an object managing process to search one or more applications and/or objects. In some examples, the digital assistant only searches the objects (e.g., files) that correspond to the application name/ID. For example, if a query includes an application name "Pages," the digital assistant only searches Pages files and does not search APPENDIX otlier files (e.g., Word files) that can be opened by a Pages application. In some examples, the digital assistant searches all objects that is associated with the application name/ID in the query.

[0254] With references to FIGs. 1 IB and 11C, in some embodiments, the digital assistant provides one or more responses in accordance with a confidence level associated with the results of performing the task. Inaccuracies may exist or arise during the determination of the user intent, the determination of whether the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process or the object managing process, and/or the performance of the task. In some examples, the digital assistant determines a confidence level representing the accuracy of determining the user intent based on the speech input and context information, the accuracy of determining whether the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process or the object managing process, the accuracy of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process, or a combination thereof.

[0255] Continuing the above example illustrated in FIG. 11A, based on speech input 1152 such as "'Open the Keynote presentation I created last night," the digital assistant instantiates an object managing process to perform a search of a Keynote presentation file associated with metadata that indicates the file was edited approximately 6p.m.-12a.m yesterday. The search result may include a single file that fully matches the search criteria. That is, the single file is a presentation file that was edited approximately 6p.m.-12a.m yesterday. Accordingly, the digital assistant determines that the accuracy of the search is high and thus determines that the confidence level is high. As another example, the search result may include a plurality of files that partially match the search criteria. For instance, no file is a presentation file that was edited approximately 6p.m.-12a.m yesterday, or multiple files are presentation files that were edited approximately 6p.m.-12a.m yesterday. Accordingly, the digital assistant determines that the accuracy of the search is medium or low and thus determines that the confidence level is medium or low.

[0256] As illustrated in FIGs. 1 IB and 11C, the digital assistant provides a response in accordance with the determination of the confidence level. In some examples, the digital assistant determines whether the confidence level is greater than or equal to a threshold confidence level. In accordance with a determination that the confidence level is greater than or APPENDIX equal to the threshold confidence level, the digital assistant provides a first response. In accordance with a determination that the confidence level is less than a threshold confidence level, the digital assistant provides a second response. In some examples, the second response is different from the first response. As shown in FIG. 1 IB, if the digital assistant determines that the confidence level is greater than or equal to a threshold confidence level, the digital assistant instantiates a process (e.g., a Keynote process represented by user interface 1142) to enable the viewing and editing of the file. In some examples, the digital assistant provides a spoken output such as "Here is the presentation you created last night," and displays the text of the spoken output in a user interface 1143. As shown in FIG. 11C, if the digital assistant determines that the confidence level is less than a threshold confidence level, the digital assistant displays a user interface 1122 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing a list of candidate files. Each of the candidate files may partially satisfy the search criteria. In some embodiments, the confidence level can be predetermined and/or dynamically updated based on user preferences, historical accuracy rates, or the like. In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output 1174 such as "Here are ah the presentations created last night," and displays the text corresponding to spoken output 1 174 on user interface 1122.

[0257] With reference to FIG. 1 ID, in some embodiments, the digital assistant instantiates a process (e.g., the Keynote presentation process) to perform additional tasks. Continuing with the above example, as shown in FIGs. 1 IB and 1 ID, the user may desire to display the presentation file in a full screen mode. The digital assistant receives, from the user, a speech input 1154 such as "Make it full screen." Based on speech input 1154 and context information, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to display the presentation file in a full screen mode. In accordance with the user intent, the digital assistant causes the Keynote presentation process to display the slides in a full-screen mode. In some examples, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1176 such as "OK, showing your presentation in full screen."

[0258] With reference to FIGs. 12A-12C, in some embodiments, the digital assistant determines, based on a single speech input or an utterance, that the user intent is to perform a plurality of tasks. In accordance with the user intent, the digital assistant further instantiates one or more processes to perform the plurality of tasks. For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the digital assistant represented by affordance 1240 or 1241 receives a single speech input 1252 such APPENDIX as "Show me all the photos from my Colorado trip, and send them to my mom." Based on speech input 1252 and context information, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to perform a first task and a second task. Similar to those described above, the first task is to display photos stored in a folder having a folder name "Colorado trip," or display photos taken during the period of time that the user is travelling within Colorado. With respect to the second task, the context information may indicate that a particular email address stored in the user's contacts is tagged as the user's mom. Accordingly, the second task is to send an email containing the photos associated with the Colorado trip to the particular email address.

|02S9] In some examples, the digital assistant determines, with respect to each task, whether the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process or the object managing process. As an example, the digital assistant determines that the first task is associated with searching and the user intent is to perform the first task using the object managing process. As illustrated in FIG. 12B, in accordance with a determination the user intent is to perform the first task using the object managing process, the digital assistant instantiates the object managing process to search photos associated with the user's Colorado trip. In some examples, the digital assistant displays a user interface 1232 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing a folder including the search result (e.g., photos 1, 2, and 3). As another example, the digital assistant determines that the first task is associated with searching and the user intent is to perform the first task using the searching process. As illustrated in FIG. 12C, in accordance with a determination the user intent is to perform the first task using the searching process, the digital assistant instantiates the searching process to search photos associated with the user's Colorado trip. In some examples, the digital assistant displays a user interface 1234 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing photos and/or links associated with the search result (e.g., photos 1 , 2, and 3).

[0260] As another example, the digital assistant determines that the second task (e.g., sending an email containing the photos associated with the Colorado trip to the particular email address) is not associated with searching or associated with managing an object. In accordance with the determination, the digital assistant determines whether the task can be performed using a process that is available to the user device. For example, the digital assistant determines that the second task can be performed using an email process at the user device. In accordance with the determination, the digital assistant instantiates the process to perform the second task. As APPENDIX illustrated in FIGs. 12B and 12C, the digital assistant instantiates the email process and displays user interfaces 1242 and 1244 associated with the email process. The email process attaches the photos associated with the user's Colorado trip to email messages. As shown in FIGs. 12B and 12C, in some embodiments, the digital assistant further provides spoken outputs 1272 and 1274 such as "Here are the photos from your Colorado trip. I am ready to send the photos to your mom, proceed?" In some examples, the digital assistant displays text corresponding to spoken output 1274 on user interface 1244. In response to spoken outputs 1272 and 1274, the user provides a speech input such as "OK." Upon receiving the speech input from the user, the digital assistant causes the email process to send out the email messages.

[0261] Techniques for performing a plurality of tasks based on multiple commands contained within a single speech input or an utterance may be found, for example, in related applications: U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 14/724,623, titled "MULTI-COMMAND SINGLE UTTERANCE INPUT METHOD," filed May 28, 2015, which claims the benefit of priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/005,556, entitled "MULTI-COMMAND SINGLE UTTERANCE INPUT METHOD," filed on May 30, 2014; and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/129,851 , entitled "MULTI-COMMAND SINGLE UTTERANCE INPUT METHOD," filed on March 8, 2015. Each of these applications is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

[0262] As illustrated in FIGs. 12C and 12D, in some examples, the digital assistant causes a process to perform additional tasks based on the user's additional speech inputs. For example, in view of the search result displayed in user interface 1234, the user may desire to send some, but not all, of the photos. The user provides a speech input 1254 such as "Send only Photo 1 and Photo 2." In some examples, the digital assistant receives speech input 1254 after the user selects affordance 1235 (e.g., a microphone icon displayed on user interface 1234). The digital assistant determines, based on speech input 1254 and context information, that the user intent is to send an email attaching only Photo 1 and Photo 2. In accordance with the user intent, the digital assistant causes the email process to remove Photo 3 from the email message. In some examples, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1276, such as "OK, attaching Photo 1 and Photo 2 to your email," and displays the text corresponding to spoken output 1276 on user interface 1234. APPENDIX

[0263] With reference to FIG. 13 A, in some embodiments, in accordance with a

determination that the task is not associated with searching, the digital assistant determines whether the task is associated with managing at least one object. As illustrated in FIG. 13 A, for example, the digital assistant receives a speech input 1352 such as "'Create a new folder on the desktop called Projects." Based on speech input 1352 and context information, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to generate a new folder at the desktop with a folder name "'Projects." The digital assistant further determines that the user intent is not associated with searching, and instead is associated with managing an object (e.g., a folder). Accordingly, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to perform a task using the object managing process.

[0264] In some examples, in accordance with the determination that the user intent is to perform the task using the object managing process, the digital assistant performs the task using the object managing process. Performing the task using the object managing process can include, for example, creating at least one object (e.g., creating a folder or a file), storing at least one object (e.g., storing a folder, a file, or a communication), and compressing at least one object (e.g., compressing folders and files). Performing the task using the object managing process can further include, for example, copying or moving at least one object from a first physical or virtual storage to a second physical or virtual storage. For instance, the digital assistant instantiates an object managing process to cut and paste a file from the user device to a flash dr ve or a cloud dri e.

[0265] Performing the task using the object managing process can further include, for example, deleting at least one object stored in a physical or virtual storage (e.g., deleting a folder or a file) and/or recovering at least one object stored at a physical or virtual storage (e.g., recovering a deleted folder or a deleted file). Performing the task using the object managing process can further include, for example, marking at least one object. In some examples, marking of an object can be visible or invisible. For example, the digital assistant can cause the object managing process to generate a "like" sign for a social media post, to tag an email, to mark a file, or the like. The marking may be visible by displaying, for example, a flag, a sign, or the like. The marking may also be performed with respect to the metadata of the object such that APPENDIX a storage (e.g., a memory) content of the metadata is varied. The metadata may or may not be visible.

[0266] Performing the task using the object managing process can further include, for example, backing up at least one object according to a predetermined time period for backing up or upon the user's request. For example, the digital assistant can cause the object managing process to instantiate a backup program (e.g., time machine program) to backup folders and files. The backup can be performed automatically according to a pre-determined schedule (e.g., once a day, a week, a month, or the like) or according to a user request.

[0267] Performing the task using the object managing process can further include, for example, sharing at least one object among one or more electronic devices communicatively connected to the user device. For example, the digital assistant can cause the object managing process to share a photo stored on the user device with another electronic device (e.g., the user's smartphone or tablet).

[0268] As illustrated in FIG. 13B, in accordance with the determination that the user intent is to perform the task using the object managing process, the digital assistant performs the task using the object managing process. For example, the digital assistant instantiates an object managing process to generate a folder named "Projects" on the desktop of user interface 1310. In some examples, the digital assistant can cause the object managing process to further open the folder either automatically or in response to an additional user input. For example, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1372 such as "OK, I've created a folder on the desktop called Projects, would you like to open it?" The user provides a speech input 1374 such as "Yes." In response to the user's speech input 1374, the digital assistant causes the object managing process to open the Projects folder and display a user interface 1332 corresponding to the Projects folder.

[0269] With reference to FIG. 13C, in some embodiments, the digital assistant provides one or more affordances that enable the user to manipulate the result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process. The one or more affordances include, for example, an edit button, a cancel button, a redo button, an undo button, or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 13C, after generating the folder named "Projects" on the desktop, the digital assistant provides a user interface 1334, which displays an edit button 1336A, an undo button APPENDIX

1336B, and a redo button 1336C. In some examples, the edit button 1336A enables the user to edit one or more aspects of the object (e.g., edit the name of the Projects folder); the undo button 1336B enables the user to reverse the last task performed by the object managing process (e.g., delete the Projects folder); and the redo button 1336C enables the user to repeat the last task performed by the object managing process (e.g., creating another folder using the object managing process). It is appreciated that the digital assistant can provide any desired

affordances to enable the user to perform any manipulation of the result of performing a task using the searching process or the object managing process.

[0270] As described, the digital assistant can determine whether the user intent is to perform a task using a searching process or an object managing process. In some examples, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is not associated with the searching process or the object managing process. For example, the user provides a speech input such as "start dictation." The digital assistant determines that the task of dictation is not associated with searching. In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the task is not associated with searching, the digital assistant further determines whether the task is associated with managing at least one object. For example, the digital assistant determines that the task of dictation is also not associated with managing an object, such as copying, moving, or deleting a file, a folder, or an email. In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the task is not associated with managing an object, the digital assistant determines whether the task can be performed using a process available to the user device. For example, the digital assistant determines that the task of dictation can be performed using a dictation process that is available to the user device. In some examples, the digital assistant initiates a dialog with the user with respect to performing the task using a process available to the user device. For example, the digital assistant provides a spoken output such as "OK, starting dictation." or "Would you like to dictate in this presentation you are working now?" After providing the spoken output, the digital assistant receives a response from the user, for example, confirming that the user intent is to dictate in the presentation the user is currently working on.

5. Exemplary Functions of a Digital Assistant - Continuity APPENDIX

[0271] FIGs. 14A-14D, 15A-15D, 16A-16C, and 17A-17E illustrate functionalities of performing a task at a user device or a first electronic device using remotely located content by a digital assistant. In some examples, the digital assistant system (e.g., digital assistant system 700) is implemented by a user device (e.g., devices 1400, 1500, 1600, and 1700) according to various examples. In some examples, the user device, a server (e.g., server 108), or a combination thereof, may implement a digital assistant system (e.g., digital assistant system 700). The user device can be implemented using, for example, device 104, 200, or 400. In some examples, the user device can be a laptop computer, a desktop computer, or a tablet computer. The user device operates in a multi-tasking environment, such as a desktop environment.

[0272] With references to FIGs. 14A-14D, 15A-15D, 16A-16C, and 17A-17E, in some examples, a user device (e.g., devices 1400, 1500, 1600, and 1700) provides various user interfaces (e.g., user interfaces 1410, 1510, 1610, and 1710). Similar to those described above, the user device displays the various user interfaces on a display, and the various user interfaces enable the user to instantiate one or more processes (e.g., a movie process, a photo process, a web-browsing process).

[0273] As shown in FIGs. 14A-14D, 15A-15D, 16A-16C, and 17A-I7E, similar to those described above, the user device (e.g., devices 1400, 1500, 1600, and 1700) displays, on a user interface (e.g., user interfaces 1410, 1510, 1610, and 1710) an affordance (e.g., affordance 1440, 1540, 1640, and 1740) to instantiate a digital assistant service. Similar to those described above, in some examples, the digital assistant is instantiated in response to receiving a pre-determined phrase. In some examples, the digital assistant is instantiated in response to receiving a selection of the affordance.

[0274] With reference to FIGs. 14A-14D, 15A-15D, 16A-16C, and 17A-17E, in some embodiments, a digital assistant receives one or more speech inputs, such as speech inputs 1452, 1454, 1456, 1458, 1552, 1554, 1556, 1652, 1654, 1656, 1752, and 1756 from a user. The user may provide various speech inputs for the purpose of, for example, performing a task at the user device (e.g., devices 1400, 1500, 1600, and 1 700) or at a first electronic device (e.g., electronic devices 1420, 1520, 1530, 1522, 1532, 1620, 1622, 1630, 1720, and 1730) using remotely located content. Similar to those described above, in some examples, the digital assistant can APPENDIX receive speech inputs directly from the user at the user device or indirectly through another electronic device that is communicatively connected to the user device.

[0275] With reference to FIGs. 14A-14D, 15A-15D, 16A- 16C, and 17A-17E, in some embodiments, the digital assistant identifies context information associated with the user device. The context information includes, for example, user-specific data, sensor data, and user device configuration data. In some examples, the user-specific data includes log information indicating user preferences, the history of user's interaction with the user device (e.g., devices 1400, 1500, 1600, and 1700), and/or electronic devices communicative connected to the user device, or the like. For example, user- specific data indicates that the user recently took a self -portrait photo using an electronic device 1420 (e.g., a smartphone); that the user recently accessed a podcast, webcast, movie, song, audio book, or the like. In some examples, the sensor data includes various data collected by a sensor associated with the user device or other electronic devices. For example, the sensor data includes GPS location data indicating the physical location of the user device or electronic devices communicatively connected to the user device at any time point or during any time period. For example, the sensor data indicates that a photo stored in electronic device 1420 was taken at Hawaii. In some examples, the user device configuration data includes the current or historical device configurations. For example, the user device configuration data indicates that the user device is currently communicatively connected to some electronic devices but disconnected from other electronic devices. The electronic devices includes, for example, a smartphone, a set-top box, a tablet, or the like. As described in more detail below, the context information can be used in determining a user intent and/or in performing one or more tasks.

[0276] With reference to FIGs. 14A-14D, 15A-15D, 16A-16C, and 17A-17E, similar to those described above, in response to receiving a speech input, the digital assistant determines a user intent based on the speech input. The digital assistant determines the user intent based on a result of natural language processing. For example, the digital assistant identifies an actionable intent based on the user input, and generates a structured query to represent the identified actionable intent. The structured query includes one or more parameters associated with the actionable intent. The one or more parameters can be used to facilitate the performance of a task based on the actionable intent. For example, based on a speech input such as "show the selfie I APPENDIX just took," the digital assistant determines that the actionable intent is to display a photo, and the parameters include a self-portrait that the user recently took during the past few days. In some embodiments, the digital assistant further determines the user intent based on the speech input and context information. For example, the context information indicates that the user device is communicatively connected to the user's phone using a Bluetooth connection and indicates that a self-portrait photo was added to the user's phone two days ago. As a result, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to display a photo that is a self-portrait that was added to the user's phone two days ago. Determining the user intent based on speech input and context information is described in more detail below in various examples.

[0277] In some embodiments, in accordance with user intent, the digital assistant further determines whether the task is to be performed at the user device or at a first electronic device communicatively connected to the user device. Various examples of the determination are provided below in more detail with respect to FIGs. 14A-14D, 15A-15D, 16A-16C, and 17A- 17E.

[0278] With reference to FIG. 14A, in some examples, user device 1400 receives a speech input 1452 from a user to invoke the digital assistant. As shown in FIG. 14A, in some examples, the digital assistant is represented by affordances 1440 or 1441 displayed on user interface 1410. Speech input 1452 includes, for example, "Hey, Assistant." In response to speech input 1452, user device 1400 invokes the digital assistant such that the digital assistant actively monitors subsequent speech inputs. In some examples, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1472 indicating that it is invoked. For example, spoken output 1472 includes "Go ahead, I am listening." As shown in FIG. 14A, in some examples, user device 1400 is communicatively connected to one or more electronic devices such as electronic device 1420. Electronic device 1420 can communicate with user device 1400 using wired or wireless networks. For example, electronic device 1420 communicates with user device 1400 using Bluetooth connections such that voice and data (e.g., audio and video files) can be exchanged between the two devices.

[0279] With reference to FIG. 14B, in some examples, the digital assistant receives a speech input 1454 such as "Show me the selfie I just took using my phone on this device." Based on speech input 1454 and/or context information, the digital assistant determines the user intent. APPENDIX

For example, as shown in FIG. 14B, context information indicates that the user device 1400 is communicatively connected to electronic device 1420 using wired or wireless networks (e.g., a Bluetooth connection, a Wi-Fi connection, or the like). Context information also indicates that the user recently took a self-portrait, which is stored in electronic device 1420 with a name "seifieOOOl ." As a result, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to display the photo named seifieOOOl stored in electronic device 1420. Alternatively, the photo may have been tagged with photo recognition software as containing the user's face and be identified accordingly.

[0280] As described, in accordance with the user intent, the digital assistant further determines whether the task is to be performed at the user device or at a first electronic device communicatively connected to the user device. In some embodiments, determining whether the task is to be performed at the user device or at the first electronic device is based on one or more keywords included in the speech input. For example, the digital assistant determines that speech input 1454 includes keywords or a phrase such as "on this device," indicating the task is to be performed on user device 1400. As a result, the digital assistant determines that displaying the photo named seifieOOOl stored in electronic device 1420 is to be performed at user device 1400. User device 1400 and electronic device 1420 are different devices. For example, user device 1400 can be a laptop computer, and electronic device 1420 can be a phone.

[0281] In some embodiments, the digital assistant further determines whether the content associated with the performance of the task is located remotely. Content is located remotely if at or near the time the digital assistant determines which device is to perform the task, at least a portion of the content for performing the task is not stored in the device that is determined to perform the task. For example, as shown in FIG. 14B, at or near the time the digital assistant of user device 1400 determines that the user intent is to display the photo named seifieOOOl at user device 1400, the photo named seifieOOOl is not stored at user device 1400 and instead is stored at electronic device 1420 (e.g., a smartphone). Accordingly, the digital assistant determines that the photo is located remotely to user device 1400.

[0282] As illustrated in FIG. 14B, in some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the user device and content for performing the task is located APPENDIX remotely, the digital assistant of the user device receives the content for performing the task. In some examples, the digital assistant of the user device 1400 receives at least a portion of the content stored in the electronic device 1420. For example, to display the photo named selfieOOOl, the digital assistant of user device 1400 sends a request to electronic device 1420 to obtain the photo named selfieOOOl. Electronic device 1420 receives the request and, in response, transmits the photo named selfieOOOl to user device 1400. The digital assistant of user device 1400 then receives the photo named selfieOOOl .

[0283] As illustrated in FIG. 14B, in some embodiments, after receiving the remotelv located content, the digital assistant provides a response at the user device. In some examples, providing a response includes performing the task using the received content. For example, the digital assistant of user device 1400 displays a user interface 1442 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing a view 1443 of the photo named selfieOOOl . View 1443 can be a preview (e.g., a thumbnail), an icon, or a full view of the photo named selfieOOOl.

[0284] In some examples, providing a response includes providing a link that is associated with the task to be performed at the user device. A link enables instantiating of a process. As described, instantiating a process includes invoking the process if the process is not already running. If at least one instance of the process is running, instantiating a process includes executing an existing instance of the process or generating a new instance of the process. As shown in FIG. 14B, user interface 1442 may provide a link 1444 associated with view 1443 of the photo named selfieOOOl. Link 1444 enables, for example, instantiating a photo process to view a full representation of the photo or edit the photo. As an example, link 1444 is displayed on the side of view 1443. As another example, view 1443 can itself include or incorporate link 1444 such that a selection of view 1443 instantiates a photo process.

[0285] In some embodiments, providing a response includes providing one or more affordances that enable the user to further manipulate the results of the performance of the task. As shown in FIG. 14B, in some examples, the digital assistant provides affordances 1445 and 1446 on user interface 1442 (e.g., a snippet or a window). Affordance 1445 can include a button for adding a photo to an album, and affordance 1446 can include a button for canceling view 1443 of the photo. The user may select one or both of affordances 1445 and 1446. In response APPENDIX to the selection of affordance 1445, for example, a photo process adds the photo associated with view 1443 to an album. In response to the selection of affordance 1446, for example, a photo process removes view 1443 from user interface 1442.

[0286] In some embodiments, providing a response includes providing a spoken output according to the task to be performed at the user device. As illustrated in FIG. 14B, the digital assistant represented by affordances 1440 or 1441 provides a spoken output 1474 such as "'Here is the last selfie from your phone."

[0287] With reference to FIG. 14C, in some examples, based on a single speech

input/utterance and context information, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to perform a plurality of tasks. As shown in FIG. 14C, the digital assistant receives a speech input 1456 such as "Show me the selfie I just took using my phone on this device and set it as my wallpaper." Based on speech input 1456 and context information, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to perform a first task of displaying the photo named selfieOOO 1 stored at electronic device 1420 and performs a second task of setting the photo named selfieOOOl as the wallpaper. Thus, based on a single speech input 1456, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to perform multiple tasks.

[0288] In some embodiments, the digital assistant determines whether the plurality of tasks is to be performed at the user device or at an electronic device communicatively connected to the user device. For example, using the keywords "this device" included in speech input 1456, the digital assistant determines that the plurality of tasks is to be performed at user device 1400. Similar to those described above, the digital assistant further determines whether the content for performing at least one task is located remotely. For example, the digital assistant determines that the content for performing at least the first task (e.g., displaying the photo named selfieOOOl) is located remotely. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the plurality of tasks is to be performed at the user device and content for performing at least one task is located remotely, the digital assistant requests the content from another electronic device (e.g., electronic device 1420), receives the content for performing the tasks, and provides a response at the user device. APPENDIX

|Ό289] In some embodiments, providing a response includes performing the plurality of tasks. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 14C, providing a response includes performing the first task of displaying a view 1449 of the photo named selfieOOOl, and performing the second task of setting the photo named selfieOOOl as the wallpaper. In some examples, the digital assistant automatically configures the wallpaper to be the photo named selfiOOO 1 using a desktop settings configuration process. In some examples, the digital assistant provides a link to desktop settings 1450, enabling the user to manually configure the wallpaper using the photo named selfieOOOl. For example, the user may select the link to desktop settings 1450 by using an input device such as a mouse, a stylus, or a finger. Upon receiving the selection of the link to desktop setting 1450, the digital assistant initiates the desktop setting configuration process that enables the user to select the photo named selfieOOOl and set it as the wallpaper of user device 1400.

[029Θ] As illustrated in FIG. 14C, in some examples, the digital assistant initiates a dialog with the user and facilitates the configuration of the wallpaper in response to receiving a speech input from the user. For example, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1476 such as "Here is the last selfie from your phone. Set is as wallpaper?" The user provides a speech input such as "OK." Upon receiving the speech input, the digital assistant instantiates the desktop settings configuration process to configure the wallpaper as the photo named selfieOOO 1.

[0291] As described, in some examples, the digital assistant determines the user intent based on the speech input and context information. With reference to FIG. 14D, in some examples, the speech input may not include information sufficient to determine the user intent. For example, the speech input may not indicate the location of the content for performing the task. As shown in FIG. 14D, the digital assistant receives a speech input 1458 such as "Show me the selfie I just took." Speech input 1458 does not include one or more keywords indicating which photo is to be displayed or the location of the selfie to be displayed. As a result, the user intent may not be determined based solely on speech input 1458. In some examples, the digital assistant determines the user intent based on speech input 1458 and context information. For example, based on context information, the digital assistant determines that user device 1400 is communicatively connected to electronic device 1420. In some examples, the digital assistant instantiates a searching process to search for photos that the user recently took at user device 1400 and electronic device 1420. Based on the search result, the digital assistant determines that APPENDIX a photo named selfieOOOl is stored in electronic device 1420. Accordingly, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to display the photo named selfieOOOl located at electronic device 1420. In some examples, if the user intent cannot be determined based on the speech input and context information, the digital assistant initiates a dialog with the user to further clarify or disambiguate the user intent.

[0292] As illustrated in FIG. 14D, in some examples, the speech input may not include one or more keywords indicating whether a task is to be performed at the user device or at an electronic device communicatively connected to the user device. For example, speech input 1458 does not indicate whether the task of displaying the selfie is to be performed at user device 1400 or at electronic device 1420. In some examples, the digital assistant determines whether a task is to be performed at the user device or at an electronic device based on context information. As an example, the context information indicates that the digital assistant receives speech input 1458 at user device 1400, not at electronic device 1420. As a result, the digital assistant determines that the task of displaying the selfie is to be performed at user device 1400. As another example, context information indicates that a photo is to be displayed on electronic device 1420 according to user preferences. As a result, the digital assistant determines that the task of displaying the selfie is to be performed at electronic device 1420. It is appreciated that the digital assistant can determine whether a task is to be performed at the user device or at an electronic device based on any context information.

[0293] With reference to FIG. 15 A, in some embodiments, a digital assistant determines that the task is to be performed at an electronic device (e.g., electronic device 1520 and/or 1530) communicatively connected to the user device (e.g., user device 1500) and determine that the content is located remotely to the electronic device. As shown in FIG. 15 A, in some examples, the digital assistant receives a speech input 1552 such as "Play this movie on my TV." As described, the digital assi stant can determine the user intent based on speech input 1552 and context information. For example, context information indicates that user interface 1542 is displaying a movie named ABC.mov. As a result, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to play the movie named ABC.mov. APPENDIX

[0294] In accordance with the user intent, the digital assistant furthers determine whether the task is to be performed at the user device or at a first electronic device communicatively connected to the user device. In some embodiments, determining whether the task is to be performed at the user device or at the first electronic device is based on one or more keywords included in the speech input. For example, speech input 1552 includes the words or phrase "on my TV." In some examples, context information indicates that user device 1500 is connected to a set-top bo 1520 and/or a TV 1530 using, for example, a wired connection, a Bluetooth connection, or a Wi-Fi connection. As a result, the digital assistant determines that the task of playing the movie named ABC.mov is to be performed on set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530.

[0295] In some embodiments, the digital assistant further determines whether the content associated with the performance of the task is located remotely. As described, content is located remotely if at or near the time the digital assistant determines which device is to perform the task, at least a portion of the content for performing the task is not stored in the device that is determined to perform the task. For example, as shown in FIG. 15 A, at or near the time the digital assistant of user device 1500 determines that movie ABC.mov is to be played at set-top box 1520 and/or TV1530, at least a portion of the movie ABC.mov is stored at user device 1500 (e.g., a laptop computer) and/or a server (not shown) and is not stored at set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530. Accordingly, the digital assistant determines that the movie ABC.mov is located remotely to set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530.

[0296] With reference to FIG. 15B, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the first electronic device (e.g., set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530) and the content for performing the task is located remotely to the first electronic device, the digital assistant of the user device provides the content to the first electronic device to perform the task. For example, to play the movie ABC.mov on set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530, the digital assistant of user device 1500 transmits at least a portion of the movie ABC.mov to set-ίορ box 1520 and/or TV 1530.

[0297] In some examples, instead of providing the content from the user device, the digital assistant of the user device causes at least a portion of the content to be provided from another electronic device (e.g., a server) to the first electronic device to perform the task. For example, APPENDIX the movie ABC.mov is stored in a server (not shown) and not at user device 1500. As a result, the digital assistant of user device 1500 causes at least a portion of the movie named ABC.mov to be transmitted from the server to set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530. In some examples, the content for performing the task is provided to set-top box 1520, which then transmits the content to TV 1530. In some examples, the content for performing the task is provided to TV 1530 directly.

[0298] As illustrated in FIG. 15B, in some examples, after the content is provided to the first electronic device (e.g., set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530), the digital assistant of user device 1500 provides a response at user device 1500. In some examples, providing the response includes causing the task to be performed at set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530 using the content. For example, the digital assistant of user device 1500 sends a request to set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530 to initiate a multimedia process to play the movie ABC.mov. In response to the request, set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530 initiates the multimedia process to play the movie ABC.mov.

[0299] In some examples, the task to be performed at the first electronic device (e.g., set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530) is a continuation of a task performed remotely to the first electronic device. For example, as illustrated in FIGs. ISA and 15B, the digital assistant of user device 1500 has caused a multimedia process of user device 1500 to play a portion of the movie ABC.mov at user device 1500. In accordance with the determination that the user intent is to play the movie ABC.mov at the first electronic device (e.g., set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1530), the digital assistant of user device 1500 causes the first electronic device to continue playing the rest of the movie ABC.mov rather than start playing from the beginning. As a result, the digital assistant of user device 1500 enables the user to continuously watch the movie.

[0300] As illustrated in FIG. 15B, in some embodiments, providing a response includes providing one or more affordances that enable the user to further manipulate the results of the performance of the task. As shown in FIG. 15B, in some examples, the digital assistant provides affordances 1 547 and 1 548 on a user interface 1544 (e.g., a snippet or a window). Affordance 1547 can be a button for cancelling the playing of movie ABC.mov on the first electronic device (e.g., set-top box 1520 and/or TV 1 530). Affordance 1548 can be a button to pause or resume APPENDIX the playing of movie ABC.mov that is playing on the first electronic device. The user may select affordance 1547 or 1548 using an input device such as a mouse, a stylus, or a finger. Upon receiving a selection of affordance 1547, for example, the digital assistant causes the playing of movie ABC.mov on the first electronic device to stop. In some examples, after the playing on the first electronic device stops, the digital assistant also causes the playing of movie ABC.mov on user device 1500 to resume. Upon receiving a selection of affordance 1548, for example, the digital assistant causes the playing of movie ABC.mov on the first electronic device to pause or resume.

[0301] In some embodiments, providing a response includes providing a spoken output according to the task to be performed at the first electronic device. As illustrated in FIG. 15B, the digital assistant represented by affordance 1540 or 1541 provides a spoken output 1572 such as "Playing your movie on TV."

[0302] As described, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at a first electronic device and the content for performing the task is located remotely to the first electronic device, the digital assistant provides the content for performing the task to the first electronic device. With reference to FIG. 15C, the content for performing the task can include, for example, a document (e.g., document 1560) or location information. For instance, the digital assistant of user device 1500 receives a speech input 1556 such as "Open this pdf on my tablet." The digital assistant determines that the user intent is to perform a task of displaying document 1560 and determines that the task is to be performed at a tablet 1532 that is communicatively connected to user device 1500. As a result, the digital assistant provides document 1560 to tablet 1532 to be displayed. As another example, the digital assistant of user device 1500 receives a speech input 1554 such as "Send this location to my phone." The digital assistant determines that the user intent is to perform a task of navigation using the location information and determines that the task is to be performed at phone 1522 (e.g., a smartphone) that is

communicatively connected to user device 1500. As a result, the digital assistant provides location information (e.g., 1234 Main St.) to phone 1522 to perform the task of navigation.

[0303] As described, in some examples, after providing the content for performing the task to the first electronic device, the digital assistant provides a response at the user device. In some APPENDIX embodiments, providing the response includes causing the task to be performed at the first electronic device. For example, as shown in FIG. 15D, the digital assistant of user device 1500 transmits a request to phone 1522 to perform the task of navigating to the location 1234 Main St. The digital assistant of user device 1500 further transmits a request to tablet 1532 to perform the task of displaying document 1560. In some examples, providing the response at the user device includes providing a spoken output according to the task to be performed at the first electronic device. As illustrated in FIG. 15D, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1574 such as "Showing the pdf on your tablet" and a spoken output 1576 such as "navigating to 1234 Main St on your phone."

[0304] As described, in some examples, the speech input may not include one or more keywords indicating whether a task is to be performed at the user device or at a first electronic device communicatively connected to the user device. With reference to FIG. 16A, for example, the digital assistant receives a speech input 1652 such as "Play this movie." Speech input 1652 does not indicate whether the task of playing the movie is to be performed at user device 1600 or at a first electronic device (e.g., set-top box 1620 and/or TV 1630, phone 1622, or tablet 1632).

[0305] In some embodiments, to determine whether the task is to be performed at the user device or at a first electronic device, the digital assistant of the user device determines whether performing the task at the user device satisfies performance criteria. Performance criteria facilitate evaluating the performance of the task. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 16A, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to perform the tasking of playing the movie ABC.mov. Performance criteria for playing a movie include, for example, the quality criteria of playing a movie (e.g., 480p, 720p, 1080p), the smoothness criteria of playing the movie (e.g., no delay or waiting), the screen size criteria (e.g., a minimum screen size of 48 inches), the sound effect criteria (e.g., stereo sounds, number of speakers), or the like. The performance criteria can be pre-configured and/or dynamically updated. In some examples, the performance criteria are determined based on context information such as user-specific data (e.g., user preferences), device configuration data (e.g., screen resolution and size of the electronic devices), or the like.

[0306] In some examples, the digital assistant of user device 1600 determines that performing the task at the user device satisfies the performance criteria. For example, as APPENDIX illustrated in FIG. 16A, user device 1600 may have a screen resolution, a screen size, and sound effect that satisfy the performance criteria of playing the movie ABC.mov, which may be a low- resolution online video. In accordance with a determination that performing the task at user device 1600 satisfies the performance criteria, the digital assistant determines that the task is to be performed at user device 1600.

[0307] In some examples, the digital assistant of user device 1600 determines that performing the task at the user device does not satisfy the performance criteria. For example, user device 1600 may not have the screen size, the resolution, and/or the sound effect to satisfy the performance criteria of playing the movie ABC.mov, which may be a high-resolution Blu-ray video. In some examples, in accordance with a determination that performing the task at the user device does not satisfy the performance criteria, the digital assistant of user device 1600 determines whether performing the task at the first electronic device satisfies the performance criteria. As illustrated in FIG. 16B, the digital assistant of user device 1600 determines that performing the task of playing the movie ABC.mov at set-top box 1620 and/or TV 1630 satisfies the performance criteria. For example, set-top box 1620 and/or TV 1630 may have a screen size of 52 inches, may have a 1080p resolution, and may have eight speakers connected. As a result, the digital assistant determines that the task is to be performed at set-top box 1620 and/or TV 1630.

[0308] In some examples, the digital assistant of user device 1600 determines that performing the task at the first electronic device does not satisfy the performance criteria. In accordance with the determination, the digital assistant determines whether performing the task at the second electronic device satisfies the performance criteria. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 16B, TV 1630 may have a screen resolution (e.g., 720p) that does not satisfy the performance criteria (e.g., 1080p). As a result, the digital assistant determines whether any one of phone 1622 (e.g., a smartphone) or tablet 1632 satisfies the performance criteria.

[0309] In some examples, the digital assistant determines which device provides the optimum performance of the task. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 16B, the digital assistant evaluates or estimates the performance of the task of playing movie ABC.mov on each of user device 1600, set-top box 1620 and TV 1630, phone 1622, and tablet 1632. Based on the APPENDIX evaluation or estimation, the digital assistant determines whether performing the task at one device (e.g., user device 1600) is better than at another device (e.g., phone 1622) and determines a device for optimum performance.

[0310] As described, in some examples, in accordance with the determination of a device for performing the task, the digital assistant provides a response at user device 1600. In some embodiments, providing a response includes providing a spoken output according to the task to be performed at the device. As illustrated in FIG. 16B, the digital assistant represented by affordances 1640 or 1641 provides a spoken output 1672 such as "I will play this movie on your TV, proceed?" In some examples, the digital assistant receives a speech input 1654 such as "OK" from the user. In response, the digital assistant causes the movie ABC.mov to be played at, for example, set-top box 1620 and TV 1630 and provides a spoken output 1674 such as "Playing your movie on your TV."

[0311] In some examples, providing a response includes providing one or more affordances that enable the user to select another electronic device for performance of the task. As illustrated in FIG. 16B, for example, the digital assistant provides affordances 1655A-B (e.g., a cancel button and a tablet button). Affordance 1655 A enables the user to cancel playing the movie ABC.mov at set-top box 1620 and TV 1630. Affordance 1655B enables the user to select tablet 1632 to continue playing the movie ABC.mov.

[0312] With reference to FIG. 16C, in some embodiments, to determine a device for performing a task, the digital assistant of user device 1600 initiates a dialog with the user. For example, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1676 such as "Should I play your movie on the TV or on the tablet?" The user provides a speech input 1656 such as "On my tablet." Upon receiving speech input 1656, the digital assistant determines that the task of playing the movie is to be performed at tablet 1632, which is communicatively connected to user device 1600. In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output 1678 such as "Playing your movie on your tablet."

[0313] With reference to FIG. 17 A, in some embodiments, a digital assistant of a user device 1700 continues to perform a task that was partially performed remotely at a first electronic device. In some embodiments, the digital assistant of a user device continues to perform the task APPENDIX using content received from a third electronic device. As illustrated in FIG. 17A, in some examples, phone 1720 may have been performing a task of flight booking using content from a third electronic device such as a server 1730. For example, the user may have been using phone 1720 to book flights from Kayak.com. As a result, phone 1720 receives content transmitted from server 1730 that is associated with Kayak.com. In some examples, the user may be interrupted while booking his or her flight on phone 1720 and may desire to continue the flight booking using user device 1700. In some examples, the user may desire to continue the flight booking simply because using user device 1700 is more convenient. Accordingly, the user may provide a speech input 1752 such as "Continue the flight booking on Kayak from my phone."

[0314] With reference to FIG. Γ7Β, upon receiving speech input 1752, the digital assistant determines the user intent is to perform a task of flight booking. In some examples, the digital assistant further determines that the task is to be performed at user device 1700 based on context information. For example, the digital assistant determines that speech input 1752 is received at user device 1700 and therefore determines that the task is to be performed at user device 1700. In some examples, the digital assistant further uses context information such as user preferences (e.g., user device 1700 is used frequently in the past for flight booking) to determine that the task is to be performed at user device 1700.

[0315] As shown in FIG. 17B, in accordance with the determination that the task is to be performed at the user device 1700, and the content for performing the task is located remotely, the digital assistant receives the content for performing the task. In some examples, the digital assistant receives the at least a portion of the content from phone 1720 (e.g., a smartphone) and/or at least a portion of the content from server 1730. For example, the digital assistant receives data representing the status of flight booking from phone 1720 such that user device 1700 can continue the flight booking. In some examples, the data representing the status of flight booking is stored at server 1730, such as a server associated with Kayak.com. The digital assistant thus receives data from server 1730 for continuing the flight booking.

[0316] As illustrated in FIG. 17B, after receiving the content from phone 1720 and/or server 1730, the digital assistant provides a response at user device 1700. In some examples, providing the response includes continuing to perform the task of flight booking that was partially APPENDIX Attorney Docket No.: 770002000700 (P30493US1) performed remotely at phone 1720. For example, the digital assistant displays a user interface 1742 enabling the user to continue booking the flight on Kayak.com. In some examples, providing the response includes providing a link associated with the task to be performed at user device 1700. For example, the digital assistant displays a user interface 1742 (e.g., a snippet or a window) providing the current status of flight booking (e.g., showing available flights). User interface 1742 also provides a link 1744 (e.g., a link to a web browser) for continuing performing the task of flight booking. In some embodiments, the digital assistant also provides a spoken output 1772 such as "Here is the booking on Kayak. Continue in your web browser?"

[0317] As shown in FIGs. 17B and 17C, for example, if the user selects link 1744, the digital assistant instantiates a web browsing process and displays a user interface 1746 (e.g., a snippet or a window) for continuing the flight booking task. In some examples, in response to spoken output 1772, the user provides a speech input 1756 such as "OK" confirming that the user desires to continue flight book using a web browser of user device 1700. Upon receiving speech input 1756, the digital assistant instantiates a web browsing process and displays user interface 1746 (e.g., a snippet or a window) for continuing the flight booking task.

[0318] With reference to FIG. 17D, in some embodiments, a digital assistant of a user device 1700 continues to perform a task that was partially performed remotely at a first electronic device. In some embodiments, the digital assistant of the user device continues to perform the task using content received from the first electronic device, rather than a third electronic device such as a server. As illustrated in FIG. 17D, in some examples, the first electronic device (e.g., phone 1720 or tablet 1732) may have been performing a task. For example, the user may have been using phone 1720 to compose an email or using tablet 1732 to edit a document such as a photo. In some examples, the user is interrupted while using phone 1720 or tablet 1732, and/or desires to continue the performance of the task using user device 1700. In some examples, the user may desire to continue the performance of the task simply because using user device 1700 is more convenient (e.g., a larger screen). Accordingly, the user may provide a speech input 1758 such as "Open the document I was just editing" or speech input 1759 suc as "Open the email I was just drafting." APPENDIX

[0319] With reference to FIG. 17D, upon receiving speech input 1758 or 1759, the digital assistant determines the user intent is to perform a task of editing a document or composing an email. Similar to those described above, in some examples, the digital assistant further determines that the task is to be performed at user device 1700 based on context information, and determines that the content for performing the task is located remotely. Similar to described above, in some examples, the digital assistant determines, based on context information (e.g., user-specific data), that the content is located remotely at the first electronic device (e.g., at phone 1720 or tablet 1732), rather than at a server. As shown in FIG. I7D, in accordance with the determination that the task is to be performed at the user device 1700 and the content for performing the task is located remotely, the digital assistant receives the content for performing the task. In some examples, the digital assistant receives the at least a portion of the content from phone 1720 (e.g., a smartphone) and/or at least a portion of the content from tablet 1730. After receiving the content from phone 1720 and/or tablet 1732, the digital assistant provides a response at user device 1700, such as displaying a user interface 1748 for the user to continue editing the document and/or displaying a user interface 1749 for the user to continue composing the email. It is appreciated that the digital assistant of user device 1700 can also cause a first electronic device to continue performing a task that was partially performed remotely at the user device 1700. For example, the user may be composing an email on user device 1700 and may need to leave. The user provides a speech input such as "Open the email I was drafting on my phone." Based on the speech input, the digital assistant determines the user intent is to continue performing the task on phone 1720 and the content is located remotely at the user device 1700. In some examples, the digital assistant provides the content for performing the task to the first electronic device and causes the first electronic device to continue performing the task, similar to those described above.

[0320] With reference to FIG. 17E, in some embodiments, continuing to performing a task is based on context information that is shared or synchronized among a plurality of devices including, for example, user device 1700 and first electronic device (e.g., phone 1720). As described, in some examples, the digital assistant determines a user intent based on the speech input and context information. The context information can be stored locally or remotely. For example, as shown in FIG. 17E, the user provides a speech input 1760 such as "What is the weather like in New York?" to phone 1720. A digital assistant of phone 1720 determines the APPENDIX user intent, performs the task to obtain the weather information in New York, and displays the weather information of New York on a user interface of phone 1720. The user subsequently provides a speech input 1761 such as "How about in Los Angeles?" to user device 1700. In some examples, the digital assistant of user device 1700 determines the user intent using context information stored at and/or shared by phone 1720, either directly or through a server. The context information includes, for example, historical user data associated with phone 1720, conversational state, system state, etc. Both the historical user data and conversational state indicate that user was inquiring about weather information. Accordingly, the digital assistant of user device 1700 determines that the user intent is to obtain the weather information in Los Angeles. Based on the user intent, the digital assistant of user device 1700 receives the weather information from, for example, a server, and provides a user interface 1751 displaying the weather information on user device 1710.

6. Exemplary Functions of a Digital Assistant - Voice-enabled System Configuration

Management

[0321] FIGs. 18A-18F and 19A-19D illustrate functionalities of providing system

configuration information or performing a task in response to a user request by a digital assistant. In some examples, the digital assistant system (e.g., digital assistant system 700) can be implemented by a user device according to various examples. In some examples, the user device, a server (e.g., server 108), or a combination thereof, may implement a digital assistant system (e.g., digital assistant system 700). The user device is implemented using, for example, device 104, 200, or 400. In some examples, the user device is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, or a tablet computer. The user device operates in a multi-tasking environment, such as a desktop environment.

[0322] With references to FIGs. 18A-18F and 19A-19D, in some examples, a user device provides various user interfaces (e.g., user interfaces 1810 and 1910). Similar to those described above, the user device displays the various user interfaces on a display and the various user interfaces enable the user to instantiate one or more processes (e.g., system configuration processes). APPENDIX

[0323] As shown in FIGs. 18A-18F and 19A-19D, similar to those described above, the user device displays, on a user interface (e.g., user interfaces 1810 and 1910), an affordance (e.g., affordance 1840 and 1940) to facilitate the instantiation of a digital assistant service.

[0324] Similar- to those described above, in some examples, the digital assistant is instantiated in response to receiving a pre-determined phrase. In some examples, the digital assistant is instantiated in response to receiving a selection of the affordance.

[0325] With reference to FIGs. 18A-18F and 19A-19D, in some embodiments, a digital assistant receives one or more speech inputs, such as speech inputs 1852, 1854, 1856, 1858, 1860, 1862, 1952, 1954, 1956, and 1958 from a user. The user provides various speech inputs for the purpose of managing one or more system configurations of the user device. The system configurations can include audio configurations, date and time configurations, dictation configuration, display configurations, input device configurations, notification configurations, printing configurations, security configurations, backup configurations, application

configurations, user interface configurations, or the like. To manage audio configurations, a speech input may include "Mute my microphone," "Turn the volume all the up," "Turn the volume up 10%," or the like. To manage date and time configurations, a speech input may include "What is my time zone?", "Change my time zone to Cupertino Time," " Add a clock for London time zone," or the like. To manage dictation configurations, a speech input may include "Turn on dictation," "Turn off dictation," "Dictation in Chinese," "Enable advanced commands," or the like. To manage display configurations, a speech input may include "Make my screen brighter," "Increase the contrast my 20%," "Extend my screen to a second monitor," "Mirror my display," or the like. To manage input device configurations, a speech input may include "Connect my Bluetooth keyboard," "Make my mouse pointer bigger," or the like. To manage network configurations, a speech input may include "Turn Wi-Fi on," "Turn Wi-Fi off," "Which Wi-Fi network am I connected to?", "Am I connected to my phone?", or the like. To manage notification configuration, a speech input may include "Turn on Do not D sturb," "Stop showing me these notifications," "Show only new emails," "No alert for text message," or the like. To manage printing configurations, a speech input may include "Does my printer have enough ink?", "Is my printer connected?", or the like. To manage security configurations, a speech input may include "Change password for John's account," "Turn on firewall," "Disable cookie," or the APPENDIX like. To manage backup configurations, a speech input may include "Run backup now," "Set backup interval to once a month," "Recover the July 4 backup of last year," or the like. To manage application configurations, a speech input may include "Change my default web browser to Safari," "Automatically log in to Messages application each time I sign in," or the like. To manage user interface configurations, a speech input may include "Change my desktop wallpapers," "Hide the dock," "Add Evernote to the Dock," or the like. Various examples of using speech inputs to manage system configurations are described below in more details.

[0326] Similar- to those described above, in some examples, the digital assistant receives speech inputs directly from the user at the user device or indirectly through another electronic device that is communicatively connected to the user device.

[0327] With reference to FIGs. 18A-18F and 19A-19D, in some embodiments, the digital assistant identifies context information associated with the user device. The context information includes, for example, user-specific data, sensor data, and user device configuration data. In some examples, the user-specific data includes log information indicating user preferences, the history of user's interaction with the user device, or the like. For example, user-specific data indicates the last time the user's system was backed up; and that the user's preferences of a particular Wi-Fi network when several Wi-Fi networks are available or the like. In some examples, the sensor data includes various data collected by a sensor. For example, the sensor data indicates a printer ink level collected by a printer ink level sensor. In some examples, the user device configuration data includes the current and historical device configurations. For example, the user device configuration data indicates that the user device is currently

communicatively connecied to one or more electronic devices using Bluetooth connections. The electronic devices may include, for example, a smartphone, a set-top box, a tablet, or the like. As described in more detail below, the user device can determine user intent and/or perform one or more processes using the context information.

[0328] With reference to FIGs. 18A-18F and 19A-19D, similar to those described above, in response to receiving a speech input, the digital assistant determines a user intent based on the speech input. The digital assistant determines the user intent based on a result of natural language processing. For example, the digital assistant identifies an actionable intent based on APPENDIX the user input, and generates a structured query to represent the identified actionable intent. The structured query includes one or more parameters associated with the actionable intent. The one or more parameters can be used to facilitate the performance of a task based on the actionable intent. For example, based on a speech input such as "Turn the volume up by 10%," the digital assistant determines that the actionable intent is to adjust the system volume, and the parameters include setting the volume to be 10% higher than the current volume level. In some

embodiments, the digital assistant also determines the user intent based on the speech input and context information. For example, the context information may indicate that the current volume of the user device is at 50%. As a result, upon receiving the speech input such as "Turn the volume up by 10%," the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to increase the volume level to 60%. Determining the user intent based on speech input and context information is described in more detail below in various examples.

[0329] In some embodiments, the digital assistant further determines whether the user intent indicates an informational request or a request for performing a task. Various examples of the determination are provided below in more detail with respect to FIGs. 18A-18F and 19A-19D.

[033Θ] With reference to FIG. 18A, in some examples, the user device displays a user interface 1832 associated with performing a task. For example, the task includes composing a meeting invitation. In composing the meeting invitation, the user may desire to know the time zone of the user device so that the meeting invitation can be properly composed. In some examples, the user provides a speech input 1852 to invoke the digital assistant represented by affordance 1840 or 1841. Speech input 1852 includes, for example, "Hey, Assistant." The user device receives the speech input 1852 and, in response, invokes the digital assistant such that the digital assistant actively monitors subsequent speech inputs. In some examples, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1872 indicating that it is invoked. For example, spoken output 1872 includes "Go ahead, I am listening."

[0331] With reference to FIG. 18B, in some examples, the user provides a speech input 1854 such as "What is my time zone?" The digital assistant determines that the user intent is to obtain the time zone of the user device. The digital assistant further determines whether the user intent indicates an informational request or a request for performing a task. In some examples, APPENDIX determining whether the user intent indicates an informational request or a request for performing a task includes determining whether the user intent is to vary a system configuration. For example, based on the determination that the user intent is to obtain the time zone of the user device, the digital assistant determines that no system configuration is to be varied. As a result, the digital assistant determines that the user intent indicates an informational request.

[0332] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates an informational request, the digital assistant provides a spoken response to the informational request. In some examples, the digital assistant obtains status of one or more system configurations according to the informational request, and provides the spoken response according to the status of one or more system configurations. As shown in FIG. 18B, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to obtain the time zone of the user device, and this user intent indicates an informational request. Accordingly, the digital assistant obtains the time zone status from the time and date configuration of the user device. The time zone status indicates, for example, the user device is set to the Pacific time zone. Based on the time zone status, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1874 such as "Your computer is set to Pacific Standard Time." In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a link associated with the informational request. As illustrated in FIG. 18B, the digital assistant provides a link 1834, enabling the user to further manage the data and time configurations. In some examples, the user uses an input device (e.g., a mouse) to select link 1834. Upon receiving the user's selection of link 1834, the digital assistant instantiates a date and time configuration process and displays an associated date and time configuration user interface. The user can thus use the date and time configuration user interface to further manage the date and time configurations.

[0333] With reference to FIG. 18C, in some examples, the user device displays a user interface 1836 associated with performing a task. For example, the task includes playing a video (e.g., ABC.mov). To enhance the experience of watching the video, the user may desire to use a speaker and may want to know whether a Bluetooth speaker is connected. In some examples, the user provides a speech input 1856 such as "Is my Bluetooth speaker connected?" The digital assistant determines that the user intent is to obtain the connection status of the Bluetooth speaker 1820. The digital assistant further determines that obtaining the connection status of the APPENDIX

Bluet ooth speaker 1820 does not vary any system configuration and therefore is an informational request.

[0334J In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates an informational request, the digital assistant obtains status of system configurations according to the informational request, and provides the spoken response according to the status of the system configurations. As shown in FIG. 18C, the digital assistant obtains the connection status from the network configuration of the user device. The connection status indicates, for example, user device 1800 is not connected to a Bluetooth speaker 1820. Based on the connection status, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1876 such as "No, it is not connected, you can check Bluetooth devices in the network configurations." In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a link associated with the informational request. As illustrated in FIG. I SC, the digital assistant provides a link 1838, enabling the user to further manage the network configurations. In some examples, the user uses an input device (e.g., a mouse) to select link 1838. Upon receiving the user's selection of link 1838, the digital assistant instantiates a network configuration process and displays an associated network configuration user interface. The user can thus use the network configuration user interface to further manage the network configurations.

[0335] With reference to FIG. 18D, in some examples, the user device displays a user interface 1842 associated with performing a task. For example, the task includes viewing and/or editing a document. The user may desire to print out the document and may want to know whether a printer 1830 has enough ink for the printing job. In some examples, the user provides a speech input 1 858 such as "Does my printer have enough ink?" The digital assistant determines that the user intent is to obtain printer ink level status of the printer. The digital assistant further determines that the obtaining the printer level status does not vary any system configuration and therefore is an informational request.

[0336] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates an informational request, the digital assistant obtains status of system configurations according to the informational request, and provides the spoken response according to the status of the system configurations. As shown in FIG. 18D, the digital assistant obtains the printer ink APPENDIX level status from the printing configuration of the user device. The printer ink level status indicates, for example, the printer ink level of printer 1830 is at 50%. Based on the connection status, the digital assistant provides a spoken output 1878 such as "Yes, your printer has enough ink. You can also look up printer supply levels in the printer configurations." In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a link associated with the informational request. As illustrated in FIG. I8D, the digital assistant provides a link 1844, enabling the user to further manage the printer configurations. In some examples, the user uses an input device (e.g., a mouse) to select link 1844. Upon receiving the user's selection of the link, the digital assistant instantiates a printer configuration process and displays an associated printer configuration user interface. The user can thus use the printer configuration user interface to further manage the printer configurations.

[0337] With reference to FIG. 18E, in some examples, the user device displays a user interface 1846 associated with performing a task. For example, the task includes browsing Internet using a web browser (e.g., Safari). To browse the Internet, the user may desire to know available Wi-Fi networks and select one Wi-Fi network to connect. In some examples, the user provides a speech input 1860 such as "Which Wi-Fi networks are available?" The digital assistant determines that the user intent is to obtain a list of available Wi-Fi networks. The digital assistant further determines that obtaining the list of available Wi-Fi networks does not vary any system configuration and therefore is an informational request.

[0338] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates an informational request, the digital assistant obtains status of system configurations according to the informational request, and provides the spoken response according to the status of the system configurations. As shown in FIG. 18E, the digital assistant obtains status of currently available Wi-Fi networks from the network configuration of the user device. The status of currently available Wi-Fi networks indicates, for example, Wi-Fi network 1, Wi-Fi network 2, and Wi-Fi network 3 are available. In some examples, the status further indicates the signal strength of each of the Wi-Fi networks. The digital assistant displays a user interface 1845 providing information according to the status. For example, user interface 1845 provides the list of available Wi-Fi networks. The digital assistant also provides a spoken output 1880 such as "Here is a list of available Wi-Fi networks." In some examples, the digital assistant APPENDIX further provides a link associated with the informational request. As illustrated in FIG. 18E, the digital assistant provides a link 1847, enabling the user to further manage the network configurations. In some examples, the user uses an input device (e.g., a mouse) to select link 1847. Upon receiving the user's selection of the link 1847, the digital assistant instantiates a network configuration process and displays an associated network configuration user interface. The user can thus use the network configuration user interface to further manage the configurations.

[0339] With reference to FIG. 18F, in some examples, the user device displays a user interface 1890 associated with performing a task. For example, the task includes preparing a meeting agenda. In preparing a meeting agenda, the user may desire to find a date and time for the meeting. In some examples, the user provides a speech input 1862 such as "Find a time on my calendar for next Tuesday's meeting in the morning." The digital assistant determines that the user intent is to find an available time slot on the user's calendar on Tuesday morning. The digital assistant further determines that finding a time slot does not vary any system

configuration and therefore is an informational request.

[034Θ] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates an informational request, the digital assistant obtains status of system configurations according to the informational request, and provides the spoken response according to the status of the system configurations. As shown in FIG. I8F, the digital assistant obtains status of user's calendar from calendar configurations. The status of user's calendar indicates, for example, 9a.m. or 11a.m. on Tuesday is still available. The digital assistant displays a user interface 1891 providing information according to the status. For example, user interface 1 891 provides the user's calendar in the proximity of the da e and time the user requested. In some examples, the digital assistant also provides a spoken output 1882 such as "It looks like Tuesday 9a.m. or l la.m is available." In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a link associated with the informational request. As illustrated in FIG. 18F, the digital assistant provides a link 1849, enabling the user to further manage the calendar configurations. In some examples, the user uses an input device (e.g., a mouse) to select link 1849. Upon receiving the user's selection of link 1849, the digital assistant instantiates a calendar configuration process and displays an APPENDIX associated calendar configuration user interface. The user can thus use the calendar

configuration user interface to further manage the configurations.

[0341] With reference to FIG. 19A, the user device displays a user interface 1932 associated with performing a task. For example, the task includes playing a video (e.g., ABC.mov). While the video is playing, the user may desire to turn up the volume. In some examples, the user provides a speech input 1952 such as "Turn the volume all the way up." The digital assistant determines that the user intent is to increase the volume to its maximum level. The digital assistant further determines whether the user intent indicates an informational request or a request for performing a task. For example, based on the determination that the user intent is to increase the volume of the user device, the digital assistant determines that an audio

configuration is to be varied, and therefore the user intent indicates a request for performing a task.

[0342] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates a request for performing a task, the digital assistant instantiates a process associated with the user device to perform the task. Instantiating a process includes invoking the process if the process is not already running. If at least one instance of the process is running, instantiating a process includes executing an existing instance of the process or generating a new instance of the process. For example, instantiating an audio configuration process includes invoking the audio configuration process, using an existing audio configuration process, or generating a new instance of the audio configuration process. In some examples, instantiating a process includes performing the task using the process. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 19 A, in accordance with the user intent to increase the volume to its maximum level, the digital assistant instantiates an audio configuration process to set the volume to its maximum level. In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output 1972 such as "OK, I turned the volume all the way up."

[0343] With reference to FIG. 19B, the user device displays a user interface 1934 associated with performing a task. For example, the task includes viewing or editing a document. The user may desire to lower the screen brightness for eye protection. In some examples, the user provides a speech input 1954 such as "Set my screen brightness to 10% lower." The digital APPENDIX assistant determines the user intent based on speech input 1954 and context information. For example, context information indicates that the current brightness configuration is at 90%. As a result, the digital assistant determines that the user intent is to reduce the brightness level from 90% to 80%. The digital assistant further determines whether the user intent indicates an informational request or a request for performing a task. For example, based on the

determination that the user intent is to change the screen brightness to 80%, the digital assistant determines that a display configuration is to be varied, and therefore the user intent indicates a request for performing a task.

[0344] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates a request for performing a task, the digital assistant instantiates a process to perform the task. For example, as illustrated in FIG. I9B, in accordance with the user intent to change the brightness level, the digital assistant instantiates a display configuration process to reduce the brightness level to 80%. In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output 1974 such as 'OK, I turned your screen brightness to 80%." In some examples, as illustrated in FIG. 19B, the digital assistant provides an affordance 1936 enabling the user to manipulate a result of performing the task. For example, affordance 1936 can be a sliding bar allowing the user to further change the brightness level.

[0345] With reference to FIG. I9C, the user device displays a user interface 1938 associated with performing a task. For example, the task includes providing one or more notifications. A notification can include an alert of an email, a message, a reminder, or the like. In some examples, notifications are provided in user interface 1938. A notification can be displayed or provided to the user in real time or shortly after it is available at the user device. For example, a notification appears on user interface 1938 and/or user interface 19.10 shorted after the user device receives it. Sometimes, the user may be performing an important task (e.g., editing a document) and may not want to be disturbed by the notifications. In some examples, the user provides a speech input 1956 such as "Don ^' t notify me about incoming emails." The digital assistant determines that the user intent is to turn off the alert of emails. Based on the determination that the user intent is to turn off the alert of incoming emails, the digital assistant determines that a notification configuration is to be varied, and therefore the user intent indicates a request for performing a task. APPENDIX

[0346] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates a request for performing a task, the digital assistant instantiates a process to perform the task. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 19C, in accordance with the user intent, the digital assistant instantiates a notification configuration process to turn off the alert of emails. In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output 1976 such as "OK, I turned off notifications for mail." In some examples, as illustrated in FIG. 19C, the digital assistant provides a user interface 1942 (e.g., a snippet or a window) enabling the user to manipulate a result of performing the task. For example, user interface 1942 provides an affordance 1943 (e.g., a cancel button). If the user desires to continue receiving notification of emails, for example, the user can select affordance 1943 to turn the notifications of emails back on. In some examples, the user can also provide another speech input, such as "Notify me of incoming emails" to torn on the notification of emails.

[0347] With reference to FIG. 19D, in some embodiments, the digital assistant may not be able to complete a task based on user's speech input and can thus provide a user interface to enable the user to perform the task. As shown in FIG. 19D, in some examples, the user provides a speech input 1958 such as "Show a custom message on my screen saver." The digital assistant determines that the user intent is to change the screen saver settings to show a custom message. The digital assistant further determines that the user intent is to vary a display configuration, and therefore the user intent indicates a request for performing a task.

[0348] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates a request for performing a task, the digital assistant instantiates a process associated with the user device to perform the task. In some examples, if the digital assistant cannot complete the task based on the user intent, it provides a user interface enabling the user to perform the task. For example, based on speech input 1958, the digital assistant may not be able to determine the content of the custom message that is to be shown on the screen saver and therefore carraot complete the task of displaying the custom message. As illustrated in FIG. 19D, in some examples, the digital assistant instantiates a display configuration process and provides a user interface 1946 (e.g., a snippet or a window) to enable the user to manually change the screen saver settings. As another example, the digital assistant provides a link 1944 (e.g., a link to the display configurations) enabling the user to perform the task. The user selects link 1944 by APPENDIX using an input device such as a mouse, a finger, or a stylus. Upon receiving the user's selection, the digital assistant instantiates a display configuration process and displays user interface 1946 to enable the user to change the screen saver settings. In some examples, the digital assistant further provides a spoken output 1978 such as "You can explore screen saver options in the screen saver configurations."

7. Process for Operating a Digital Assistant - Intelligent Search and Object Management.

[0349] FIGs. 20A-20G illustrate a flow diagram of an exemplary process 2000 for operating a digital assistant in accordance with some embodiments. Process 2000 may be performed using one or more devices 104, 108, 200, 400, or 600 (FIGs. 1 , 2A, 4, or 6A-B). Operations in process 2000 are, optionally, combined or split, and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[0350] With reference to FIG. 20A, at block 2002, prior to receiving a first speech input, an affordance to invoke a digital assistant service is displayed on a display associated with a user device. At block 2003, the digital assistant is invoked in response to receiving a pre-determined phrase. At block 2004, the digital assistant is invoked in response to receiving a selection of the affordance.

[0351] At block 2006, a first speech input is received from a user. At block 2008, context information associated with the user device is identified. At block 2009, the context information includes at least one of: user-specific data, metadata associated with one or more objects, sensor data, and user device configuration data.

[0352] At block 2010, a user intent is determined based on the first speech input and the context information. At block 2012, to determine the user intent, one or more actionable intents are determined. At block 2013, one or more parameters associated with the actionable intent are determined.

[0353] With reference to FIG. 20B, at block 2015, it is determined whether the user intent is to perform a task using a searching process or an object managing process. The searching process is configured to search data stored internally or externally to the user device, and the object managing process is configured to manage objects associated with the user device. At APPENDIX block 2016, it is determined whether the speech input includes one or more keywords representing the searching process or the object managing process. At block 2018, it is determined whether the task is associated with searching. At block 2020, in accordance with a determination that the task is associated with searching, it is determined whether performing the task requires the searching process. At block 2021 , in accordance with a determination that performing the task does not require the searching process, a spoken request to select the searching process or the object managing process is outputted, and a second speech input is received from the user. The second speech input indicates the selection of the searching process or the object managing process.

[0354] At block 2022, in accordance with a determination that performing the task does not require the searching process, it is determined, based on a predetermined configuration, whether the task is to be performed using the searching process or the object managing process.

[0355] With reference to FIG. 20C, at block 2024, in accordance with a determination that the task is not associated with searching, it is determined whether the task is associated with managing at least one object. At block 2025, in accordance with a determination that the task is not associated with managing the at least one object, at least one of the following is performed; determining whether that task can be performed using a fourth process available to the user device and initiating a dialog with the user.

[0356] At block 2026, in accordance with a determination the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process, the task is performed using the searching process. At block 2028, at least one object is searched using the searching process. At block 2029, the at least one object includes at least one of a folder or a file. At block 2030, the file includes at least one of a photo, audio, or a video. At block 2031, the file is stored internally or externally to the user device. At block 2032, searching at least one of the folder or the file is based on metadata associated with the folder or the file. At block 2034, the at least one object includes a communication. At block 2035, the communication includes at least one of an email, a message, a notification, or a voicemail. At block 2036, metadata associated with the communication is searched. APPENDIX

[0357] With reference to FIG. 20D, at block 2037, the at least one object includes at least one of a contact or a calendar. At block 2038, the at least one object includes an application. At block 2039, the at least one object includes an online informational source.

[0358] At block 2040, in accordance with the determination that the user intent is to perform the task using the object managing process, the task is performed using the object managing process. At block 2042, the task is associated with searching, and the at least one object is searched using the object managing process. At block 2043, the at least one object includes at least one of a folder or a file. At block 2044, the file includes at least one of a photo, an audio, or a video. At block 2045, the file is stored internally or externally to the user device. At block 2046, searching at least one of the folder or the file is based on metadata associated with the folder or the file.

[0359] At block 2048, the object managing process is instantiated. Instantiating the object managing process includes invoking the object managing process, generating a new instance of the object managing process, or executing an existing instance of the object managing process.

[0360] With reference to FIG. 20E, at block 2049, the at least one object is created. At block 2050, the at least one object is stored. At block 2051 , the at least one object is compressed. At block 2052, the at least one object is moved from a first physical or virtual storage to a second physical or virtual storage. At block 2053, the at least one object is copied from a first physical or virtual storage to a second physical or virtual storage. At block 2054, the at least one object stored in a physical or virtual storage is deleted. At block 2055, the at least one object stored at a physical or virtual storage is recovered. At block 2056, the at least one object is marked.

Marking of the at least one object is at least one of visible or associated with metadata of the at least one object. At block 2057, the at least one object is backup according to a predetermined time period for backing up. At block 2058, the at least one object is shared among one or more electronic devices communicatively connected to the user device.

[0361] With reference to FIG. 20F, at block 2060, a response is provided based on a result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process. At block 2061, a first user interface is displayed providing the result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process. At block 2062, a link associated with the result of APPENDIX performing the task using the searching process is displayed. At block 2063, a spoken output is provided according to the result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process.

[0362] At block 2064, it is provided an afford ance that enables the user to manipulate the result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process. At block 2065, it is instantiated a third process that operates using the result of performing the task.

[0363J With reference to FIG. 20F, at block 2066, a confidence level is determined. At block 2067, the confidence level represents the accuracy in determining the user intent based on the first speech input and context information associated with the user device. At block 2068, the confidence level represents the accuracy in determining whether the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process or the object managing process.

[0364] With reference to FIG. 20G, at block 2069, the confidence level represents the accuracy in performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process.

[0365] At block 2070, the response is provided in accordance with the determination of the confidence level. At block 2071 , it is determined whether the confidence level is greater than or equal to a threshold confidence level. At block 2072, in accordance with a determination that the confidence level is greater than or equal to the threshold confidence level, a first response is provided. At block 2073, in accordance with a determination that the confidence level is less than a threshold confidence level, a second response is provided.

8. Process for Operating a Digital Assistant - Continuity.

[0366] FIGs. 21A-21E illustrate a flow diagram of an exemplary process 2100 for operating a digital assistant in accordance with some embodiments. Process 2100 may be performed using one or more devices 104, 108, 200, 400, 600, 1400, 1500, 1600, or 1700 (FIGs. 1, 2A, 4, 6A-6B, 14A-14D, 15A--15D, 16A-16C, and 17A-17E). Operations in process 2100 are, optionally, combined or split and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[0367] With reference to FIG. 21 A, at block 2102, prior to receiving a first speech input, an affordance to invoke a digital assistant service is displayed on a display associated with a user APPENDIX device. At block 2103, the digital assistant is invoked in response to receiving a pre -determined phrase. At block 2104, the digital assistant is invoked in response to receiving a selection of the affordance.

[0368] At block 2106, a first speech input is received from a user to perform a task. At block 2108, context information associated with the user device is identified. At block 2109, the user device is configured to provide a plurality of user interfaces. At block 21 10, the user device includes a laptop computer, a desktop computer, or a server. At block 2112, the context information includes at least one of; user-specific data, metadata associated with one or more objects, sensor data, and user device configuration data.

[0369] At block 2114, a user intent is determined based on the speech input and the context information. At block 21 15, to determine the user intent, one or more actionable intents are determined. At block 2116, one or more parameters associated with the actionable intent are determined.

[0370] With reference to FIG. 21B, at block 2118, in accordance with user intent, it is determined whether the task is to be performed at the user device or at a first electronic device communicatively connected to the user device. At block 2120, the first electronic device includes a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a server, a sniartphone, a tablet, a set-top box, or a watch. At block 2121, determining whether the task is to be performed at the user device or at the first electronic device is based on one or more keywords included in the speech input. At block 2122, it is determined whether performing the task at the user device satisfies performance criteria. At block 2123, the performance criteria are determined based on one or more user preferences. At block 2124, the performance criteria are determined based on the device configuration data. At block 2125, the performance criteria are dynamically updated. At block 2126, in accordance with a determination that performing the task at the user device satisfies the performance criteria, it is determined that the task is to be performed at the user device.

[0371] With reference to FIG. 21C, at block 2128, in accordance with a determination that performing the task at the user device does not satisfy the performance criteria, it is determined whether performing the task at the first electronic device satisfies the performance criteria. At block 2130, in accordance with a determination that performing the task at the first electronic APPENDIX device satisfies the performance criteria, it is determined that the task is to be performed at the first electronic device. At block 2132, in accordance with a determination that performing the task at the first electronic device does not meet the performance criteria, it is determined whether performing the task at the second electronic device satisfies the performance criteria.

[0372] At block 2134, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the user device and content for performing the task is located remotely, the content for performing the task is received. At block 2135, at least a portion of the content is received from the first electronic device. At least a portion of the content is stored in the first electronic device. At block 2136, at least a portion of the content is received from a third electronic device.

[0373] With reference to FIG. 21D, at block 2138, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the first electronic device and the content for performing the task is located remotely to the first electronic device, the content for performing the task is provided to the first electronic device. At block 2139, at least a portion of the content is provided from the user device to the first electronic device. At least a portion of the content is stored at the user device. At block 2140, at least a portion of the content is caused to be provided from a fourth electronic device to the first electronic device. At least a portion of the content is stored at the fourth electronic device.

[0374] At block 2142, the task is to be performed at the user device. A first response is provided at the user device using the received content. At block 2144, the task is performed at the user device. At block 2145, performing the task at the user device is a continuation of a task partially performed remotely to the user device. At block 2146, a first user interface is displayed associated with the task to be performed at the user device. At block 2148, a link associated with the task is to be performed at the user device. At block 2150, a spoken output is provided according to the task to be performed at the user device.

[0375] With reference to FIG. 2IE, at block 2152, the task is to be performed at the first electronic device, and a second response is provided at the user device. At block 2154, the task is to be performed at the first electronic device. At block 2156, the task to be performed at the first electronic device is a continuation of a task performed remotely to the first electronic device. At block 2158, a spoken output is provided according to the task to be performed at the APPENDIX first electronic device. At block 2160, a spoken output is provided according to the task to be performed at the first electronic device.

9. Process for Operating a Digital Assistant - System Configuration Management.

[0376] FIGs. 22A-22D illustrate a flow diagram of an exemplary process 2200 for operating a digital assistant in accordance with some embodiments. Process 2200 may be performed using one or more devices 104, 108, 200, 400, 600, or 1800 (FIGs. 1, 2A, 4, 6A-6B, and 18C-18D). Operations in process 2200 are, optionally, combined or split, and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[0377] With reference to FIG. 22A, at block 2202, prior to receiving a speech input, an affordance to invoke a digital assistant service is displayed on a display associated with a user device. At block 2203, the digital assistant is invoked in response to receiving a pre-determined phrase. At block 2204, the digital assistant is invoked in response to receiving a selection of the affordance.

[0378] At block 2206, a speech input is received from a user to manage one or more system configurations of the user device. The user device is configured to concurrently provide a plurality of user interfaces. At block 2207, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise audio configurations. At block 2208, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise date and time configurations. At block 2209, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise dictation configurations. At block 2210, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise display configurations. At block 2211 , the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise input device configurations. At block 2212, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise network configurations. At block 2213, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise notification configurations.

[0379] With reference to FIG. 22B, at block 2214, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise printer configurations. At block 2215, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise security configurations. At block 2216, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise backup configurations. At block 2217, APPENDIX the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise application configurations. At block 2218, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise user interface configurations.

[0380] At block 2220, context information associated with the user device is identified. At block 2223, the context information comprises at least one of: user-specific data, device configuration data, and sensor data. At block 2224, the user intent is determined based on the speech input and the context information. At block 2225, one or more actionable intents are determined. At block 2226, one or more parameters associated with the actionable intent are determined.

[0381] With reference to FIG. 22C, at block 2228, it is determined whether the user intent indicates an informational request or a request for performing a task. At block 2229, it is determined whether the user intent is to vary a system configuration.

[0382] At block 2230, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates an informational request, a spoken response is provided to the informational request. At block 2231 , status of one or more system configurations is obtained according to the informational request. At block 2232, the spoken response is provided according to the status of one or more system configurations.

[0383] At block 2234, in addition to providing the spoken response to the informational request, a first user interface is displayed to provide information according to the status of the one or more system configurations. At block 2236, in addition to providing the spoken response to the informational request, a link associated with the informational request is provided.

[0384] At block 2238, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates a request for performing a task, a process associated with the user device is instantiated to perform the task. At block 2239, the task is performed using the process. At block 2240, a first spoken output is provided according to a result of performing the task.

[0385] With reference to FIG. 22D, at block 2242, a second user interface is provided to enable the user to manipulate a result of performing the task. At block 2244, the second user interface comprises a link associated with the result of performing the task. APPENDIX

[0386] At block 2246, a third user interface is provided to enable the user to perform the task. At block 2248, the third user interface includes a link enabling the user to perform the task. At block 2250, a second spoken output associated with the third user interface is provided.

10. Electronic Device - intelligent search and object management

[0387] FIG. 23 shows a functional block diagram of electronic device 2300 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described examples, including those described with reference to FIGs. 8A-8F, 9A-9H, 10A-10B, 1 1 A-11F, 12A- 12D, 13A-13C, 14A- 14D, 15A- 15D, 16A-16C, 17A-17E, 18A-18F, and 19A-19D. The functional blocks of the device can be optionally implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described examples. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 23 can be optionally combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described examples. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination, separation, or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[0388] As shown in FIG. 23, electronic device 2300 can include a microphone 2302 and processing unit 2308. In some examples, processing unit 2308 includes a receiving unit 2310, a an identifying unit 2312, a determining unit 2314, a performing unit 2316, a providing unit 2318, an instantiating unit 2320, a displaying unit 2322, an outputting unit 2324, an initiating unit 2326, a searching unit 2328, a generating unit 2330, an executing unit 2332, a creating unit 2334, an instantiating unit 2335, a storing unit 2336, a compressing unit 2338, a copying unit 2340, a deleting unit 2342, a recovering unit 2344, a marking unit 2346, a backing up unit 2348, a sharing unit 2350, a causing unit 2352, and an obtaining unit 2354.

[0389] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to receive (e.g., with the receiving unit 2310) a first speech input from a user; identify (e.g., with the identifying unit 2312) context information associated with the user device; and determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) a user intent based on the first speech input and the context information.

[0390] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether the user intent is to perform a task using a searching process or APPENDIX an object managing process. The searching process is configured to search data stored internally or externally to the user device, and the object managing process is configured to manage objects associated with the user device.

[0391] In some examples, in accordance with a determination the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process, the processing unit 2308 is configured to perform (e.g., with the performing unit 2316) the task using the searching process. In some examples, in accordance with the determination that the user intent is to perform the task using the object managing process, the processing unit 2308 is configured to perform (e.g., with the performing unit 2316) the task using the object managing process.

[0392] In some examples, prior to receiving the first speech input, the processing unit 2308 is configured to display (e.g., with the displaying unit 2322), on a display associated with the user device, an affordance to invoke the digital assistant service.

[0393] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to invoke (e.g., with the invoking unit 2320) the digital assistant in response to receiving a pre-determined phrase.

[0394] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to invoke (e.g., with the invoking unit 2320) the digital assistant in response to receiving a selection of the affordance.

[0395] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) one or more actionable intents; and determine (e.g., with determining unit 2314) one or more parameters associated with the actionable intent.

[0396] In some examples, the context information comprises at least one of: user-specific data, metadata associated with one or more objects, sensor data, and user device configuration data.

[0397] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether the speech input includes one or more keywords representing the searching process or the object managing process.

[0398] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether the task is associated with searching. In accordance with a APPENDIX determination that the task is associated with searching, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether performing the task requires the searching process: and in accordance with a determination that the task is not associated with searching, determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether the task is associated with managing at least one object.

[0399] In some examples, the task is associated with searching, and in accordance with a determination that performing the task does not require the searching process, the processing unit 2308 is configured to output (e.g., with the outputting unit 2324) a spoken request to select the searching process or the object managing process and receive (e.g., with the receiving unit 2310), from the user, a second speech input indicating the selection of the searching process or the object managing process.

[0400] In some examples, the task is associated with searching, and in accordance with a determination that performing the task does not require the searching process, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314), based on a predetermined configuration, whether the task is to be performed using the searching process or the object managing process.

[0401] In some examples, the task is not associated with searching, and in accordance with a determination that the task is not associated with managing the at least one object, the processing unit 2308 is configured to perform (e.g., with the performing unit 2316) at least one of:

determining (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether that task can be performed using a fourth process available to the user device; and initiating (e.g., with the initiating unit 2326) dialog with the user.

[0402] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to search (e.g., with the searching unit 2328) at least one object using the searching process.

[0403] In some examples, the at least one object includes at least one of a folder or a file. The file includes at least one of a photo, audio, or a video. The file is stored internally or externally to the user device. APPENDIX

[0404] In some examples, searching at least one of the folder or the file is based on metadata associated with the folder or the file.

[0405] In some examples, the at least one object includes a communication. The

communication includes at least one of an email, a message, a notification, or a voicemail.

[0406] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to search (e.g., with the searching unit 2328) metadata associated with the communication.

[0407] In some examples, the at least one object includes at least one of a contact or a calendar.

[0408] In some examples, the at least one object includes an application.

[0409] In some examples, the at least one object includes an online informational source.

[0410] In some examples, the task is associated with searching, and the processing unit 2308 is configured to search (e.g., with the searching unit 2328) the at least one object using the object managing process.

[0411] In some examples, the at least one object includes at least one of a folder or a file. The file includes at least one of a photo, an audio, or a video. The file is stored internally or externally to the user device.

[0412] In some examples, searching at least one of the folder or the file is based on metadata associated with the folder or the file.

[0413] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to instantiate (e.g., with the instantiating unit 2335) the object managing process. Instantiating of the object managing process includes invoking the object managing process, generating a new instance of the object managing process, or executing an existing instance of the object managing process.

[0414] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to create (e.g., with the creating unit 2334) the at least one object. APPENDIX

[0415] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to store (e.g., with the storing unit 2336) the at least one object.

[0416] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to compress (e.g., with the compressing unit 2338) the at least one object.

[0417] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to move (e.g., with the moving unit 2339) the at least one object from a first physical or virtual storage to a second physical or virtual storage.

[0418] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to copy (e.g., with the copying unit 2340) the at least one object from a first physical or virtual storage to a second physical or virtual storage.

[0419] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to delete (e.g., with the deleting unit 2342) the at least one object stored in a physical or virtual storage.

[0420] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to recover (e.g., with the recovering unit 2344) at least one object stored at a physical or virtual storage.

[0421] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to mark (e.g., with the marking unit 2346) the at least one object. Marking of the at least one object is at least one of visible or associated with metadata of the at least one object.

[0422] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to back up (e.g., with the backing up unit 2348) the at least one object according to a predetermined time period for backing up.

[0423] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to share (e.g., with the sharing unit 2350) the at. least one object among one or more electronic devices communicatively connected to the user device.

[0424] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a response based on a result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process. APPENDIX

[0425] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to display (e.g., with the displaying unit 2322) a first user interface providing the result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process,

[0426] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a link associated with the result of performing the task using the searching process.

[0427] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a spoken output according to the result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process.

[0428] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) an affordance that enables the user to manipulate the result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process.

[0429] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to instantiate (e.g., with the instantiating unit 2335) a third process that operates using the result of performing the task.

[0430] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) a confidence level; and provide (e.g., with providing unit 2318) the response in accordance with the determination of the confidence level.

[0431] In some examples, the confidence level represents the accuracy in determining the user intent based on the first speech input and context information associated with the user device.

[0432] In some examples, the confidence level represents the accuracy in determining whether the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process or the object managing process.

[0433] In some examples, the confidence level represents the accuracy in performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process. APPENDIX

[0434] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether the confidence level is greater than or equal to a threshold confidence level. In accordance with a determination that the confidence level is greater than or equal to the threshold confidence level, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a first response; and in accordance with a determination that the confidence level is less than a threshold confidence level, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a second response.

11. Electronic Device - Continuity

[0435] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to receive (e.g., with the receiving unit 2310) a speech input from a user to perform a task; identify (e.g., with the identifying unit 2312) context information associated with the user device; and determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) a user intent based on the speech input and context information associated with the user device.

[0436] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to, in accordance with user intent, determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether the task is to be performed at the user device or at a first electronic device communicatively connected to the user device.

[0437] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the user device and content for performing the task is located remotely, the processing unit 2308 is configured to receive (e.g., with the receiving unit 2310) the content for performing the task.

[0438] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the first electronic device and the content for performing the task is located remotely to the first electronic device, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) the content for performing the task to the first electronic device.

[0439] In some examples, the user device is configured to provide a plurality of user interfaces. APPENDIX

|0440] In some examples, the user device includes a laptop computer, a desktop computer, or a server.

[0441] In some examples, the first electronic device includes a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a server, a smartphone, a tablet, a set-top box, or a watch.

[0442] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to, prior to receiving the speech input, display (e.g., with the displaying unit 2322), on a display of the user device, an affordance to invoke the digital assistant.

[0443] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to invoke (e.g., with the invoking unit 2320) the digital assistant in response to receiving a pre-determined phrase.

[0444] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to invoke (e.g., with the invoking unit 2320) the digital assistant in response to receiving a selection of the affordance.

[0445] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) one or more actionable intents; and determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) one or more parameters associated with the actionable intent.

[0446] In some examples, the context information comprises at least one of: user-specific data, sensor data, and user device configuration data.

[0447] In some examples, determining whether the task is to be performed at the user device or at the first electronic device is based on one or more keywords included in the speech input.

[0448] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with determining unit 2314) whether performing the task at the user device satisfies performance criteria.

[0449] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that performing the task at the user device satisfies the performance criteria, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) that the task is to be performed at the user device. APPENDIX

[0450] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that performing the task at the user device does not satisfy the performance criteria, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether performing the task at the first electronic device satisfies the performance criteria.

[0451] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that performing the task at the first electronic device satisfies the performance criteria, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining 2314) that the task is to be performed at the first electronic device.

[0452] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the performing the task at the first electronic device does not meet the performance criteria, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether performing the task at the second electronic device satisfies the performance criteria.

[0453] In some examples, the performance criteria are determined based on one or more user preferences.

[0454] In some examples, the performance criteria are determined based on the device configuration data.

[0455] In some examples, the performance criteria are dynamically updated.

[0456] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the user device and content for performing the task is located remotely, the processing unit 2308 is configured to receive (e.g., with the receiving unit 2310) at least a portion of the content from the first electronic device, wherein at least a portion of the content is stored in the first electronic device.

[0457] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the user device and content for performing the task is located remotely, the processing unit 2308 is configured to receive (e.g., with the receiving unit 2310) at least a portion of the content from a third electronic device. APPENDIX

[0458] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the first electronic device and the content for performing the task is located remotely to the first electronic device, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) at least a portion of the content from the user device to the first electronic device, wherein at least a portion of the content is stored at the user device.

[0459] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the task is to be performed at the first electronic device and the content for performing the task is located remotely to the first electronic device, the processing unit 2308 is configured to cause (e.g., with the causing unit 2352) at least a portion of the content to be provided from a fourth electronic device to the first electronic device. At least a portion of the content is stored at the fourth electronic device.

[0460] In some examples, the task is to be performed at the user device, and processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a first response at the user device using the received content.

[0461] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to perform (e.g., with the performing unit 2316) the task at the user device.

[0462] In some examples, performing the task at the user device is a continuation of a task partially performed remotely to the user device.

[0463] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to display (e.g., with the displaying unit 2322) a first user interface associated with the task to be performed at the user device.

[0464] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a link associated with the task to be performed at the user device.

[0465] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a spoken output according to the task to be performed at the user device.

[0466] In some examples, the task is to be performed at the first electronic device, and the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a second response at the user device. APPENDIX

[0467] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to cause (e.g., with the causing unit 2352) the task to be performed at the first electronic device,

|0468] In some examples, the task to be performed at the first electronic device is a continuation of a task performed remotely to the first electronic device.

[0469J In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a spoken output according to the task to be performed at the first electronic device.

[0470] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) an affordance that enables the user to select another electronic device for performance of the task.

12. Electronic Device - System Configuration Management

[0471] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to receive (e.g., with the receiving unit 2310) a speech input from a user to manage one or more system configurations of the user device. The user device is configured to concurrently provide a plurality of user interfaces.

[0472] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to identify (e.g., with the identifying unit 2312) context information associated with the user device; and determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) a user intent based on the speech input and context information.

[0473] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether the user intent indicates an informational request or a request for performing a task.

[0474] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates an informational request, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a spoken response to the informational request. APPENDIX

[0475] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates a request for performing a task, the processing unit 2308 is configured to instantiate (e.g., with the instantiating unit 2335) a process associated with the user device to perform the task.

[0476] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to, prior to receiving the speech input, display (e.g., with the displaying unit 2322) on a display of the user device, an affordance to invoke the digital assistant.

[0477] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to invoke (e.g., with the invoking unit 2320) the digital assistant service in response to receiving a pre -determined phrase.

[0478] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to invoke (e.g., with the invoking unit 2320) the digital assistant service in response to receiving a selection of the affordance.

[0479] In some examples, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise audio configurations.

[0480] In some examples, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise date and time configurations.

[0481] In some examples, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise di ctation configuration s .

[0482] In some examples, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise display configurations.

[0483] In some examples, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise input device configurations.

[0484] In some examples, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise network configurations.

[0485] In some examples, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise notification configurations. APPENDIX

[0486] In some examples, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise printer configurations,

[0487] In some examples, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise security configurations.

[0488] In some examples, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise backup configurations.

[0489] In some examples, the one or more system configurations of the user device comprise application configurations.

[0490] In some examples, the one or more system conf gurations of the user device comprise user interface configurations.

[0491] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) one or more actionable intents; and determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) one or more parameters associated with the actionable intent.

[0492] In some examples, the context information comprises at least one of: user-specific data, device configuration data, and sensor data.

[0493] In some examples, the processing unit 2.308 is configured to determine (e.g., with the determining unit 2314) whether the user intent is to vary a system configuration.

[0494] In some examples, the processing unit 2.308 is configured to obtain (e.g., with the obtaining unit 2354) status of one or more system configurations according to the informational request; and provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) the spoken response according to the status of one or more system configurations.

[0495] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates an informational request, the processing unit 2308 is configured to, in addition to providing the spoken response to the informational request, display (e.g., with the displaying unit 2322) a first user interface providing information according to the status of the one or more system configurations. APPENDIX

[0496] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates an informational request, the processing unit 2308 is configured to, in addition to providing the spoken response to the informational request, provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a link associated with the informational request,

[0497] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates a request for performing a task, the processing unit 2308 is configured to perform (e.g., with the performing unit 2316) the task using the process.

[0498] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a first spoken output according to a result of performing the task.

[0499] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a second user interface enabling the user to manipulate a result of performing the task.

[0500] In some examples, the second user interface comprises a link associated with the result of performing the task.

[0501] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the user intent indicates a request for performing a task, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a third user interface enabling the user to perform the task.

[0502] In some examples, the third user interface includes a link enabling the user to perform the task.

[0503] In some examples, the processing unit 2308 is configured to provide (e.g., with the providing unit 2318) a second spoken output associated with the third user interface.

[0504] The operation described above with respect to FIG. 23 is, optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGs. I, 2A, 4, 6A-B, or 7A-7B. For example, receiving operation 2310, identifying operation 2312, determining operation 2314, performing operation 2316, and providing operation 2318 are optionally implemented by processor(s) 220. It would be clear to a person of ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in FIGs. 1, 2A, 4, 6A-B, or 7A-7B. APPENDIX

[0505] It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 12 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. For example, processing unit 2308 can have an associated "controller" unit that is operatively coupled with processing unit 2308 to enable operation. This controller unit is not separately illustrated in FIG. 23 but is understood to be within the grasp of one of ordinary skill in the art who is designing a device having a processing unit 2308, such as device 2300. As another example, one or more units, such as the receiving unit 2310, may be hardware units outside of processing unit 2308 in some embodiments. The description herein thus optionally supports combination, separation, and/or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[0506] The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the techniques and their practical applications. Others skilled in the art are thereby enabled to best utilize the techniques and various

embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.

[0507] Although the disclosure and examples have been fully described with reference to the accompanying drawings, it is to be noted that various changes and modifications will become apparent to those skilled in the art. Such changes and modifications are to be understood as being included within the scope of the disclosure and examples as defined by the claims.

APPENDIX

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:

1. An electronic device, comprising:

one or more processors;

memory; and

one or more programs stored in memory, the one or more programs including instructions for:

receiving a first speech input from a user;

identifying context information associated with the user device;

determining a user intent based on the first speech input and the context information; determining whether the user intent is to perform a task using a searching process or an object managing process, wherein the searching process is configured to search data stored internally or externally to the user device, and the object managing process is configured to manage objects associated with the user device;

in accordance with a determination the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process, performing the task using the searching process; and

in accordance with the determination that the user intent is to perform the task using the object managing process, performing the task using the object managing process.

2. The electronic device of claim 1 , further comprising, prior to receiving the first speech input:

invoking the digital assistant in response to receiving a pre-determined phrase, or invoking the digital assistant in response to receiving a selection of an affordance.

3. The electronic device of claim 1, wherein determining the user intent comprises:

determining one or more actionable intents; and

determining one or more parameters associated with the actionable intent,

4. The electronic device of claim 1 , wherein the context information comprises at least one of: user-specific data, metadata associated with one or more objects, sensor data, and user device configuration data. APPENDIX

5. The electronic device of claim 1, wherein determining whether the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process or the object managing process comprises:

determining whether the speech input includes one or more keywords representing the searching process or the object managing process.

6. The electronic device of claim 1, wherein determining whether the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process or the object managing process comprises;

determining whether the task is associated with searching;

in accordance with a determination that the task is associated with searching, determining whether performing the task requires the searching process; and

in accordance with a determination that the task is not associated wit searching, determining whether the task is associated with managing at least one object.

7. The electronic device of claim 6, wherein the task is associated with searching, further comprising:

in accordance with a determination that performing the task does not require the searching process,

outputting a spoken request to select the searching process or the object managing process, and

receiving, from the user, a second speech input indicating the selection of the searching process or the object managing process.

8. The electronic device of claim 6, wherein the task is associated with searching, further comprising:

in accordance with a determination that performing the task does not require the searching process, determining, based on a pre -determined configuration, whether the task is to be performed using the searching process or the object managing process.

9. The electronic device of claim 6, wherein the task is not associated with searching, further comprising; APPENDIX in accordance with a determination that the task is not associated with managing the at least one object, performing at least one of:

determining whether that task can be performed using a fourth process available to the user device; and

initiating a dialog with the user.

10. The electronic device of claim 1 , wherein performing the task using the searching process comprises;

searching at least one object using the searching process.

11. The electronic device of claim 10, wherein the at least one object includes at least one of: a folder, a file, a communication, a contact, a calendar, an application, and an online

informational source.

12. The electronic device of claim 1 1 , wherein the file includes at least one of a photo, audio, or a video; wherein the file is stored internally or externally to the user device; and wherein searching at least one of the folder or the file is based on metadata associated with the folder or the file.

13. The electronic device of claim 11, wherein the communication includes at least one of an email, a message, a notification, or a voicemail.

14. The electronic device of claim 1 1 , further comprising searching metadata associated with the communication.

15. The electronic device of claim 1, wherein the task is associated with searching, and wherein performing the task using the object managing process comprises:

searching the at least one object using the object managing process.

16. The electronic device of claim 15, wherein the at least one object includes at least one of a folder or a file. APPENDIX

17. The electronic device of claim 16, wherein the file includes at least one of a photo, an audio, or a video; wherein the file is stored internally or externally to the user device; and wherein searching at least one of the folder or the file is based on metadata associated with the folder or the file.

18. The electronic device of claim 1 , wherein performing the task using the object managing process comprises instantiating the object managing process, wherein instantiating the object managing process comprises invoking the object managing process, generating a new instance of the object managing process, or executing an existing instance of the object managing process.

19. The electronic device of claim 1, wherein performing the task using the object managing process comprises at least one of:

creating the at least one object;

storing the at least one object;

compressing the at least one object;

moving the at least one object from a first physical or virtual storage to a second physical or virtual storage;

copying the at least one object from a first physical or virtual storage to a second physical or virtual storage;

deleting the at least one object stored in a physical or virtual storage;

recovering at least one object stored at a physical or virtual storage;

marking the at least one object, wherein marking of the at least one object is at least one of visible or associated with metadata of the at least one object;

backing up the at least one object according to a predetermined time period for backing up; and

sharing the at least one object among one or more electronic devices communicatively connected to the user device.

20. The electronic device of claim 1, further comprising: providing a response based on a result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process. APPENDIX

21. The electronic device of claim 20, wherein providing the response based on the result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process comprises at least one of:

displaying a first user interface providing the result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process;

providing a link associated with the result of performing the task using the searching process;

providing a spoken output according to the result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process;

providing an affordance that enables the user to manipulate the result of performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process; and

instantiating a third process that operates using the result of performing the task.

22. The electronic device of claim 20, wherein providing the response based on the result of performing the task using searching process or the object managing process comprises:

determining a confidence level ; and

providing the response in accordance with the determination of the confidence level.

23. The electronic device of claim 22, wherein the confidence level represents at least one of: the accuracy in determining the user intent based on the first speech input and context information associated with the user device;

the accuracy in determining whether the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process or the object managing process; and

the accuracy in performing the task using the searching process or the object managing process.

24. The electronic device of claim 22, wherein providing the response in accordance with the determination of the confidence level comprises:

determining whether the confidence level is greater than or equal to a threshold confidence level; APPENDIX in accordance with a determination that the confidence level is greater than or equal to the threshold confidence level, providing a first response; and

in accordance with a determination that the confidence level is less than a threshold confidence level, providing a second response.

25. A non- transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to:

receive a first speech input from a user;

identify context information associated with the user device;

determine a user intent based on the first speech input and the context information; determine whether the user intent is to perform a task using a searching process or an object managing process, wherein the searching process is configured to search data stored internally or externally to the user device, and the object managing process is configured to manage objects associated with the user device;

in accordance with a determination the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process, perform the task using the searching process; and

in accordance with the determination that the user intent is to perform the task using the object managing process, perform the task using the object managing process.

26. A method for providing a digital assistant service, comprising:

receiving a first speech input from a user;

identifying context information associated with the user device;

determining a user intent based on the first speech input and the context information; determining whether the user intent is to perform a task using a searching process or an object managing process, wherein the searching process is configured to search data stored internally or externally to the user device, and the object managing process is configured to manage objects associated with the user device;

in accordance with a determination the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process, performing the task using the searching process; and

in accordance with the determination that the user intent is to perform the task using the object managing process, performing the task using the object managing process. APPENDIX

ABSTRACT

Systems and processes for operating a digital assistant are provided. In one example, a method includes receiving a first speech input from a user. The method further includes identifying context information and determining a user intent based on the first speech input and the context information. The method further includes determining whether the user intent is to perform a task using a searching process or an object managing process. The searching process is configured to search data, and the object managing process is configured to manage objects. The method further includes, in accordance with a determination the user intent is to perform the task using the searching process, performing the task using the searching process; and in accordance with the determination that the user intent is to perform the task using the object managing process, performing the task using the object managing process.

APPENDIX

FM 2Λ APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

 APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX APPENDIX

IJ77 APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

281 APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

292 APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

IJ96

IJ97 APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

ŁPPENDIX

APPENDIX

ŁPPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

ŁPPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

ŁPPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

ŁPPENDIX

ŁPPENDIX

APPENDIX

ŁPPENDIX

319

320 APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

ŁPPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

ŁPPENDIX

FIG, a APPENDIX

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

s ObfainiM -Unt